Maran Illustrated Office 2003

TEAM LinG Microsoft® Office 2003 the examples used in this book from www.maran.com/office2003 ® & TEAM LinG MARA...

Author: maranGraphics Development Group

369 downloads 3160 Views 375MB Size Report

This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!

Report copyright / DMCA form

DOWNLOAD PDF

TEAM LinG

Microsoft®

Office 2003 the examples used in this book from www.maran.com/office2003

®

&

TEAM LinG

MARAN ILLUSTRATED™ Microsoft® Office 2003 © 2003-2005 by maranGraphics Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical or otherwise, including by photocopying, recording, or by any storage or retrieval system without prior written permission from maranGraphics, except for the inclusion of brief quotations in a review. Distributed in the U.S. and Canada by Thomson Course Technology PTR. For enquiries about Maran Illustrated™ books outside the U.S. and Canada, please contact maranGraphics at [email protected] For U.S. orders and customer service, please contact Thomson Course Technology at 1-800-354-9706. For Canadian orders, please contact Thomson Course Technology at 1-800-268-2222 or 416-752-9448. ISBN: 1-59200-890-9 Library of Congress Catalog Card Number: 2005921495 Printed in the United States of America 05 06 07 08 09 BU 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Trademarks maranGraphics is a registered trademark of maranGraphics Inc. Maran Illustrated, the Maran Illustrated logos and any trade dress related to or associated with the contents or cover of this book are trademarks of maranGraphics Inc. and may not be used without written permission. The Thomson Course Technology PTR logo is a trademark of Course Technology and may not be used without written permission. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Permissions Microsoft ©2003 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.

Important maranGraphics and Thomson Course Technology PTR cannot provide software support. Please contact the appropriate software manufacturer’s technical support line or Web site for assistance.

DISCLAIMER: PURCHASERS, READERS OR USERS OF THIS BOOK AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE FOLLOWING TERMS.

INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS BOOK HAS BEEN OBTAINED BY MARANGRAPHICS AND FROM SOURCES BELIEVED TO BE RELIABLE. HOWEVER, NEITHER MARANGRAPHICS INC. NOR THOMSON COURSE TECHNOLOGY PTR NOR ANY OF THEIR RESPECTIVE AFFILIATES, DISTRIBUTORS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, CONTENT CONTRIBUTORS OR LICENSORS, IF ANY, MAKE ANY REPRESENTATION, WARRANTY, GUARANTEE OR ENDORSEMENT AS TO THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS BOOK OR AS TO THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS REFERENCED IN THIS BOOK, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION REGARDING THEIR ACCURACY, CORRECTNESS, TIMELINESS, RELIABILITY, USEFULNESS OR COMPLETENESS, OR THE RESULTS THAT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE USE OF THIS BOOK, AND DISCLAIM ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS OR SUITABILITY FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS BOOK IS CONSTANTLY EVOLVING AND THE INFORMATION PROVIDED IN THIS BOOK IS NOT EXHAUSTIVE. IT SHOULD NOT BE USED AS A SUBSTITUTE FOR CONSULTING WITH A QUALIFIED PROFESSIONAL WHERE PROFESSIONAL ASSISTANCE IS REQUIRED OR APPROPRIATE, INCLUDING WHERE THERE MAY BE ANY RISK TO HEALTH OR PROPERTY, AND THE PURCHASER, READER OR USER UNDERSTANDS AND ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE AFOREMENTIONED PARTIES ARE NOT HEREBY PROVIDING ANY PROFESSIONAL ADVICE, CONSULTATION OR OTHER SERVICES. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF MARANGRAPHICS INC., THOMSON COURSE TECHNOLOGY PTR, OR ANY OF THEIR RESPECTIVE AFFILIATES, DISTRIBUTORS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, CONTENT CONTRIBUTORS OR LICENSORS BE LIABLE OR RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY LOSSES, DAMAGE OR EXPENSES (INCLUDING BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOST BUSINESS, OR LOST SAVINGS) IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF ACTION, DEMAND OR ACTION, INCLUDING BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY.

maranGraphics and Thomson Course Technology PTR have attempted throughout this book to distinguish proprietary trademarks by following the capitalization style used by the source. However, we cannot attest to the accuracy of the style, and the use of a word or term in this book is not intended to affect the validity of any trademark.

Copies Educational facilities, companies, and organizations located in the U.S. and Canada that are interested in multiple copies of this book should contact Thomson Course Technology PTR for quantity discount information. Training manuals, CD-ROMs, and portions of this book are also available individually or can be tailored for specific needs.

®

maranGraphics Inc. 5755 Coopers Avenue Mississauga, Ontario L4Z 1R9 www.maran.com

Thomson Course Technology PTR, a division of Thomson Course Technology 25 Thomson Place Boston, MA 02210 http://www.courseptr.com

TEAM LinG

maranGraphics is a family-run business.

At maranGraphics, we believe in producing great computer books––one book at a time. Each maranGraphics book uses the award-winning communication process that we have been developing over the last 30 years. Using this process, we organize screen shots, text and illustrations in a way that makes it easy for you to learn new concepts and tasks.

We spend hours deciding the best way to perform each task, so you don’t have to! Our clear, easy-to-follow screen shots and instructions walk you through each task from beginning to end. Our detailed illustrations go hand-in-hand with the text to help reinforce the information. Each illustration is a labor of love––some take up to a week to draw!

We want to thank you for purchasing what we feel are the best computer books money can buy. We hope you enjoy using this book as much as we enjoyed creating it! Sincerely,

The Maran Family

We would love to hear from you! Send your comments and feedback about our books to [email protected]

Please visit us on the Web at:

www.maran.com TEAM LinG

CREDITS Authors: Ruth Maran Kelleigh Johnson Copy Development and Editing: Raquel Scott Project Manager: Judy Maran Editing and Screen Captures: Roxanne Van Damme Roderick Anatalio Adam Giles Megan Robinson Layout Designer: Steven Schaerer Illustrator: Russ Marini Illustrator, Screen Artist and Assistant Layout Designer: Richard Hung Indexer: Raquel Scott

Post Production: Robert Maran President, Thomson Course Technology: David R. West Senior Vice President of Business Development, Thomson Course Technology: Andy Shafran Publisher and General Manager, Thomson Course Technology PTR: Stacy L. Hiquet Associate Director of Marketing, Thomson Course Technology PTR: Sarah O’Donnell National Sales Manager, Thomson Course Technology PTR: Amy Merrill Manager of Editorial Services, Thomson Course Technology PTR: Heather Talbot

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Thanks to the dedicated staff of maranGraphics, including Roderick Anatalio, Adam Giles, Richard Hung, Kelleigh Johnson, Wanda Lawrie, Jill Maran, Judy Maran, Robert Maran, Ruth Maran, Russ Marini, Steven Schaerer, Raquel Scott and Roxanne Van Damme. Finally, to Richard Maran who originated the easy-to-use graphic format of this guide. Thank you for your inspiration and guidance.

TEAM LinG

This page intentionally left blank

TEAM LinG

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING STARTED

HUNGRY

P E T E'S

(Continued

HUNGRY PETE'S 1328 First St., Seattle, WA., 98119

Save the World Inc. from page 1)

NEWSLETTER - JUNE 2003

Grand Opening Celebration!

Seventy-five percent of the World's

a grand

ungry Pete's Restaurant is having opening celebration this Saturday from H 12 p.m. until 9 p.m.

Bring the whole family and enjoy the great specials offered on this special day. Children under 12 eat for free! Come see what Hungry Pete's is all about: Great food, excellent value and incredible customer service!

1) Getting Started

Pete Parker Pete Parker Manager, Hungry Pete's Restaurant

Introduction to Microsoft Office 2003 . . . . . . . . . .2

Document1 : Microsof...

12:00 PM

AD3

Helping the Third

S

World

people live in the Third World. These nations supply the developed nations with a multitude of raw materials and natural resources, and countries and help overcome them. them to also buy many of our exports, (40% eventually whole disappear. The forests of U.S. exports are bought by the One major problem in no longer has land then Third World). Clearly the lives of the most underdeve anything holding it together. countries (UDC),loped people in the developed and This results in soil since the Colonial is that underdeveloped worlds are unavoidably erosion period, and loss of exploitation water retaining interrelated. It is for this reason that of abilities. Developm land has rapidlytheir arable ent in it is important for the rich nations to increased. the Western sense is to Companies study the problems in other countries industrialize from the your economy. developed countries and help them to overcome them. (DC) are blamed for One major problem in most the land, but abusing the farmers underdeveloped countries (UDC), is and locals are that since the Colonial period, as well. 75% often guilty of the energy supplied in exploitation of their arable land has the UDC's is produced rapidly increased. Companies from the by wood burning. developed countries (DC) are blamed for abusing the land, but the farmers It is essential and locals are often guilty as well. 75% for World to develop the Third of the energy supplied in the UDC's is their production techniques, produced by wood burning. To get this especially in agriculture, wood they must tear down trees, and in order to compete effectively on the World Markets.

eventy-five percent of the World's people Third World. live in the These supply the developednations nations with a raw materials multitude of and natural resources, and many of our also buy exports, (40% of U.S. exports by the Third are bought World). Clearly the lives of the people in the developed and underdeve loped worlds are unavoidably interrelated. It is for this reason that it is important for the rich nations to study the problems To get this in other wood tear down trees, they must and

eventually whole forests disappear. The land then no longer has anything holding it together. This results in soil erosion and loss of water retaining abilities. Development in the Western sense is to industrialize your economy. It is essential for the Third World to develop their production techniques, especially in agriculture, in order to compete effectively on the World Markets. This kind of development, however, requires not only costly machinery, but expensive fossil fuels for operation.

This kind of development, however, requires costly machiner not only expensive fossil y, but fuels .

PUSH

Start a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 COMPACT COMPACT

Exit a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5

POWER

RESET

AD3 Num Lock

Caps Lock

Scroll Lock

Select Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Using the Task Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Work With Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

USING WORD 1) Getting Started Introduction to Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Parts of the Word Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Enter Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Select Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Move Through a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Change the View of a Document . . . . . . . . . .24

AD3

H S UP

2) Save, Open and Print a Document Save a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Open a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Preview a Document Before Printing . . . . . . . .30 Print a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Create a New Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Switch Between Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Compare Documents Side by Side . . . . . . . . .36 Zoom In or Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Read a Document On Screen . . . . . . . . . . . .38 E-mail a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

TEAM LinG

3) Edit a Document

5) Format Pages

Insert and Delete Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Insert a Page Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Move or Copy Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Insert a Section Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Undo Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Center Text on a Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Count Words in a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Change Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

Find and Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Add Page Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Check Spelling and Grammar . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Using the Thesaurus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Using the Research Task Pane . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Using Smart Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Add a Clip Art Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

4) Format Text Change Font of Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Change Size of Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Change Text Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Highlight Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Bold, Italicize or Underline Text . . . . . . . . . . .66 Copy Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Create a Bulleted or Numbered List . . . . . . . .68 Change Alignment of Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Change Line Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

G L O B A L R E P O R T G L O B A L R E P O R G L O T B A LHelping the Third G L R ECountries World P O B Helpibut ngthe farmers R theandO Th locals ird are T Seventy-fiveApercentL ofW often guilty as well. 75% of the the R energy or ld E Co world's people live in the supplied in the UDCs is un tri Helpin P es O Third World. These produced by wood burning. butg the farm Seventy-fivethepercedeveloped therseandmust TlocalhtearRs areTo T nt of the nations supply wood they World's peop y as well. 75% ird W getoftenthisguilt

Heloprinld Countr ies g World the Third Count ries

live in theof raw nations with a le down multitude and eventuallyof the energytrees, Third World. Thes supplied in the UDC materials and naturale whole forests disappear. The 's is produced natioeve by wood burning. ns nty -fivethe supp but then perce deve To resources, the far land also buy loped nome longer has ntmany World's andly of the get this rs anmust natio peopalemult ns with they locals often guwood liv tearare itude e of our exports, anything (40% of holding U.S. it dtogether. in of Th raw the ilty irdrials down trees as we Worl mate , and ll. d.natu and even 75 Th en tuall % erg ral ese exports are bought This results by the and natio suppliinedsoil erosionyof the evns ensup wholeyfores ty-fi resou in ts rces, ply disap the and ve pear. pro the also UD The W buy Third World). pe lossdu Clearly man ofced water the retaining abilities. lives rcde C's is orld na y envel bu opthed by wo land t of wi peth of tio ththen ourns'sexpo no oderbu op long e farm alein e rts, get tthi mu has (40% rning. To T livthe of hiter of theial developed ma s wo eltit rd s and lo inud of of raw oderthe anyth Wpeople ten gu theeU.S. ing sare oranldboug expo hold rts yitmu d. na calstea do toget The tur st na htsealby worlds wn treilt her. arre as ing the tio underdeveloped Development resand Western wineve ouns en es,tsy an ell.the This rce ergyresul su s,pp Thir 75% anld). d Wor indsoil su lyd th ntu wh erosi alsClea pp na ofand on all ode ole rly lie bu e y the are the unavoidably oftio sense interrelated. is to industrialize It for your y d lives ou pr ns ma est in ve r exp loss od ofed w lopeny ith waters disapth of the ortales,min ear. peop Uabilit d pe land uc ing D (40 mexp Ce'sies. Th ulthe % deve atiser the by wretain for this reason that tit is loped is dessential ofe it for the oo is geteconomy. ia ort ud U. slsare this wnoonoIt lon anrdeve and of S. gerbuharns ing. unde dbona ra ugtu anyth reTh ht loped sour dlditheyto worlnations ing World To raby important for the ds w their the do l rich ird hoent ceW wThird Deve s, orl mdevelop n lopm ng are an us tr unav it dd).alCl ee in t oidab tog the Th te s, ofofou ly ethar inter is ear tern resultsan relate er. to study bu theso production problems inlivd. techniques, other dsoi r expe the the It who evlentuWes ylym sense in po le es op is an is to for rt fo le indu this y al ero s, in rests diin strialize reaso exan (40% siolynyour the nhelp s especially that podrtcountries of wa de it op anind is edto lalos and them agriculture, vel sa of ter s ardeerde nd un pp econ ret U ea th omy ain .S impo boug en no. It is essen . rtant vel ingr.ab Tilit forthem. op Tare he the ht hirdun edrich foriesthe on by woerld natio overcome to lo compete ng ha tial effectively th ythiorder s ns an avo orld ida Wor to W ngdho study s lop their. ld toerdeve ).bly the DeThir ofisthfor Cprob velthe leint lems err arly opWorld ininothe e pe One elae ted major problem This kind of meldinin gMarkets. hisprod itthe th thi op .most toiques s lerea resuuctio It r Tsen coun lives geth n techn tries son in lts innt W anim and thehelp tha est,erern se development, d un . requires is to so detveitthem loss of underdeveloped countries however, pode ilria ind rta eros espec loispedto rd ust nt ially evfor w io in at elthem ome agric liz n the eco aretounoverc op er e ultur an yo no ric . e, retacostly urin d but my. only hsince (UDC), wor na ised that not avdy machinery, stu ining ab oi is ess ldstiothe orde ns da the r toItcom One blypro ential ili majo Third is fo rin ble prob tie for tively lem terrms s. on corun inoth World to pete the Dev thtri most period, expensive exploitation fossileffec fuels ofelthe for elatin isColonial re es ed er op Wor as an de unde . ld m d on It rdeveloped he imov productient inMarkvel ets.op thlp This poerc thekind coun the at land rtan tries ir already of it arable on techn rapidlysense deve th For to ismhas om ttheir Wes, fo is tooperation. e rthe lopm (UD iqu escountries ent, ehowe th C), ternrequires to On especi industr ism. ethat ver, study richCompanies since all ec the y billions on in from debt eColo this the na is obviously ia in ma thincreased. liz tions not ejor riculteure prpro y. only yo,urinery costl obperio nial coun It is esag ordom leble inpossible. mm explo tonot untrdeierde , but sd, sentyiamach hird er comp developed inin countries economically (DC)T s anvel ofare otmo expe ete W heitatio darabl lect op their foive efffuels ornsive help rst npr fossil ed over(U r the ld th e co land W for to un th e coDC has ly orl tri deets on me),thisblamed d Mark oducoper foremabusing ly land, the ve.lop th toesrapid em ation tha This tries OneCom incre . t Com ased. sincepani coun ei techni. For veltio r dalrea kin opnme espede the es from the ajor lon qu cialbillio ialprloped esver peob ,this, req of dy we nsnt,inho rio unde led, ag exp mcoun t lylyinco is obvio tries riculdebt rdirevdeve ordeno loi the in m uires usly ) are ion of tuch ara elop stl r toon ostat y ma re,ine bleed notmecon t (DC edlan blam inpossi (UDinc codun ally for hatrsierap abus ry, bu enco Crea the exp ble.t ing tesilomic sive pe the ), issed ef land, idl fos W fe s y th or ct .atCo fue ively on Colon sinmp ce an erald M kets. T ls for devel thies from the deveop ial op n.arFo peed lopmtio histrikind r coun riod, countriese ent, ho theirbla arme oi (D are not bil ab for expl in w thier, re es alrofeady onlions n of ndabusing tatioC) costlydebtev s quires increase led la notlyeco usly no maclyhineis obvio pithe d. Com has ra dly land, expensiv e fossilmical pory develo pa ssi,ble bu.t ni es fro operat ped ion. Fo fuels for blamed countries (D m the r coun billion for abus C tries al s in ing the ) are ready not econ debt this is land, ob omical viously ly poss ible.

S S

1 2

3 4

Indent Paragraphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Change Tab Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Create a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

TEAM LinG

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2) Save and Open a Workbook Save a Workbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Create a New Workbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Open a Workbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 NT INCOME STATEME

3 E SALES 200

Total PRODUC March January February 25000 $ 13,670 $ 33,870 Oranges $ 8,700 $ 11,500 37000 Apples 18000 $ 5,250 $13,950 Grapefruits 27000 3,850 $ 4,850 $ 5,250 Lemons$ 1,750 $ Payroll 15000 $ 1,750 $ 1,750 5,930 $ Limes $ 2,030 Rent $ 1,920 $ 1,980 $ 9,030 $25,130 Supplies 7,520 $ 8,580 $ NSES TOTAL EXPE $ 4,640 $ 8,740 $ 1,180 $ 2,920 INCOME REVENUE

Limes

Oranges

Switch Between Workbooks . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Compare Workbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 E-mail a Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

Lemons Apples Grapefruits

3) Edit a Worksheet Edit or Delete Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Move or Copy Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

USING EXCEL

Insert a Row or Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Delete a Row or Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

1) Getting Started

Undo Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Introduction to Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Zoom In or Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Parts of the Excel Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Change the Active Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Scroll Through a Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Enter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Central Division Standings

Select Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Complete a Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Switch Between Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Rename a Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Insert a Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Delete a Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

es 6 6 6 6 6

Pool A Games Walt's Winners 6 The Chargers 6 Terry's Tigers 6 The Breakaways 6 The GO Team 6

Goals 15 13 12 10 9

Wins

Pool B Games Brian's Boys 6 The Good Guys 6 Greg 'n' Gang 6 The Professionals 6 All The Way 6 Team Spirit 6

Goals 15 13 12 12 8 4

Wins

Goals Wins 15 4 13 3 12 4 10 3 COLOR9VIEW 1

L

Losses 1 2 3 3 4

Ties

4 3 3 1 1

Losses 1 1 2 3 3 5

Ties

4 3 4 3 1 1

1 1 0 2 1

Points 9 7 6 4 3

1 2 0 0 2 0

Points 9 8 8 6 4 2

TEAM LinG

6) Print a Worksheet RM

M-

M+

_

6

5

4 .

0

Print a Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

x

3

2

1

Preview a Worksheet Before Printing . . . . . .146

+

9

8

7

C

=

/

Change Page Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Change Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

4) Using Formulas and Functions

Change Print Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

Introduction to Formulas and Functions . . . . .120 Enter a Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Enter a Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Perform Common Calculations . . . . . . . . . .128 Copy a Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Check Errors in Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

7) Working With Charts Create a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Move or Resize a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Change the Chart Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Print a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

5) Format a Worksheet Change Column Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Change Row Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Change Font of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Change Size of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Change Number Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Change Data Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Change Cell Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Change Alignment of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Center Data Across Columns . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Bold, Italicize or Underline Data . . . . . . . . .144 Copy Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

TEAM LinG

TABLE OF CONTENTS 2) Edit Slides Select Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Insert Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Delete Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 Undo Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Move or Copy Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 Check Spelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Add a New Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

3) Add Objects to Slides Change the Slide Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 Add an Autoshape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 Add WordArt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Add a Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Add a Clip Art Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

USING POWERPOINT 1) Getting Started

Add a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 Add a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Move or Resize an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

Introduction to PowerPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Parts of the PowerPoint Window . . . . . . . . .165 Create a Presentation Using the AutoContent Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Create a Blank Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Save a Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Open a Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Change the View of a Presentation . . . . . . .174 Browse Through a Presentation . . . . . . . . . .176 E-mail a Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

TEAM LinG

:

me

o

ati

e ch nS

im

An

USING PUBLISHER 1) Getting Started Introduction to Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Parts of the Publisher Window . . . . . . . . . . .237 Create a Publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Zoom In or Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Move Through Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241

4) Enhance a Presentation

Add a New Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

Change Font of Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

Move a Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244

Change Size of Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209

Delete a Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245

Change Style of Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210

Undo Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246

Change Alignment of Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

Select Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247

Change Text Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212

Check Spelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

Change Object Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

Find and Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250

Change the Design Template . . . . . . . . . . . .214

Import Text from Another Document . . . . . . .252

Change the Color Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Animate Slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218

2) Save, Print & Open a Publication Save a Publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254

5) Fine-Tune a Presentation

Print a Publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255

Reorder Slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

Preview a Publication Before Printing . . . . . .256

Delete a Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221

Open a Publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258

Add Slide Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

E-mail a Publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260

View a Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Create Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Preview a Presentation Before Printing . . . . .228

Can't wait to see you!

Print a Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Package Your Presentation onto a CD . . . . .232

TEAM LinG

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4) Create and Work With Objects Amazing

Add an AutoShape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280

Wild Cats!

Add a Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282

The

World of

Join the adventure as we take a look at the amazing habits of these ferocious felines!

dLa

Add Clip Art . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284

8pt

18pt

e FW ont 8pt

10pt

Abc AArial bc an Bookm yle t S ld O

8pt

10pt

O

3) Enhance a Publication

R

Add WordArt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288

12pt

14pt

18pt

Z

e R bX

a

P d nLt Fo

i

12pt

14pt

18pt

g

Font

10pt

12pt

14pt

Abc Times a om N wR

Add a Text Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Connect Text Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Add a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294

Change Font of Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

Add a Design Gallery Object . . . . . . . . . . .296

Change Size of Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263

Move or Resize an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . .298

Bold, Italicize or Underline Text . . . . . . . . . .264

Change the Color of an Object . . . . . . . . . .300

Change Alignment of Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265

Change the Color of the Line Around an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301

Change Text Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 Add a Background Color or Pattern to a Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

Change the Style of the Line Around an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302

Create a Drop Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268

Change the Way Text Wraps Around an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303

Change Line Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270

Add a Shadow to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . .304

Create a Bulleted or Numbered List . . . . . . .272

Add a 3-D Effect to an Object . . . . . . . . . . .305

Copy Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Create Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Change the Publication Design . . . . . . . . . .275 Change the Font Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Change the Color Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Change the Publication Options . . . . . . . . .278 Check Your Publication for Design Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279

TEAM LinG

USING OUTLOOK 1) Exchange E-mail Introduction to Outlook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Parts of the Outlook Window . . . . . . . . . . .309 Read Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Send a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Select a Name from the Address Book . . . . .314 Attach a File to a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Check Spelling and Grammar . . . . . . . . . . .318 Reply to a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Forward a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Flag a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322

3) Outlook With Business Contact Manager Outlook With Business Contact Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Using Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Using Business Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Using Opportunities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Link an E-mail Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Schedule an Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 Create a Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 Create a Business Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Create a Phone Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Work With Business Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

Arrange Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Delete a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325

OFFICE AND THE INTERNET

Work With Junk Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326

2) Manage Information Using the Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Using Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Using Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336

1) Office and the Internet Create a Hyperlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 Preview a File as a Web Page . . . . . . . . . .380 Save a File as a Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . .382

Using Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Using the Journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Club Newsletter

TEAM LinG

Scene i)

t steps of their house on a side Tim and Jeff are sitting on the fron ng to convince his son to let go street in New Orleans. Tim is tryi jazz saxophonist. Upset with of his dream of becoming a famous , Jeff storms off down the street. his father for meddling in his life

Scene ii)

Kathleen in the kitchen. As g s inside the house to join line, Tim goe cuss their son's future. Jacque leeenn prepares dinner, they dis thle Kaath th. e about their you reminisce the heiirr guest, arrives and they all

Scene iii)

the house. Jeff Constance arrive at d an ff Je g, in en ev e aying a quiet Later in th his case and begins pl ff explains his of t ou e on ph xo sa s ished, Je takes hi listens. After he is fin melody as Constance . dreams to Constance

prepares TEAM LinG

1

MICROSOFT OFFICE AND THE INTERNET

Getting Started

1

Getting Started Pages 2-13

TEAM LinG

INTRODUCTION TO MICROSOFT OFFICE 2003

Microsoft® Office 2003 is a suite of programs that you can use to accomplish various tasks.

Office 2003

There are several editions of Microsoft Office 2003 available. Each edition contains a different combination of programs. In this book, we focus on the programs that are included in the Small Business Edition of Microsoft Office 2003. This edition is suited to home and small business users who require basic Office programs to accomplish day-to-day tasks.

Microsoft Offic

e 2003

Microsoft®

Office Editions

To Do: Dear Susan, The Use of Symbols in "The Hero"

I'm delighted the you'll

same One of the key aspects of "The Hero" by be James Wilson is the use of vacation coming time, proved to Chicago symbols to enhance character development. Wilson to be a so we'll himself In the this summer. be ablehis finest master of symbolism in all of histhree plays, but "The Hero" is clearly years to spend city. I've been I know lots of I've requested work. all the visit! living time together. best places The most important examples of symbolism in "Thein Hero" pertain to Chicago, to I've really Danny King, the play's main character. As King's level of see, self awareness so I'll I've grown be great enclosed increases throughout to the play, we see changes in the symbols associatedawith tour guideto love the a newspaper write the young man.company during and your article Thompson, a couple to me soon you your me the Dear Mr. about student filled gives of tickets. to congratulate In play's opening scene, King isto a let first-year college Itthe upcoming me know was Contest. opportunity decision what you about the future. We see this optimism reflected in wittymusicals Logo Design with optimism to take this We'll Committee's in the 1999 and plays. would in I would like have of King and between the Judging dialogue First Prize beautiful histofriends. spend We also see this optimism reflectedlike the hundreds Be sure you that to see for winning to inform so I can the symbols associated withspots. him. We lots of time the best among order in Roseof a small New greatest pleasure entry was clearly year. can rent The entireI first is set outdoors on the campus Your Park, also scene bicycles report received this This know unanimous. which and England remarks. college. Several references are made in Wilson's staging entries we is one your enjoyinstructions enhancewhere all the of the outstanding Committee's serves to arrival park's and in the dialogue to the fact that early Septemberthe sun is best the city's most on June Inc.characters' the Judging restaurants scenic design Advertising a copy of trails. shining The brightness and25! warmth of the sun are used by Wilson as and modern please find by Dynamic are. colors brightly. I'm really Enclosed use of designed symbols to reflect King's mood as he embarks on an exciting new period in "the logo the creative looking states that image through forward his life. to the company's Design See International you soon, principles." 20 at the -1on August you there. will be presentedWe hope to see Nancy The award annual banquet. Institute's my congratulations. please accept Once again, Sincerely,

Thompson David C. Inc. President Advertising Dynamic Ave. 1223 Lincoln N.Y. New York, 10023

Karen Davis Chairperson Judging Committee

All Microsoft Office 2003 programs share a common design and work in a similar way. Once you learn one program, you can easily learn the others.

Word

Excel

Word is a word processing program that you can use to quickly and efficiently create documents such as letters, memos and reports. Word offers many features that make it easy to edit and format your documents.

Excel is a spreadsheet program that allows you to organize and analyze data, such as a budget or sales report. Excel can also help you create colorful charts to attractively present data.

Dec Nov Oct Sept Aug July June May

PROGRESS 2003

Apr Mar Feb Jan

We are on target to surpass all sales goals for 2003! 84 85

86

87

88

89

90

91

92 93

94 95 96 97

Sales reached an all time high last month, and we are expanding into several new regions. These charts indicate the future is bright for our company!

3

Romeo& Juliet

2

_

6

5

4

+

9

8

7

C

RM

MM+

1

.

x

3

2 0

=

/

TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

GETTING STARTED

PowerPoint

Publisher

PowerPoint is a program that helps you plan, organize and design professional presentations. You can add objects such as pictures, charts and diagrams to your presentations to add visual interest to the presentations.

Publisher is a desktop publishing program that helps you design professional publications, such as banners, brochures, catalogs, flyers, invitation cards and newsletters.

Can't wait to see you!

AD3 PUSH

HDD

RESET

Outlook

Office and the Internet

Outlook is an information management program that allows you to exchange e-mail messages and organize information, including appointments, contacts, tasks and notes.

Each Office program provides features that allow you to take advantage of the Internet. You can create a hyperlink in an Office file to link the file to a Web page or to another file on your computer or network. You can also save Office files as Web pages, which allows you to place your files on the Internet.

C alendar 2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

1

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

Doctor s Appointm Thursday ent 2pm

Joan

ne,

The

dra mo fts for ca nth's Wi mpaig adve next 2:00 ll you n are rtising p.m be fre ready. . tom e at to dis orrow cuss the m?

Business Contact Manager

Business Contact Manager is an add-on to Outlook that allows small business users to more effectively keep track of their accounts, business contacts and sales leads.

COLOR VIEW

TEAM LinG 3

START A PROGRAM

gy Our Strate

You can start an Office program to perform a task, such as writing a letter, analyzing financial data, creating a presentation or designing a brochure.

in the

To become the leotadingerthe originality

om industry by pr ucts ity of our prod al qu gh hi and and tive advertising through innova packaging. O T Y CO

_

6

5

4

+

9

8

7

C

RM

M-

M+

2

1

.

x

3

0

=

/

START A PROGRAM

Microsoft Office

Microsoft Office Word 2003 All Programs Recycle Bin Log Off

Turn Off Computer

12:00 PM

⁄ Click start. ¤ Click All Programs to view a list of the programs on your computer.

Note: If you are using an earlier version of Windows, click Programs in step 2.

4

‹ Click Microsoft Office.

› Click the program you want to start.

Document 1 - Microsof...

The program appears on your screen. A task pane may appear, allowing you to quickly perform common tasks. For information on using the task pane, see page 8.

12:00 PM

A button for the program appears on the taskbar.

TEAM LinG

1

EXIT A PROGRAM

Getting Started

GETTING STARTED

When you finish using a program, you can exit the program.

You should always exit all programs before turning off your computer. EXIT A PROGRAM

Recycle Bin

Document1 - Microsof...

⁄ Click File. ¤ Click Exit to shut down the program.

12:00 PM

12:00 PM

Note: If Exit does not appear on the menu, position the mouse over the bottom of the menu to display the menu option.

The program disappears from your screen.

The button for the program disappears from the taskbar.

TEAM LinG 5

SELECT COMMANDS

You can select a command from a menu or toolbar to perform a task in an Office program. Each command performs a different task. When you first start an Office program, the most commonly used commands and buttons appear on the short version of each menu and toolbar. As you work, the program customizes the menus and toolbars to display the commands and buttons you use most often.

Doc1

SELECT COMMANDS

Customer Inquiry - Mi...

USING MENUS

⁄ Click the name of the menu you want to display. A short version of the menu appears, displaying the most commonly used commands.

6

12:00 PM

¤ To expand the menu and display all the commands, position the mouse over .

Customer Inquiry - Mi...

The expanded menu appears, displaying all the commands.

‹ Click the command

12:00 PM

To close a menu without selecting a command, click outside the menu.

you want to use.

TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

GETTING STARTED

Tip

How can I quickly select a command?

Tip

Why do some commands or buttons have a dimmed appearance?

Menu commands or buttons that have a dimmed appearance are currently not available. You must perform a specific task before you can select the commands or buttons. For example, you must select text to make the Cut and Copy commands in the Edit menu available in Word.

⁄ Right-click an item to display a shortcut menu containing the most frequently used commands for the item.

¤ Click the command you want to use. To close a shortcut menu without selecting a command, click outside the menu.

Customer Inquiry - Mi...

USING TOOLBARS

⁄ To display the name of a toolbar button, position the mouse over the button.

12:00 PM

After a few seconds, the name of the button appears in a yellow box. The button name can help you determine the task the button performs.

12:00 PM

Customer Inquiry - Mi...

¤ A toolbar may not be able to display all its buttons. Click to display additional buttons for the toolbar.

Additional buttons for the toolbar appear.

‹ To use a toolbar button to select a command, click the button. TEAM LinG 7

USING THE TASK PANE

Most Office programs offer task panes that you can use to perform common tasks.

You can display or hide a task pane at any time. When you start an Office program or perform a task, a task pane may automatically appear. USING THE TASK PANE

The Olympic Games - ...

DISPLAY OR HIDE THE TASK PANE

⁄ Click View. ¤ Click Task Pane.

8

12:00 PM

Note: If Task Pane does not appear on the menu, position the mouse over the bottom of the menu to display the menu option.

The Olympic Games - ...

The task pane appears or disappears. You can click or to browse through the information in a task pane.

12:00 PM

To quickly hide the task pane at any time, click .

TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

GETTING STARTED

Tip

What task panes are available in Office?

The available task panes depend on the Office program you are working in. Some common task panes are listed below.

New Document

Clipboard

Getting Started

Help

Clipboard

Allows you to perform tasks such as creating a new document and opening a file.

Allows you to obtain help information from the program’s help feature and the Internet.

Displays each item you have selected to move or copy.

The Olympic Games - ...

12:00 PM

DISPLAY A DIFFERENT TASK PANE

¤ Click the task pane

This area shows the name of the displayed task pane.

You can click or at the top or bottom of the list to view all the task panes you can display.

⁄ Click

in this area to display a different task pane.

you want to display.

12:00 PM

The Olympic Games - ...

The task pane you selected appears.

In this example, the Clipboard task pane appears.

TEAM LinG 9

WORK WITH TOOLBARS

Each Microsoft Office program offers several toolbars that you can work with on your screen. Each toolbar contains buttons that help you quickly perform common tasks.

When you first start an Office program, one or more toolbars automatically appear on your screen. You can choose which toolbars to display based on the tasks you perform most often. You can also move toolbars to a new location to better suit the way you work.

DISPLAY OR HIDE A TOOLBAR

Memo - Microsoft Offi...

⁄ To display or hide a toolbar, click View. ¤ Click Toolbars.

12:00 PM

A list of toolbars appears. A check mark ( ) beside a toolbar name tells you the toolbar is currently displayed.

Memo - Microsoft Offi...

12:00 PM

The program displays or hides the toolbar you selected.

‹ Click the name of the toolbar you want to display or hide.

10

TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

GETTING STARTED

Tip

Can I increase the size of a toolbar on my screen?

You can increase the size of a toolbar to display more buttons on the toolbar. This is useful when a toolbar appears on the same row as another toolbar and cannot display all of its buttons. You cannot resize a toolbar that appears on its own row.

⁄ Position the

¤ Drag the mouse

mouse over the move handle ( ) of the toolbar you want to resize ( changes to ).

until the toolbar is the size you want.

Note: The new toolbar size affects the size of other toolbars on the same row.

MOVE A TOOLBAR

12:00 PM

Memo - Microsoft Offi...

⁄ Position the

¤ Drag the toolbar to

mouse over the move handle ( ) of the toolbar you want to move ( changes to ).

a new location.

Memo - Microsoft Offi...

12:00 PM

The toolbar appears in the new location.

Note: You can move a toolbar to the same row as another toolbar or to its own row at the top, bottom, right or left edge of your screen.

TEAM11 LinG

GETTING HELP

If you do not know how to perform a task in a Microsoft Office program, you can search for help information on the task.

AD3

HSUP

Some help information is only available on the Internet. You must be connected to the Internet to access online help information. GETTING HELP

print

12:00 PM

Document1 - Microsof...

⁄ Click this area and type the task you want to get help information on. Then press the Enter key. The Search Results task pane appears.

12

This area displays a list of related help topics. You can use the scroll bar to browse through the available topics.

Document1 - Microsof...

A window appears, displaying information about the help topic you selected.

Microsoft Office Wor...

12:00 PM

‹ To display additional information for a word or phrase that appears in color, click the word or phrase.

¤ Click the help topic of interest.

TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

GETTING STARTED

Tip

What do the icons beside each help topic represent?

Tip

How can I get help information when working with a dialog box?

You can click in the top right corner of a dialog box. A window will appear, displaying help information for the dialog box.

Here are some icons you will see beside help topics. Displays a help topic. Opens a Web page that takes you through step-by-step training for the task. Displays a pre-designed template, such as a calendar, invoice or resume. Opens a Web page that offers a product or service to enhance Microsoft Office. Opens a Web page that displays an article on a specific topic.

Document1 - Microsof...

The additional information appears.

Note: Selecting a colored word or phrase will display information such as a definition, tip or a list of steps.

Microsoft Office Wor...

To once again hide the information, click the colored word or phrase.

12:00 PM

Document1 - Microsof...

Microsoft Office Wor...

12:00 PM

› When you finish reviewing

ˇ When you are

the help information, click to close the window.

finished getting help, click to close the Search Results task pane.

To display the information for another help topic, click the help topic.

TEAM13 LinG

HUNGRY P E T E'S

HUNGRY PETE'S 1328 First St., Seattle, WA., 98119

Grand Opening Celebration! ungry Pete's Restaurant is having a grand opening celebration this Saturday from H 12 p.m. until 9 p.m. Bring the whole family and enjoy the great specials offered on this special day. Children under 12 eat for free! Come see what Hungry Pete is all about: Great food, excellent value and incredible customer service!

Pete Parker

Thesa L I N C O L N

BOOKS

Pete Parker Manager, Hungry Pete's Restaurant

6

USING WORD

Using Word

1 2 3 4 5

Getting Started Pages 16-25

Save, Open and Print a Document Pages 26-41

Edit a Document Pages 42-61

Format Text Pages 62-77

Format Pages Pages 78-85

saurus

O L N

KS

6

12 11 10 9 8 7 5

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

TEAM LinG

INTRODUCTION TO WORD

Word is a word processing program you can use to efficiently produce professional-looking documents, such as letters, reports and essays.

HUNGRY

P E T E'S

HUNGRY PETE'S 1328 First St., Seattle, WA., 98119

(Continued

Save the World Inc. from page 1)

NEWSLETTER - JUNE 2003

Grand Opening Celebration!

Seventy-five percent of the World's

a grand

ungry Pete's Restaurant is having opening celebration this Saturday from H 12 p.m. until 9 p.m.

Bring the whole family and enjoy the great offered on this special day. Children under 12 eat for free! Come see what Hungry Pete's is all about: Great food, excellent value and incredible customer service!

Pete Parker Pete Parker Manager, Hungry Pete's Restaurant

12:00 PM

Document1 : Microsof...

AD3

people live in the Third World. These nations supply the developed nations with a multitude of raw materials and natural resources, and countries and help overcome them. them to also buy many of our exports, (40% eventually whole specials disappear. The forests of U.S. exports are bought by the One major land problem in then Third World). Clearly the lives of the no longer has most under anyth develo holding it togeth ing countries (UDC ped people in the developed and results in soil er. This underdeveloped worlds are unavoidably since the Colon ), is that erosion ial period, and explo loss of water Helping itation of interrelated. It is for this reason that abilities. Devel retaining land has rapidl their arable rich nations to the Third Wor y increased. the Western opment in it is important for the ld sense is to Companies study the problems in other countries industrializ from Seventy-five perce e your econo developed count the my. and help them to overcome them. nt of the ries (DC) World's peopl are blamed e for One major problem in most Third World live in the the land, but abusing . These the supply the develo nations underdeveloped countries (UDC), is and locals are farmers ped nations with that since the Colonial period, as well. 75% often guilty a of the energ raw materials multitude of supplied in y exploitation of their arable land has and natural the UDC's resources, and is produced rapidly increased. Companies from the by wood many of our also buy burning. exports, (40% developed countries (DC) are blamed of U.S. expor ts for abusing the land, but the farmers by the Third are bought World). It is essential and locals are often guilty as well. 75% for the Third Clearly the World to develop their lives of the of the energy supplied in the UDC's is people in the production developed techn produced by wood burning. To get this iques, and underdevelo especially in ped agriculture, wood they must tear down trees, and worlds are in order to unavoidably compete interrelated effectively . It is for this on the World reason that Marke ts. it is important for the rich nations to study This kind of the problems developmen To get this in other however, requir t, wood es not only tear down trees, they must costly machinery, and expensive fossil but fuels .

eventually whole forests disappear. The land then no longer has anything holding it together. This results in soil erosion and loss of water retaining abilities. Development in the Western sense is to industrialize your economy. It is essential for the Third World to develop their production techniques, especially in agriculture, in order to compete effectively on the World Markets. This kind of development, however, requires not only costly machinery, but expensive fossil fuels for operation.

PUSH

COMPACT COMPACT

POWER

RESET

AD3 Num Lock

Caps Lock

Scroll Lock

Edit Documents

Format Documents

Print Documents

Word offers many time-saving features to help you edit text in a document. You can add, delete and rearrange text. You can also quickly count the number of words in a document, check your document for spelling and grammar errors and use Word’s thesaurus to find more suitable words.

You can format a document to enhance the appearance of the document. You can use various font sizes, styles and colors to emphasize important text. You can also add page numbers, change the margins and use bullets to separate items in a list.

You can produce a paper copy of a document you create. Before printing, you can preview how the document will appear on a printed page.

Save the World Inc. NEWSLETTER - JUNE 2003

There is a 10th anniversary High School Re union on August 6, 7 and 8 at Wo odblock High School. We all hope to see you there. Co ntact Susan Hughes for more information.

Maggie Healey

16

dLa

8pt

Font

10pt

12pt

14pt

18pt

Seventy-five percent of the World's eventually whole forests disappear. The people live in the Third World. land then no longer has anything These nations supply the developed holding it together. This results in soil nations with a multitude of raw erosion and loss of water retaining materials and natural resources, and abilities. also buy many of our exports (40% of U.S. exports are bought by the Development in the Western sense is Third World). Clearly the lives of the to industrialize your economy. It is people in the developed and essential for the Third World to develop underdeveloped worlds are unavoidably their production techniques, especially interrelated. It is for this reason that in agriculture, in order to compete it is important for the rich nations to effectively on the World Markets. This study the problems in other countries kind of development, however, requires and help them to overcome them. not only costly machinery, but One major problem in most expensive fossil fuels for operation. underdeveloped countries (UDC), is that since the Colonial period, exploitation of their arable land has rapidly increased. Companies from the developed countries (DC) are blamed for abusing the land, but the farmers and locals are often guilty as well. 75% of the energy supplied in the UDCs is produced by wood burning. To get this wood they must tear down trees, and

Chocolate Mousse Recipe My recipe for chocolate mousse says that I should fold the chocolate mixture into the whipped cream. How does one fold chocolate? Please help me.

Abc TEAM16 LinG

1

PARTS OF THE WORD WINDOW

Getting Started

USING WORD

The Word window displays many items you can use to create and work with your documents.

Title Bar

Menu Bar

Standard Toolbar

Formatting Toolbar

Shows the name of the displayed document.

Provides access to lists of commands available in Word and displays an area where you can type a question to get help information.

Contains buttons you can use to select common commands, such as Save and Print.

Contains buttons you can use to select common formatting commands, such as Bold and Italic.

Ruler

Allows you to change tab and indent settings for your documents.

Task Pane

Contains options you can select to perform common tasks, such as opening a document.

Insertion Point

The flashing line on the screen that indicates where the text you type will appear.

Document Views

Provides access to five different views of your documents.

Scroll Bars

Allow you to browse through a document.

Status Bar

Page 1

Sec 1

1/1

Provides information about the area of the document displayed on the screen and the position of the insertion point.

The page displayed on the screen.

The section of the document displayed on the screen.

The page displayed on the screen and the total number of pages in the document.

At 1"

Ln 1

Col 1

The distance from the top of the page to the insertion point.

The number of lines from the top margin to the insertion point.

The number of characters from the left margin to the insertion point, including spaces.

TEAM17 LinG

ENTER TEXT

DOCUMENT 1

Word allows you to type text into your document quickly and easily.

The sample documents used in each chapter of this book are available on the Web at www.maran.com/office2003. You can download the sample documents so you can perform the tasks in this book without having to type the documents yourself.

PUSH

Esc

~

F1 !

F2

@

1

3

W A

Z Alt

F3

S

X

%

4

E D

C

T F

V

7

Y G

B

F7

* 8

&

^

6

5

R

F6

F5

F4

$

#

2

Q

U H

N

F9

F8 (

J

K

M

<,

P L

> .

F12

+ {

}

[

]

: ;

" '

?

Shift

/

Print Screen

Insert

=

0

O

F11

F10

)

9

I

Alt

Delete

Scroll Lock

Home End

Pause

Page Up Page Down

Num Lock

/

7

Home

9

Pg Up

5 2

1

End

Ctrl

0

Ins

–

*

8

4

+

6 3

PgDn

.

Enter

Del

ENTER TEXT

12:00 PM

Document.1 - Microsof..

The text you type will appear where the insertion point flashes on your screen.

⁄ Type the text for your document. 18

Note: In this book, the font of text was changed to Arial to make the examples easier to read. To change the font of text, see page 62.

Document.1 - Microsof...

When you reach the end of a line, Word automatically wraps the text to the next line. You only need to press the Enter key when you want to start a new paragraph.

12:00 PM

Word automatically underlines misspelled words in red and grammar errors in green. The underlines will not appear when you print your document. To correct misspelled words and grammar errors, see page 50.

TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

USING WORD

Tip

Can I enter text anywhere in my document?

Tip

Word’s Click and Type feature allows you to quickly position the insertion point in a new location so you can enter text. Double-click a blank area where you want to position the insertion point and then type the text you want to enter. The Click and Type feature is available in the Web Layout, Print Layout and Reading Layout views. To change the view, see page 24.

Why does Word automatically change the text I am typing?

Word’s AutoCorrect feature automatically corrects common spelling errors as you type. You can stop Word from automatically correcting the text you type. The Home Development Association (HAD) will be offering a home buying information seminar

Report

⁄ Position the mouse

‹ Click the AutoCorrect

over text that automatically changed. A blue rectangle appears ( ).

Options button to display a list of options.

› Click the option you

¤ Position the mouse

want to use.

over the blue rectangle to display the AutoCorrect Options button ( ).

Document.1 - Microsof...

ENTER TEXT AUTOMATICALLY

Word’s AutoText feature helps you quickly enter common words and phrases.

12:00 PM

When you type the first few characters of a common word or phrase, a yellow box appears, displaying the text.

12:00 PM

Document.1 - Microsof...

⁄ To insert the text, press the Enter key.

To ignore the text, continue typing.

TEAM19 LinG

SELECT TEXT

Mr. Adams:

Before performing many tasks in Word, you must select the text you want to work with. Selected text appears highlighted on your screen.

I am delighted to inform you that your company has been selected to receive a Community Spirit Award. Your staff's efforts to raise money to buy new equipment for the local hospital are admirable.

A reception will be held to honor you and the other winners at Breton Banquet Hall at 8 p.m. on July 12 th .

Nancy L. Spencer, Chairperson Community Spirit Awards Committee

COLOR VIEW

SELECT TEXT

Florida

Will you be coming for a visit anytime soon?

Letter to John - Micro...

SELECT A WORD

⁄ Double-click the word you want to select. The word is highlighted.

20

12:00 PM

To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

Letter to John - Micro...

12:00 PM

SELECT A SENTENCE

⁄ Press and hold down the Ctrl key as you click the sentence you want to select.

TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

USING WORD

Tip

How do I select a paragraph or a large area of text? that your compan

To select a paragraph, position the mouse over the paragraph you want to select and then quickly click three times.

Tip

ommunity Spirit A

Can I select multiple areas of text in my document?

Yes. To select multiple areas of text, press and hold down the Ctrl key as you select each area.

Mr. Adams:

oney to buy new

I am delighted to inform you that your company has

been selected to receive a Community Spirit Award. Your staff's efforts to raise money to buy new

ital are admirable

equipment for the local hospital are admirable.

A reception will be held to honor you and the other winners at Breton Banquet Hall at 8 p.m. on July 12th.

Nancy L. Spencer, Chairperson Community Spirit Awards Committee

Mr. Adams:

To select a large area of text, click at the beginning of the text. Then press and hold down the Shift key as you click at the end of the text.

I am delighted to inform you that your company has been selected to receive a Community Spirit Award. Mr. Adams:

Your staff's efforts to raise money to buy new

I am delighted to inform you that your company has

equipment for the local hospital are admirable.

been selected to receive a Community Spirit Award. Your staff's efforts to raise money to buy new equipment for the local hospital are admirable.

A reception will be held to honor you and the other winners at Breton Banquet Hall at 8 p.m. on July 12th.

A reception will be held to honor you and the other winners at Breton Banquet Hall at 8 p.m. on July 12th.

Nancy L. Spencer, Chairperson

Nancy L. Spencer, Chairperson

Ctrl Community Spirit Awards Committee

Community Spirit Awards Committee

Dear John: How are things going in Florida? I'm sorry I haven't written to you in a while, but things have been busy here in St. Louis. My business is taking off and Mary and I are now the proud parents of a baby girl.

I'm sorry I haven't written to you in a while, but

Will you be coming for a visit anytime soon?

12:00 PM

Letter to John - Micro...

Letter to John - Micro...

SELECT ANY AMOUNT OF TEXT

¤ Drag the mouse

SELECT ENTIRE DOCUMENT

⁄ Position the mouse

over the text you want to select.

⁄ Click Edit. ¤ Click Select All to

over the first word you want to select.

select all the text in your document.

12:00 PM

Note: You can also press and hold down the Ctrl key as you press the A key to select all the text in your document.

TEAM21 LinG

MOVE THROUGH A DOCUMENT

You can easily move to another location in your document.

If your document contains a lot of text, your computer screen may not be able to display all the text at once. You must scroll through your document to view other parts of the document.

LL SCRO

MOVE THROUGH A DOCUMENT

2

2

Employee Guidelines -...

MOVE THE INSERTION POINT

The flashing line on your screen, called the insertion point, indicates where the text you type will appear.

12:00 PM

Employee Guidelines -...

⁄ Click the location in

DISPLAY PREVIOUS OR NEXT PAGE

your document where you want to place the insertion point.

⁄ To display the previous or next page, click one of the following buttons.

12:00 PM

Display previous page Display next page

22

TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

USING WORD

Tip

How can I use my keyboard to move through a document?

+ + One character or line at a time

Press the , , or key to move through a document one character or line at a time.

One screen or page at a time Page Up

Page Down

Press the or key to move through a document one screen or page at a time.

Note: In Reading Layout view, these keys allow you to move through the document one page at a time. For information on changing the view of a document, see page 24.

Employee Guidelines -...

SCROLL UP OR DOWN

⁄ To scroll up or down, click or . To quickly scroll up or down, drag the scroll box along the scroll bar.

Beginning or end of the document

Press and hold down the Ctrl key as you press the Home key to move to the beginning of the document. Press and hold down the Ctrl key as you press the End key to move to the end of the document.

12:00 PM

The location of the scroll box indicates which part of the document you are viewing. To view the middle of the document, drag the scroll box halfway down the scroll bar.

Employee Guidelines -...

SCROLL LEFT OR RIGHT

⁄ To scroll left or right, click or .

12:00 PM

To quickly scroll left or right, drag the scroll box along the scroll bar.

TEAM23 LinG

CHANGE THE VIEW OF A DOCUMENT cm 1 2

1 3 4

Grand Opening Celebration!

2

5 6 7

3 8

ungry Pete's Restaurant is having a grand opening celebration this Saturday from H 12 p.m. until 9 p.m.

9

4

10 11 12 13

5

14

Bring the whole family and enjoy the great specials offered on this special day. Children under 12 eat for free!

6

15 16

Word offers five different views that you can use to display your document. You can choose the view that best suits your needs.

Come see what Hungry Pete's is all about: Great food, excellent value and incredible customer service!

VIEWS Normal Web Layout Print Layout Outline Reading Layout

COLOR VIEW

CHANGE THE VIEW OF A DOCUMENT

12:00 PM

New Orleans Blues - ...

⁄ To change the view of your document, click one of the following buttons.

Normal Web Layout Print Layout

New Orleans Blues - ...

Your document appears in the view you selected.

12:00 PM

The button for the view you selected appears orange.

Outline Reading Layout

24

TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

USING WORD THE DOCUMENT VIEWS

Normal View

Web Layout View

The Normal view simplifies the layout of your document so you can quickly enter, edit and format text. This view does not display certain elements in your document, such as margins and page numbers.

Working in the Web Layout view is useful when you are creating a Web page or a document that you plan to view only on a computer screen.

12:00 PM

Awards Letter - Micro...

Beautiful Butterflies...

12:00 PM

Print Layout View

Outline View

You can work in the Print Layout view when you want to see how your document will appear on a printed page. This view displays all the elements in your document, such as margins and page numbers.

The Outline view is useful when you want to review and work with the structure of a long document. This view allows you to collapse a document to see only the headings or expand a document to see all the headings and text. Ready

Hungry Pete's - Micro...

12:00 PM

The Quest- Microsoft...

12:00 PM

Reading Layout View

The Reading Layout view is useful when you are reading a document on screen. This view removes distracting elements and makes adjustments to the document to make it easy to read on the screen. For more information on the Reading Layout view, see page 38.

Fishing Boat Day's - M...

12:00 PM

TEAM25 LinG

SAVE A DOCUMENT

You can save your document to store it for future use. Saving a document allows you to later review and edit the document.

You should regularly save changes you make to a document to avoid losing your work.

AD3 PUSH

mG COMPACT COMPACT

POWER

RESET

AD3

When you finish working with the document you saved, you can close the document to remove it from your screen.

SAVE A DOCUMENT

Document1 - Microsof...

⁄ Click

to save your document.

26

12:00 PM

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

Document1 - Microsof...

The Save As dialog box appears.

12:00 PM

¤ Type a name for the document.

Note: If you previously saved your document, the Save As dialog box will not appear since you have already named the document.

TEAM LinG

2

Save, Open and Print a Document USING WORD

Tip

What are the commonly used locations that I can access?

nts ocume cent D

p Deskto

Provides access to documents and folders you recently worked with.

Allows you to store a document on the Windows desktop.

My Re

ts

cumen

My Do

Provides a convenient place to store a document.

r

mpute

My Co

work My Net

Allows you to store a document on a drive on your computer, such as a floppy or external hard drive.

Places

Allows you to store a document on your network.

CLOSE A DOCUMENT

Document1 - Microsof...

This area shows the location where Word will store your document. You can click this area to change the location. This area allows you to access commonly used locations. You can click a location to save your document in the location.

12:00 PM

‹ Click Save to save your document. Word saves your document.

Game - Microsoft Offi...

⁄ When you finish working with a document, click to close the document. The document disappears from your screen.

12:00 PM

If you had more than one document open, the second last document you worked with appears on your screen.

TEAM27 LinG

OPEN A DOCUMENT , Susan Dear

You can open a saved document to view the document on your screen. This allows you to review and make changes to the document.

ing to e e com ted th u'll b reques ted yo to eligh er. I've d m m m e able I' is su e'll b th w o so ag e, Chic on tim ther. vacati e toge same f tim ut lots o e abo spend articl re to aper newsp . Be su plays sed a o d cl hat an ow w I've en sicals n u k e m a let m ming order upco on to I can me so so to e se write like to ould s. you w ticket le of coup Nancy

OPEN A DOCUMENT

12:00 PM

Black Bears - Microsof...

⁄ Click

to open

a document.

Note: If does not appear, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

28

The Open dialog box appears.

Black Bears - Microsof...

This area shows the location of the displayed documents. You can click this area to change the location.

12:00 PM

This area allows you to access documents in commonly used locations. You can click a location to display the documents stored in the location.

Note: For information on the commonly used locations, see the top of page 27. TEAM LinG

2

Save, Open and Print a Document USING WORD

Tip

How can I quickly open a document I recently worked with?

Word remembers the names of the last four documents you worked with. You can use the Getting Started task pane or the File menu to quickly open any of these documents.

Note: The Getting Started task pane appears each time you start Word. To display the Getting Started task pane, see page 8.

Use the Task Pane

Use the File Menu

⁄ Click the name of the

⁄ Click File. ¤ Click the name of the document

document you want to open.

Note: If the name of the document is not displayed, position the mouse over the bottom of the task pane to display the name.

Chocolate Cake Recipe

12:00 PM

Black Bears - Microsof...

¤ Click the name of the

‹ Click Open to open

document you want to open.

the document.

you want to open.

Note: If the name of the document you want is not displayed, position the mouse over the bottom of the menu to display the name.

Chocolate Cake Recipe

Chocolate Cake Recipe

Black Bears - Microsof...

Chocolate Cake Recipe...

The document opens and appears on your screen. You can now review and make changes to the document. This area displays the name of the document.

12:00 PM

If you already had a document open, the new document appears in a new Microsoft Word window. You can click the buttons on the taskbar to switch between the open documents.

TEAM29 LinG

PREVIEW A DOCUMENT BEFORE PRINTING

You can use the Print Preview feature to see how your document will look when printed.

AD3

PUSH

The Print Preview feature allows you to confirm that the document will print the way you want. PREVIEW A DOCUMENT BEFORE PRINTING

12:00 PM

Letter to Mr. Davis (...

⁄ Click

to preview your document before printing.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

30

The Print Preview window appears.

Letter to Mr. Davis (...

This area displays a page from your document. This area indicates which page is displayed and the total number of pages in your document.

12:00 PM

If your document contains more than one page, you can use the scroll bar to view the other pages.

TEAM LinG

2

Save, Open and Print a Document USING WORD

Tip

Can I edit my document in the Print Preview window?

Tip

Yes. If the mouse pointer looks like when over your document, you can edit the document. If the mouse pointer looks like or when over your document, you can enlarge or reduce the size of the page displayed on your screen. To change the appearance of the mouse pointer, click the Magnifier button ( ).

Thrilling special effects

Thrilling special effects

and outstanding acting

and outstanding acting

performances make

performances make

Voices from Space one

Voices from Space one

of the best movies of the

of the best movies of the

year.

year.

If the mouse pointer looks like when over the page, click .

If the last page in your document contains only a few lines of text, Word can shrink the text in your document to fit on one less page. In the Print Preview window, click the Shrink to Fit button ( ) to shrink the text in your document.

e best m

.

12:00 PM

Letter to Mr. Davis (...

¤ To magnify an area of the page, position the mouse over the area you want to magnify ( changes to ).

Can I shrink the text in my document to fit on one less page?

‹ Click the area to magnify the area.

12:00 PM

Letter to Mr. Davis (...

A magnified view of the area appears.

› To once again display the entire page, click anywhere on the page.

ˇ When you finish previewing your document, click Close to close the Print Preview window.

TEAM31 LinG

PRINT A DOCUMENT

You can produce a paper copy of the document displayed on your screen.

Before printing your document, make sure the printer is turned on and contains an adequate supply of paper.

PRINT A DOCUMENT

HP LaserJet 5/5M PostScript

LPT1

1

12:00 PM

Letter to Mr. Davis -...

⁄ Click anywhere in the document or page you want to print. To print only some of the text in the document, select the text you want to print. To select text, see page 20.

32

¤ Click File. ‹ Click Print. The Print dialog box appears.

Letter to Mr. Davis -...

This area displays the printer that will print your document. You can click this area to select a different printer.

› Click the print option you want to use ( changes to ).

12:00 PM

Note: For more information on the print options, see the top of page 33. If you selected Pages in step 4, type the pages you want to print in this area (example: 1,3,5 or 2-4).

TEAM LinG

2

Save, Open and Print a Document USING WORD

Tip

Which print option should I use?

e

Welcom

2003

Nature Lovers!

er why birds Ever wond

2003

2003

fly?

All

Current page

Pages

Selection

Prints every page in the document.

Prints the page containing the insertion point.

Prints the pages you specify.

Prints the text you selected.

HP LaserJet 5/5M PostScript

LPT1

1

2

12:00 PM

Letter to Mr. Davis -...

ˇ To print more than one copy of the document, double-click the number in this area and then type the number of copies you want to print.

Á Click OK.

Letter to Mr. Davis -...

QUICKLY PRINT ENTIRE DOCUMENT

⁄ Click

to quickly print your entire document.

12:00 PM

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

TEAM33 LinG

CREATE A NEW DOCUMENT

You can create a new document to start writing a new letter, memo or report.

Ann

Moun

n Bike Stotrain Mania e

NEW SL

d g, an s. bikin p ne-u ntain mou y own tu ed I ar of m rst ye n doing 't performips when my fi sn e sl uld This is r I've be bike ha chain I sho so fa lately my mple, the ndering if ne-ups. But For exa . I'm wo do my tu well. h gears anic to switc a mech pay worth it? Is it

ual

ETTE

Each document is like a separate piece of paper. Creating a new document is like placing a new piece of paper on your screen.

R

ke n Bi s ntai MouT une-up

CREATE A NEW DOCUMENT

Letter to Mr. Davis-...

⁄ Click

to create a new document.

34

12:00 PM

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

Letter to Mr. Davis-...

Document2 - Microsof...

The new document appears. The previous document is now hidden behind the new document. Word gives the new document a temporary name, such as Document2, until you save the document. To save a document, see page 26.

12:00 PM

A button for the new document appears on the taskbar.

TEAM LinG

2

SWITCH BETWEEN DOCUMENTS

Save, Open and Print a Document USING WORD

You can have several documents open at once. Word allows you to easily switch from one open document to another.

International

2001

Desi

gn INSTITUT

E

Switching between documents is useful when you want to review the contents of more than one document at a time. For example, you may want to simultaneously review a recipe and a shopping list for the recipe’s ingredients.

264 Mai n Chicago, St. Ill. 10487 (555) 555 -1241 (555) 555 -1219

SWITCH BETWEEN DOCUMENTS

Letter to Mr. Davis -...

⁄ Click Window to display a list of all the documents you have open.

Document2 - Microsof...

12:00 PM

¤ Click the name of the document you want to switch to.

Letter to Mr. Davis -...

The document appears. This area shows the name of the displayed document.

Document2 - Microsof...

12:00 PM

The taskbar displays a button for each open document. You can also click the buttons on the taskbar to switch between the open documents.

TEAM35 LinG

COMPARE DOCUMENTS SIDE BY SIDE

You can display two documents side by side on your screen. Comparing documents side by side is useful if you want to compare an edited document to an original version of the document.

When you scroll through one document, Word automatically scrolls through the other document for you, so you can easily compare the contents of the two documents.

While You're There,

Great Online Discoveries

discover the wild treasures of Bolivia or try your hand at Discoveries' perplexing mind games.

Discoveries'

Great Online Discoveries

Great Online Discoveries

offers the latest in science news and features, which take readers deep into the jungle or far into outer space.

Great Online Discoveries

COMPARE DOCUMENTS SIDE BY SIDE

Company Newsletter ...

⁄ Open the two documents you want to compare side by side.

Note: To open a document, see page 28.

36

Company Newsletter ...

12:00 PM

¤ Click Window in the current document. ‹ Click Compare Side by Side with to compare the current document with the other open document.

Company Newsletter ...

Word displays the documents side by side on your screen. The Compare Side by Side toolbar also appears.

Company Newsletter ...

12:00 PM

› To scroll through the documents, drag the scroll box up or down in one document. Word automatically scrolls through the other document for you. ˇ When you finish comparing the documents on your screen, . click Close Side by Side TEAM LinG

2

ZOOM IN OR OUT

Save, Open and Print a Document USING WORD

Word allows you to enlarge or reduce the display of text on your screen. Dear Susan, I'm delighted you'll be coming to Chicago this summer. I've requested the same vacation time, so we'll be able to spend lots of time together. In the three years I've been living in Chicago, I've really grown to love the city. I know all the best places to see, so I'll be a great tour guide during your visit!

You can increase the zoom setting to view an area of your document in more detail or decrease the zoom setting to view more of your document at once.

ree years I've been I've really grown ll be a great tour g

300% 200% 75% 50%

COLOR VIEW

The available zoom settings depend on the current view of your document. For information on the document views, see page 24.

Zoom Settings

ZOOM IN OR OUT

100%

50%

12:00 PM

Boston Cycling Club - ...

⁄ Click

in this area to display a list of zoom settings.

Note: If the Zoom area is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the area.

¤ Click the zoom setting you want to use.

Note: Select Page Width or Text Width to fit the page or the text across the width of your screen. Select Whole Page or Two Pages to display one or two full pages across your screen.

Boston Cycling Club - ...

The document appears in the new zoom setting. You can edit the document as usual.

12:00 PM

To return to the normal zoom setting, repeat steps 1 and 2, selecting 100% in step 2.

Changing the zoom setting will not affect the way text appears on a printed page.

TEAM37 LinG

READ A DOCUMENT ON SCREEN

Screen 1 of 69

You can use the Reading Layout view to make a document easier to read on your screen. However, your document will no longer accurately represent how it will appear when printed.

Screen 2 of 69

Chapter 1 "Has there been any contact since the distress call sent out at 07:00 hours?" Captain Jasper MacAlpine asked. He took a sip of his steaming coffee while bracing himself as a wave crashed into the side of the coast guard cutter. "No, we haven't heard a word," first officer Jim Squires replied curtly. "But with this weather sir. I don't think it looks good." It was nearing 10 o'clock in the morning. The fishing boat The

Lucky Star had been missing for over two hours. Jasper took a deep breath and rubbed his temples. The Lucky Star was Clarence Brighton's boat. Jasper played Sunday morning hockey with Clarence and his two crewmates, Simon "Slim" Irvine and Junior Perkins, at the local community center in Port Dover. With a population of just over 8,000, there wasn't an unfamiliar face in the town. "Let's go over the search area one more time," Jasper ordered. "It has to be here."

In the Reading Layout view, the Standard and Formatting toolbars are hidden. Instead, you will see the Reading Layout and Reviewing toolbars, which provide tools to help you read and review a document on your screen.

READ A DOCUMENT ON SCREEN

Fishing Boat Days - M...

⁄ Click Read to view your document in the Reading Layout view.

Note: If the Read button is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

38

12:00 PM

The document appears in the Reading Layout view.

Fishing Boat Days - M...

This area displays your document. This area displays which screen is displayed and the total number of screens in your document.

12:00 PM

If your document contains more than two screens, you can use the scroll bar to view the other screens.

TEAM LinG

2

Save, Open and Print a Document USING WORD

Tip

Will Word ever automatically switch to the Reading Layout view?

When someone sends you a Word document as an attachment to an e-mail message and you open the attachment in Outlook, Word will automatically switch to the Reading Layout view. For information on attaching a file to a message, see page 316.

Fishing Boat Days - M...

¤ To change the size of the text on your screen, click one of the following buttons. Increase the size of text Decrease the size of text

Screen 1 of 69

Tip

Is the Reading Layout view suitable for all my documents?

The Reading Layout view may not be suitable for all your documents. For example, tables, columns or WordArt may not appear correctly. If you need to view these types of items, you should view your document in the Print Layout view instead. For more information on the Print Layout view, see page 24.

Screen 2 of 69

Chapter 1

12:00 PM

Note: If or is not displayed, click on the Reading Layout toolbar to display the buttons.

12:00 PM

Fishing Boat Days - M...

You can edit the document in the Reading Layout view as you would in any other view.

‹ When you finish

Note: For information on the other document views, see page 24.

Note: If the Close button is not displayed, click on the Reading Layout toolbar to display the button.

reading your document, click Close to return to the previous view.

TEAM39 LinG

E-MAIL A DOCUMENT ABCC orpo r

atio

n AD3

AD3 PUSH

PUSH

You can e-mail the document displayed on your screen to a friend, family member or colleague.

AD3

PUSH

Boston Cycling Club Dear member: This year marks the Boston Cycling Club's first ever cycle-a-thon , which takes place October 10. The event is aimed at raising money for local chariti es while raising our organization's profile in the community. Prizes will be award ed to those who raise the most money. Mark Williams President, Boston

Before you can e-mail a document, Microsoft Office Outlook 2003 must be set up on your computer.

Cycling Club

AD3

HSUP

Maxi

FAX MODEM

288

MG

AA

CH

CH

RQ

SQ

TR

HR

E-MAIL A DOCUMENT

Boston Cycling Club - ...

⁄ Click

to e-mail the displayed document.

12:00 PM

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

An area appears for you to address the message.

¤ Click this area and type the e-mail address of the person you want to receive the message.

40

12:00 PM

Boston Cycling Club - ...

‹ To send a copy of the message to another person, click this area and type their e-mail address.

Note: To enter more than one e-mail address in step 2 or 3, separate each e-mail address with a semicolon (;). TEAM LinG

2

Save, Open and Print a Document USING WORD

Tip

How can I address an e-mail message?

Tip

Why would I include an introduction for the document I am e-mailing?

Including an introduction allows you to provide the recipient of the message with additional information about the document. For example, the recipient may require instructions or an explanation of the content of the document.

To

Sends the message to the person you specify.

Carbon Copy (Cc)

Sends an exact copy of the message to a person who is not directly involved, but would be interested in the message.

Boston Cycling Club - ...

› Click this area and type a subject for the message.

Bosto

n Cy cling

Dear mem Th fir is ye To ber: Ap st ev ar m John m ril 10 er cycle arks th , -a-th e Bo orga oney fo . ThIew niza r loa evou ent ldonlik , ston Cy tion' casa Pr is aimwhe ich s pr l chle who izes wi Ju takescling Cl ed at to ofile aritisesmee raise ll be W ne ub's raisiscplhe in while ti ace du the awardeha 10 M ng ng e co , 11raisi t da thth mos le fo Pres ark Will t mond to th te mmth ng ourr iden iam t, Bo s mar ey. ose is beunityor ston st .fo 12th. y Cycli r yo ng Cl u? ub

Club Here is the list of softball teams as of June 15. Please let me know if there is anyone I have forgotten.

CO CP OY PY

Here is the list of softball teams as of June 15. Please let me know if there is anyone I have forgotten.

12:00 PM

Note: If a subject already exists, you can drag the mouse over the existing subject and then type a new subject.

Boston Cycling Club - ...

ˇ To include an introduction for the document you are e-mailing, click this area and type the introduction.

12:00 PM

Á Click Send a Copy to send the message.

TEAM41 LinG

INSERT AND DELETE TEXT

You can easily add new text to your document and remove text you no longer need.

IN K

th 50 its be s e l n: rat e wil eb usa cel ar. W er 11 d by rS a igh is ye temb lowe De l rH h lga ar y t n Sep se, fo a f Tra ivers ing o Hou s n n oto an ebrat pe er. ph lay l O l o p ce h an dinn cho r dis rs wit uffet ou for ou y b a ng ilia bri ab ase emor e l P dm an le. , a t b rds a

eg st r

Be

nn

cky

Fly

Be

Word is an efficient editing tool. When you insert new text, the existing text moves to make room for the new text. When you remove text, the remaining text moves to fill the empty space.

INSERT TEXT

Seattle Skydiving Clu...

⁄ Click the location in your document where you want to insert new text. The text you type will appear where the insertion point flashes on your screen.

42

12:00 PM

Note: You can press the , , or key to move the insertion point one character or line in any direction.

12:00 PM

Seattle Skydiving Clu...

¤ Type the text you want to insert. To insert a blank space, press the Spacebar .

The words to the right of the new text move forward.

TEAM LinG

3

Edit a Document

USING WORD

Tip

How can I insert symbols that are not available on my keyboard?

Tip

When you type one of the following sets of characters, Word automatically replaces the characters with a symbol. (c)

C

(r)

R

(tm) :(

Why does the existing text in my document disappear when I insert new text?

You may have turned on the Overtype feature, which will replace existing text with the text you type. When the Overtype feature is on, the OVR status indicator at the bottom of your screen is bold. To turn the Overtype feature on or off, press the Insert key.

™

:) :| <- - -> OVR

<== ==> <=>

DELETE TEXT

on a weekly basis

12:00 PM

Seattle Skydiving Clu...

⁄ Select the text you

¤ Press the

want to delete. To select text, see page 20.

to remove the text.

Delete

key

Seattle Skydiving Clu...

The text disappears. The remaining text in the line or paragraph moves to fill the empty space.

12:00 PM

To delete a single character, click to the right of the character you want to delete and then press the Backspace key. Word deletes the character to the left of the flashing insertion point.

TEAM43 LinG

MOVE OR COPY TEXT

ity ers . Univon Ave ing ls Boe 00 Ne , IL o 2 1 ag Chic657 60

You can move or copy text to a new location in your document.

03 , 20 ry 5 as t. nt hom een S T me . Qu rew ploy call tion e ma And 2-3456 , IL r em me Pleasre info 20 icago m u t. ut s sistan for mo Ch 601 s: o a b a as 60 hom ent iring rch r. T rtm rM inqu resea Depa for a Dea s you ies as ource k n s it Tha portun an Re 7 op r Hum . 21 ou ext 295 5-7 0 ely, 5 n r 5 o e c ens (312) 5-349 Sin or B e: 2) 55 fess Phon c t:1 ta Pro : (3 cFoanx s s e s ld rce a Ple sie Fie Resou Su man Hu

Feb

Moving text allows you to rearrange text in your document. When you move text, the text disappears from its original location. Copying text allows you to repeat information in your document without having to retype the text. When you copy text, the text appears in both the original and new locations.

rua

MOVE OR COPY TEXT

Jason Cook President, Seattle Skydiving Club

Jason Cook President, Seattle Skydiving Club

12:00 PM

Seattle Skydiving Clu...

USING DRAG AND DROP

⁄ Select the text you want to move. To select text, see page 20.

¤ Position the mouse over the selected text ( changes to ).

44

‹ To move the text, drag the mouse to where you want to place the text. Note: The text will appear where you position the dotted insertion point on your screen.

12:00 PM

Seattle Skydiving Clu...

The text moves to the new location.

To copy text, perform steps 1 to 3, except press and hold down the Ctrl key as you perform step 3.

TEAM LinG

3

Edit a Document

USING WORD

How can I use the Clipboard task pane to move or copy text?

Tip

Tip

Why does the Paste Options button ( appear when I move or copy text?

)

The Paste Options button ( ) allows you to change the format of text you moved or copied. For example, you can choose to keep the original formatting of the text or change the formatting of the text to match the text in the new location. Click the Paste Options button to display a list of options and then select the option you want to use. The Paste Options button is available only until you perform another task.

The Clipboard task pane displays up to the last 24 items you have selected to move or copy. To place an item that appears on the Clipboard task pane in your document, click the location in your document where you want the item to appear and then click the item in the task pane. For information about task panes, see page 8.

Skydiving Club

Seattle Skydiving Clu...

USING THE TOOLBAR BUTTONS

⁄ Select the text you want to move or copy. To select text, see page 20.

¤ Click one of the following buttons. Move text Copy text

12:00 PM

Note: If the button you want is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button. The Clipboard task pane may appear. To use the Clipboard task pane, see the top of this page.

12:00 PM

Seattle Skydiving Clu...

‹ Click the location where you want to place the text.

› Click

to place the text in the new location.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button. The text appears in the new location.

TEAM45 LinG

UNDO CHANGES

Word remembers the last changes you made to your document. If you regret these changes, you can cancel them by using the Undo feature. The Undo feature can cancel your last editing and formatting changes. For example, you can cancel editing changes such as deleting a paragraph and cancel formatting changes such as underlining a word. UNDO CHANGES

This meeting will also help prepare everyone for next month's sales conference.

12:00 PM

Memo - Microsoft Offi...

⁄ Click

to undo the last change you made to your document.

46

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

Memo - Microsoft Offi...

12:00 PM

Word cancels the last change you made to your document.

To reverse the results of using the Undo feature, click .

You can repeat step 1 to cancel previous changes you made.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

TEAM LinG

3

COUNT WORDS IN A DOCUMENT

Edit a Document

USING WORD Dear Susan: Trafalgar High School celebrates its 50th anniversary this year. We will be celebrating on September 22nd with an Open House, followed by a buffet dinner.

You can have Word count the number of words in your document. Counting words is useful if you have a document that must contain a specific number of words, such as a magazine submission.

Please bring your school photos and memorabilia for our display table.

Word Count When counting the number of words in your document, Word also counts the number of pages, characters, paragraphs and lines in your document.

COUNT WORDS IN A DOCUMENT

Memo - Microsoft Offi...

⁄ Click Tools. ¤ Click Word Count.

12:00 PM

Note: To count the number of words in only part of your document, select the text before performing step 1. To select text, see page 20.

12:00 PM

Memo - Microsoft Offi...

The Word Count dialog box appears. This area displays the total number of pages, words, characters, paragraphs and lines in your document.

‹ When you finish reviewing the information, click Close or Cancel to close the Word Count dialog box.

TEAM47 LinG

FIND AND REPLACE TEXT

You can find and replace every occurrence of a word or phrase in your document. This is useful if you have frequently misspelled a name.

Jodi Jodi

Jodi

FIND AND REPLACE TEXT

12:00 PM

Letter to John - Micro...

⁄ Click Edit. ¤ Click Replace.

48

Note: If Replace does not appear on the menu, position the mouse over the bottom of the menu to display the menu option.

Letter to John - Micro...

The Find and Replace dialog box appears.

‹ Type the text you want to find.

12:00 PM

› Click this area and type the text you want to use to replace the text you typed in step 3.

ˇ Click Find Next to start the search. TEAM LinG

3

Edit a Document

USING WORD

Tip

How can the Find and Replace feature help me quickly enter text?

When you need to type a long word or phrase, such as University of Massachusetts, many times in a document, you can use the Replace feature to simplify the task. You can type a short form of the word or phrase, such as UM, throughout your document and then have Word replace the short form with the full word or phrase. versity of I attend the Uni ity . The Univers Massachusetts etts is located hus ssac Ma of e wid a rs offe in Amherst and grams. variety of pro

Tip

Can I find text in my document without replacing the text?

Yes. You can use the Find and Replace feature to locate a word or phrase in your document. To find text in your document, perform steps 1 to 3 below. Then perform step 5 until you find the text. To close the dialog box, press the Esc key.

Dear Betty:

U

Have you received much this winter?

M

We just had a huge storm here! The children are building a man and throwing balls! The beautiful to fall.

DX-7730

flakes are continuing

Sincerely, Jane

hectic

Letter to John - Micro...

Word highlights the first matching word it finds.

Á Click one of the following options.

12:00 PM

Letter to John - Micro...

12:00 PM

Replace - Replace the word. Replace All - Replace the word and all other matching words in the document.

In this example, Word replaces the word and searches for the next matching word.

° Click OK to close the dialog box.

Find Next - Ignore the word.

‡ Replace or ignore

and Replace dialog box.

Note: To cancel the search at any time, press the Esc key.

matching words until a dialog box appears, telling you the search is complete.

· Click Close or Cancel to close the Find

TEAM49 LinG

CHECK SPELLING AND GRAMMAR

You can find and correct all the spelling and grammar errors in your document.

wether

Word compares every word in your document to words in its dictionary. If a word does not exist in the dictionary, the word is considered misspelled.

I did not buy no books.

mG

Word will not find a correctly spelled word used in the wrong context, such as “My niece is sit years old.” You should carefully review your document to find this type of error. CHECK SPELLING AND GRAMMAR

aimed

12:00 PM

Boston Cycling Club - ...

Word automatically underlines misspelled words in red and grammar errors in green. The underlines will not appear when you print your document.

50

Boston Cycling Club - ...

⁄ Click

to start checking your document for spelling and grammar errors.

The Spelling and Grammar dialog box appears if Word finds an error in your document.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

This area displays the first misspelled word or grammar error.

12:00 PM

This area displays suggestions for correcting the error.

TEAM LinG

3

Edit a Document

USING WORD

Why did Word underline a correctly spelled word?

Tip

Tip

How can I quickly correct a single misspelled word or grammar error in my document?

The word does not exist in Word’s dictionary. You can add the word to the dictionary so Word will recognize the word during future spell checks.

⁄ Right-click the misspelled word or grammar error in your document. A menu appears with suggestions to correct the error.

⁄ Right-click the word you want to add to the dictionary.

¤ Click the suggestion you want to use to correct the error.

¤ Click Add to Dictionary.

Note: If you do not want to use any of the suggestions, click outside the menu to close the menu.

aimed

Boston Cycling Club - ...

¤ Click the suggestion you want to use to correct the error.

‹ Click Change to correct the error in your document.

12:00 PM

To skip the error and continue checking your document, click Ignore Once.

Note: To skip the error and all other occurrences of the error in your document, click Ignore All or Ignore Rule. The name of the button depends on the type of error.

12:00 PM

Boston Cycling Club - ...

› Correct or ignore misspelled words and grammar errors until this dialog box appears, telling you the spelling and grammar check is complete.

ˇ Click OK to close the dialog box.

TEAM51 LinG

USING THE THESAURUS

You can use the thesaurus on Word’s Research task pane to replace a word in your document with a more suitable word.

The thesaurus can replace a word in your document with a word that shares the same meaning, called a synonym.

Word

Suggestions

GE HUG GEE SE N E MM IIM L LAR

BIG

GIGAN TIC

Using the thesaurus included with Word is faster and more convenient than searching through a printed thesaurus. USING THE THESAURUS

Thesaurus: English (U.S.)

Cake Recipe - Micros...

⁄ Click the word you want to replace with another word. ¤ Click to display the Research task pane. 52

12:00 PM

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

12:00 PM

Cake Recipe - Micros...

The Research task pane appears. This area displays the word you selected in step 1.

‹ Click this area to display a list of resources you can use to search for information.

› Click Thesaurus.

TEAM LinG

3

Edit a Document

USING WORD

Tip

What if the Research task pane does not display a word I want to use?

Tip

How can I quickly replace a word in my document with a synonym?

You can look up synonyms for the words displayed in the Research task pane to find a more suitable word. Click a word in the task pane to display synonyms for the word.

Note: If you click a b old word in the task pane, you will hide or display the list of synonyms for the bold word.

⁄ Right-click the word you want to replace with another word. A menu appears.

¤ Click Synonyms to view a list of words with similar meanings.

‹ Click the word you want to replace the word in your document.

Cake Recipe - Micros...

ˇ Click

to find words with similar meanings.

Each word that appears in bold in this area has a similar meaning to the word in your document. Each word below a bold word offers a synonym for the bold word.

12:00 PM

Á Position the mouse

‡ Click the arrow

over the word you want to use in your document.

beside the word you want to use.

An arrow ( ) appears beside the word.

12:00 PM

Cake Recipe - Micros...

° Click Insert to replace the word in your document with the new word. · To hide the Research task pane, click

.

TEAM53 LinG

USING THE RESEARCH TASK PANE

You can use the Research task pane to gather reference material without ever having to leave your Word document. For example, you can look up a word in a dictionary or search through an encyclopedia on the Web.

bird

Dictionary

Encyclopedia

To use some of the resources offered in the Research task pane, your computer must be connected to the Internet. Links to Web sites in the Research task pane that are preceded by a dollar symbol ( ) require you to register and pay before you can view the information.

USING THE RESEARCH TASK PANE

Encarta Encyclopedia: English (North America)

12:00 PM

The Olympic Games - ...

⁄ Click a word in your document that you want to research.

¤ Click

12:00 PM

The Olympic Games - ...

to display the Research task pane.

The Research task pane appears.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

This area displays the word you selected in step 1.

‹ Click this area to display a list of the resources you can use for your research.

› Click the resource you want to use to find information.

Note: In this example, we select Encarta Encyclopedia. The following screens depend on the resource you select.

54

TEAM LinG

3

Edit a Document

USING WORD

Tip

What types of resources can I search using the Research task pane?

Busines s News Stocks So ar 30%

50 cents

Monday,

Septemb

er 20, 1999

President promises tax cut BY KELLEIGH

Washington

Washington

Showers.

High 90

Intern News ational

WING

Corresponden

t

FEDERAL

RESERVE

NOTE 1111111000

ONE

1111111000

A 7777777

1

7777777

GEORGE

THE UNITED

WASHINGTON

STATES

1

OF AMERICA

Reference Books

Research Sites

Business and Financial Sites

You can choose to look up terms in reference books, such as the Encarta Dictionary or a thesaurus. For information on using the thesaurus, see page 52.

You can research information online using eLibrary, Encarta Encyclopedia, Factiva News Search or MSN Search.

You can access company and stock market information through Gale Company Profiles or MSN Money Stock Quotes.

12:00 PM

The Olympic Games - ...

The reference material appears in this area. Each word that appears in bold in this area offers information about the word you specified in step 1.

Below each bold word, a short description of the available information and one or more links that you can choose appear.

ˇ Click a link to view

The Olympic Games - ...

A Web browser window opens and displays the information you selected. The Research task pane also appears in the Web browser window.

MSN Learning & Rese...

12:00 PM

To research a different word at any time, doubleclick this area and type the word. Then press the Enter key.

Á To return to your document, click .

the information.

TEAM55 LinG

USING SMART TAGS

Word labels certain types of information, such as dates and addresses, with smart tags. You can use a smart tag to perform an action, such as scheduling a meeting on a specific date or displaying a map for an address.

3

You can change the options for smart tags to specify the types of information you want Word to recognize and label with a smart tag. USING SMART TAGS

Awards Letter - Micro...

A dotted, purple underline appears below text Word has labeled as a smart tag.

⁄ To perform an action using a smart tag, position the mouse over the text labeled as a smart tag.

56

12:00 PM

The Smart Tag Actions button ( ) appears.

12:00 PM

Awards Letter - Micro...

¤ Click the Smart Tag

‹ Click the action you

Actions button ( ) to display a list of actions you can perform using the smart tag.

want to perform. The program that allows you to perform the action will appear on your screen.

TEAM LinG

3

Edit a Document

USING WORD

Tip

How can I remove a smart tag from text in my document?

To remove a smart tag from text in your document, perform steps 1 to 3 on page 56, selecting Remove this Smart Tag in step 3.

Tip

What types of information can Word label with smart tags?

Word can label people’s names, dates, times, addresses, places and telephone numbers with smart tags. Word can also label e-mail addresses of people to whom you sent messages using Microsoft Office Outlook and financial symbols you type in capital letters, such as MSFT.

Telephone Number (Smart tag lists)

Awards Letter - Micro...

CHANGE SMART TAG OPTIONS

⁄ Click Tools. ¤ Click AutoCorrect Options.

12:00 PM

Note: If AutoCorrect Options does not appear on the menu, position the mouse over the bottom of the menu to display the menu option. The AutoCorrect dialog box appears.

Awards Letter - Micro...

‹ Click the Smart Tags tab to display the smart tag options. This area displays the types of information Word can label as smart tags. Smart tags are currently turned on for each type of information that displays a check mark ( ).

12:00 PM

› You can click the check box beside a type of information to turn smart tags on ( ) or off ( ) for the information. ˇ Click OK to confirm your changes. TEAM57 LinG

ADD A CLIP ART IMAGE

You can add professionally designed clip art images to your document. Clip art images can help illustrate concepts and make your document more interesting.

ADD A CLIP ART IMAGE

12:00 PM

Recipes - Microsoft O...

⁄ Click Insert. ¤ Click Picture.

‹ Click Clip Art.

Recipes - Microsoft O...

The Clip Art task pane appears.

12:00 PM

› Click Organize clips to view all the available clip art images in the Microsoft Clip Organizer. Note: The first time you add a clip art image to a document, the Add Clips to Organizer dialog box appears. To catalog the clip art images and other media files on your computer, click Now in the dialog box.

58

TEAM LinG

3

Edit a Document

USING WORD

Tip

In the Microsoft Clip Organizer, what type of clip art images will I find in each collection?

My Collections

Office Collections

Web Collections

Displays images that came with Microsoft Windows and images you created or obtained on your own.

Displays the images that came with Microsoft Office.

Displays the images that are available at Microsoft’s Web site and at Web sites in partnership with Microsoft.

Emily

Recipes - Microsoft O...

The Microsoft Clip Organizer window appears. This area displays the folders that contain the clip art images you can add to your document. A folder displaying a plus sign ( ) contains hidden folders.

Favorites - Microsoft ...

12:00 PM

ˇ To display the hidden folders within a folder, click the plus sign ( ) beside the folder ( changes to ).

Note: You must be connected to the Internet to view the contents of the Web Collections folder.

Recipes - Microsoft O...

12:00 PM

Food - Microsoft Clip ...

Á Click a folder

This area displays the clip art images in the folder you selected.

of interest.

‡ Click the clip art image

The hidden folders appear.

you want to add to your document.

TEAM59 LinG

ADD A CLIP ART IMAGE

After you locate an image you want to add to your document, you can copy the image to the clipboard and then place the image in your document.

The clipboard temporarily stores information you have selected to move or copy. ADD A CLIP ART IMAGE (CONTINUED)

Recipes - Microsoft O...

° Click

to copy the image you selected to the clipboard.

· Click

to close the Microsoft Clip Organizer.

60

Food - Microsoft Clip ...

12:00 PM

12:00 PM

Recipes - Microsoft O...

A dialog box appears, stating that you have one or more clip art images on the clipboard.

— Click the location in

‚ Click Yes to continue.

± Click

your document where you want to add the image.

The image appears in your document.

¡ To close the Clip Art task pane, click

.

to place the image in your document.

TEAM LinG

3

Edit a Document

USING WORD

Tip

How do I resize a clip art image?

Tip

How do I delete a clip art image?

Click the clip art image you want to delete. Handles ( ) appear around the image. Press the Delete key to delete the image.

Coral Cove Resort

⁄ Click the image you

‹ Drag the handle

want to resize. Handles ( ) appear around the image.

until the image is the size you want.

¤ Position the mouse

ICK CL

ares behind and come to the beautiful Coral Cove Re

A dashed line shows the new size.

Delete

over one of the handles ( changes to , , or ).

Cooking Tips - Micros...

SEARCH FOR CLIP ART IMAGES

You can search for clip art images by specifying one or more words of interest in the Clip Art task pane.

⁄ Double-click this area and type one or more words that describe the image you want to find. Then press the Enter key.

12:00 PM

Note: To display the Clip Art task pane, perform steps 1 to 3 on page 58.

12:00 PM

Cooking Tips - Micros...

Clip art images that match the words you specified appear in this area.

¤ Click the location in your

‹ Click the image you want to add to your document. The image appears in your document.

document where you want to add an image.

TEAM61 LinG

CHANGE FONT OF TEXT

50 TRAFALGAR

th

You can change the font of text to enhance the appearance of your document.

HIGH

CELEBRATION

Dear Susan: Trafalgar High School celebrat es its 50th anniversary this year. We will be celebrat ing on September 22nd with an Open House, followed by a buffet dinner.

Please bring your school photos and memorab ilia for our display table. Best regards,

dLa

Becky Flynn

8pt

e FW ont 8pt

10pt

Abc AArial bc an Bookm le y t Old S

a

P d nLt Fo

i

12pt

14pt

14pt

18pt

18pt

O

R

Z

I

e b R X

8pt

10pt

12pt

Abc Times an om New R

S

18pt

g

Font

10pt

12pt

14pt

R

e

i

CHANGE FONT OF TEXT

Arial

MEMO

12:00 PM

Memo - Microsoft Offi...

⁄ Select the text you want to change to a different font. To select text, see page 20.

¤ Click

in this area to display a list of the available fonts.

62

Note: If the Font area is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the area.

Memo - Microsoft Offi...

The text you selected changes to the new font.

12:00 PM

To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

‹ Click the font you want to use.

Note: Word displays the fonts you have most recently used at the top of the list.

TEAM LinG

4

CHANGE SIZE OF TEXT

Format Text

USING WORD

You can increase or decrease the size of text in your document.

text size of res the pproximately u s a e Word m . There are a ts e inch. in poin ts in on 72 poin

Larger text is easier to read, but smaller text allows you to fit more information on a page.

CHANGE SIZE OF TEXT

12

20

12:00 PM

Memo - Microsoft Offi...

⁄ Select the text you want to change to a new size. To select text, see page 20.

Note: If the Font Size area is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the area.

¤ Click

‹ Click the size you

in this area to display a list of the available sizes.

Memo - Microsoft Offi...

The text you selected changes to the new size.

12:00 PM

To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

want to use.

TEAM63 LinG

CHANGE TEXT COLOR

You can change the color of text to draw attention to headings or important information in your document.

Keep in mind that when you print a document that contains colored text on a black-and-white printer, the colored text will appear in shades of gray. CHANGE TEXT COLOR

RED

12:00 PM

Swimming Levels - Mic...

⁄ Select the text you want to change to a different color. To select text, see page 20.

¤ Click

in this area to display the available colors.

64

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

‹ Click the color you want to use.

Swimming Levels - Mic...

The text you selected appears in the new color. To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

12:00 PM

To return text to its original color, repeat steps 1 to 3, selecting Automatic in step 3.

TEAM LinG

4

HIGHLIGHT TEXT

Format Text

USING WORD

You can highlight text that you want to stand out in your document. Highlighting text is useful for marking information you want to review or verify later.

DEA

R

MRS

. G LED HILL : a 10 Scho t h an ol R n ivers eunio and ary n on 8 at High Woo Aug Scho ust 6 dblo ol. W ,7 ck H e all ther i g h e. C hope onta to s for m ct Su ore in san H ee you form u g hes ation .

The

re is

Magg

ie Hea

ley

If you plan to print your document on a black-andwhite printer, use a light highlight color so you will be able to easily read the printed text.

HIGHLIGHT TEXT

12:00 PM

Awards Letter - Micro...

⁄ Click

in this area to display the available highlight colors.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

12:00 PM

Awards Letter - Micro...

¤ Click the highlight

‹ Select each area of text

› When you finish

color you want to use.

you want to highlight. To select text, see page 20.

highlighting text, click or press the Esc key.

The text you select appears highlighted.

To remove a highlight from text, repeat steps 1 to 4, selecting None in step 2.

The mouse changes to when over your document.

TEAM65 LinG

BOLD, ITALICIZE OR UNDERLINE TEXT

You can bold, italicize or underline text to emphasize information in your document.

You can use one feature at a time or any combination of the three features to change the style of text. BOLD, ITALICIZE OR UNDERLINE TEXT

12:00 PM

Pot Luck Lunch - Micr...

⁄ Select the text you want to bold, italicize or underline. To select text, see page 20.

¤ Click one of the following buttons. Bold Italic Underline

66

Note: If the button you want is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

Pot Luck Lunch - Micr...

The text you selected appears in the new style. To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

12:00 PM

To remove a bold, italic or underline style, repeat steps 1 and 2.

TEAM LinG

4

COPY FORMATTING

Format Text

USING WORD

Great Composers You can copy the formatting of text to make one area of text in your document look exactly like another.

Bach Mozart Beethoven Vivaldi

You may want to copy the formatting of text to make all the headings or important words in your document look the same. This will give the text in your document a consistent appearance.

Holst

COPY FORMATTING

Pot Luck Lunch - Micr...

⁄ Select the text that displays the formatting you want to copy. To select text, see page 20.

¤ Click

to copy the formatting of the text.

12:00 PM

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

Pot Luck Lunch - Micr...

The mouse changes to when over your document.

‹ Select the text you want to display the same formatting.

12:00 PM

The text you selected displays the formatting. To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

TEAM67 LinG

CREATE A BULLETED OR NUMBERED LIST

You can separate items in a list by beginning each item with a bullet or number.

Bulleted lists are useful for items in no particular order, such as items in a shopping list. Numbered lists are useful for items in a specific order, such as instructions in a recipe. CREATE A BULLETED OR NUMBERED LIST

Preheat oven to 350. In a mixer, cream together sugar and butter. Whisk together eggs, milk and vanilla. Add to creamed mixture and stir thoroughly. Sift together flour, baking soda and cocoa. Add to wet mixture. Pour mixture into 9" x 13" greased cake pan. Bake for 40 minutes or until done.

Preheat oven to 350. In a mixer, cream together sugar and butter. Whisk together eggs, milk and vanilla. Add to creamed mixture and stir thoroughly. Sift together flour, baking soda and cocoa. Add to wet mixture. Pour mixture into 9" x 13" greased cake pan. Bake for 40 minutes or until done.

12:00 PM

Classic Chocolate Cak...

⁄ Select the text you want to display as a bulleted or numbered list. To select text, see page 20.

68

¤ Click Format. ‹ Click Bullets and Numbering.

12:00 PM

Classic Chocolate Cak...

The Bullets and Numbering dialog box appears.

› Click the tab for the

ˇ Click the style you want to use.

Á Click OK to confirm your selection.

type of list you want to create.

TEAM LinG

4

Format Text

USING WORD

Tip

How can I create a bulleted or numbered list as I type?

Note: When you create a bulleted or numbered list as you type, the AutoCorrect Options button ( ) appears. You can click this button and select Undo Automatic Bullets/Numbering to specify that you do not want Word to create a bulleted or numbered list in this instance.

⁄ Type * to create a bulleted list or type 1. to create a numbered list. Then press the Spacebar .

¤ Type the first item in the list and then press the Enter key. Word automatically adds a bullet or number for the next item.

‹ Repeat step 2 for each item in the list.

› To finish the list, press the

Enter

key twice.

Preheat oven to 350. In a mixer, cream together sugar and butter. Whisk together eggs, milk and vanilla. Add to creamed mixture and stir thoroughly. Sift together flour, baking soda and cocoa. Add to wet mixture. Pour mixture into 9" x 13" greased cake pan. Bake for 40 minutes or until done.

Classic Chocolate Cak...

A bullet or number appears in front of each item in the list. To deselect the text in the list, click outside the selected area.

12:00 PM

To remove bullets or numbers from a list, repeat steps 1 to 6, selecting None in step 5.

Classic Chocolate Cak...

USING THE TOOLBAR BUTTONS

⁄ Select the text you want to display as a list. To select text, see page 20.

¤ Click one of the following

12:00 PM

Note: If the button you want is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

buttons. Add numbers Add bullets

TEAM69 LinG

CHANGE ALIGNMENT OF TEXT

You can enhance the appearance of your document by aligning text in different ways.

Right Align Center Left Align

Justify

By default, Word aligns text along the left margin. CHANGE ALIGNMENT OF TEXT

Linda Harris President, SX Appliances 104 Beach St. Boulder, CO 80302

Customer Inquiry - Mi...

12:00 PM

⁄ Select the text

¤ Click one of the following

you want to align differently. To select text, see page 20.

buttons. Left align Center Right align Justify Note: If the button you want is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

70

Customer Inquiry - Mi...

The text displays the new alignment.

12:00 PM

To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

TEAM LinG

4

CHANGE LINE SPACING

Format Text

USING WORD

You can change the amount of space between the lines of text in your document.

Changing the line spacing can make a document easier to review and edit. CHANGE LINE SPACING

When most people think back to the original Olympic Games, they think back to Athens, Greece in 1896. But in fact those games were only a revival of an ideal dating as far back as 776 B.C. While 1896 stands out in the minds of many, it is the pan-Hellenic festival of ancient Greece, consisting of athletic games and contests of poetry and dance, which laid the foundation of what we recognize as the modern Olympics.

The Olympic Games - ...

⁄ Select the text you want to use a different line spacing. To select text, see page 20.

¤ Click

in this area to display the available line spacing options.

12:00 PM

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

The Olympic Games - ...

The text appears in the line spacing you selected.

12:00 PM

To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

‹ Click the line spacing option you want to use.

TEAM71 LinG

INDENT PARAGRAPHS

You can indent text to make paragraphs in your document stand out.

INDENT PARAGRAPHS

One bite of this decadent chocolate cake and you will think you've gone to heaven. Serve this traditional favorite at any occasion. The whole family will love it!

12:00 PM

Classic Chocolate Cak...

These symbols allow you to indent the left edge of a paragraph. Indent first line Indent all but the first line Indent all lines

72

This symbol ( ) allows you to indent the right edge of a paragraph.

⁄ Select the paragraph(s)

‹ Drag the indent

you want to indent. To select text, see page 20.

symbol to a new position on the ruler.

¤ Position the mouse

A dotted line shows the new indent position.

over the indent symbol you want to use.

TEAM LinG

4

Format Text

USING WORD

Tip

What types of indents can I create?

First Line Indent

Hanging Indent

Indent Both Sides

Indents only the first line of a paragraph. First line indents are often used to mark the beginning of paragraphs in letters and professional documents.

Indents all but the first line of a paragraph. Hanging indents are useful when you are creating a glossary or bibliography.

Indenting both the left and right sides of a paragraph is useful when you want to set text, such as a quotation, apart from the rest of the text in your document.

One bite of this decadent chocolate cake and you will think you've gone to heaven. Serve this traditional favorite at any occasion. The whole family will love it!

12:00 PM

Classic Chocolate Cak...

Word indents the paragraph(s) you selected.

To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

Classic Chocolate Cak...

USING THE TOOLBAR BUTTONS

⁄ Select the paragraph(s) you want to indent. To select text, see page 20. ¤ Click to indent the left edge of the paragraph(s).

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

12:00 PM

You can repeat step 2 to further indent the text. To decrease the indent, click .

TEAM73 LinG

CHANGE TAB SETTINGS

You can use tabs to line up information in your document. Word offers several types of tabs that you can choose from.

Helen B. Reed President ABC Toys Inc.

Left Tab David Jones Designs 1223 Lincoln Ave. New York, N.Y.

Right Tab

Anne Lewis 207 Ocean View Drive Miami, Florida

Word automatically places a tab every 0.5 inches across a page.

Center Tab

TABS

1156 93 42 67 835 02

Decimal Tab

You should use tabs instead of spaces to line up information. If you use spaces, the information may not be lined up when you print your document.

CHANGE TAB SETTINGS

Cake Recipe - Micros...

ADD A TAB

⁄ Select the text you want to use the new tab. To select text, see page 20.

74

12:00 PM

To add a tab to text you are about to type, click the location in your document where you want to type the text.

12:00 PM

Cake Recipe - Micros...

¤ Click this area until

Left tab

the type of tab you want to add appears.

Center tab Right tab Decimal tab

TEAM LinG

4

Format Text

USING WORD

Tip

How do I move a tab?

⁄ Select the text that uses the 1

tab you want to move. To select text, see page 20.

2

¤ Position the mouse

over the tab that you want to move and then drag the tab to a new location on the ruler. A dotted line shows the new location.

TEXT

The text that uses the tab moves to the new location.

Baking Instructions

12:00 PM

Cake Recipe - Micros...

Cake Recipe - Micros...

‹ Click the bottom half

USE A TAB

REMOVE A TAB

of the ruler where you want to add the tab.

⁄ Click to the left of the

⁄ Select the text that uses

first character in the line you want to move to the tab. Then press the Tab key.

the tab you want to remove. To select text, see page 20.

The new tab appears on the ruler.

The insertion point and the text that follows move to the tab you set.

¤ Position the mouse over the tab you want to remove and then drag the tab downward off the ruler.

12:00 PM

The tab disappears from the ruler. To move the text back to the left margin, click to the left of the first character. Then press the Backspace key.

TEAM75 LinG

CREATE A TABLE

You can create a table to neatly display information in your document.

A table consists of rows, columns and cells. Row Column Cell

CREATE A TABLE

12:00 PM

Student Affairs Offic...

⁄ Click the location in your document where you want a table to appear.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

¤ Click

‹ Drag the mouse

a table.

76

to create

Student Affairs Offic...

12:00 PM

The table appears in your document.

until you highlight the number of rows and columns you want the table to contain.

TEAM LinG

4

Format Text

USING WORD

Tip

Can I change the appearance of text in a table?

Tip

How do I delete a table I no longer need?

Yes. You can format text in a table as you would format any text in your document. For example, you can change the font, size, color and alignment of text in a table. To format text, see pages 62 to 70.

Janet Young

⁄ Click anywhere

H

in the table you want to delete.

Bob White Simon Evans

¤ Click Table.

Medicine

Student Affairs Offic...

ENTER TEXT IN A TABLE

⁄ Click the cell in the table where you want to enter text. Then type the text.

12:00 PM

¤ Repeat step 1 until you finish entering all the text you want the table to display. Note: When you enter text in a table, Word automatically increases the row height or column width to accommodate the text you type.

8:00 AM - 5:30 PM

‹ Click Delete. › Click Table to remove the table from your document.

725

12:00 PM

Student Affairs Offic...

DELETE TEXT FROM A TABLE

⁄ Drag the mouse

over the cells displaying the text you want to delete until the cells are highlighted.

¤ Press the

Delete key to remove the text from the cells.

TEAM77 LinG

INSERT A PAGE BREAK

You can insert a page break to start a new page at a specific location in your document. A page break indicates where one page ends and another begins.

2

mG

Inserting a page break is useful when you want a heading to appear at the top of a new page. INSERT A PAGE BREAK

12:00 PM

Company Newsletter ...

⁄ Click the location in your document where you want to start a new page.

78

¤ Click Insert. ‹ Click Break.

Company Newsletter ...

12:00 PM

The Break dialog box appears.

ˇ Click OK to confirm your selection.

› Click this option to

Word adds the page break to your document.

add a page break to your document ( changes to ).

TEAM LinG

5

Format Pages

USING WORD

Tip

Will Word ever insert a page break automatically?

Tip

When you fill a page with information, Word automatically starts a new page by inserting a page break to start a new page. The length of the pages in your document is determined by the paper size and margin settings you are using. For information on margins, see page 83.

How can I quickly insert a page break?

⁄ Click the location in your document where you want to insert a page break.

¤ Press and hold down the as you press the

Enter

Ctrl

key

key.

k Brea Page

DELETE A PAGE BREAK

Company Newsletter ...

⁄ Click

to display your document in the Normal view.

The Page Break line shows where one page ends and another begins. The line will not appear when you print your document.

12:00 PM

Note: You may need to scroll through your document to view the line.

12:00 PM

Company Newsletter ...

¤ Click the Page Break line.

‹ Press the

Delete key to remove the page break.

TEAM79 LinG

INSERT A SECTION BREAK

You can insert section breaks to divide your document into sections.

Motorcycle Tune-ups Chopper Dave's Bike Stores are having one day seminars on motorcycle tune-ups. Look below for the location nearest you!

Chopper Dave's Bike Stores

Dividing your document into sections allows you to apply formatting to only part of your document. For example, you may want to vertically center text or change the margins for only part of your document.

Jacksonville, FL Nashville, TN Greenwich, CT Salem, MA

INSERT A SECTION BREAK

12:00 PM

Good Gardening - Mic...

Good Gardening - Mic...

⁄ Click the location in

‹ Click Break.

› Click the type of section

your document where you want to start a new section.

The Break dialog box appears.

break you want to add ( changes to ).

¤ Click Insert.

Next page - Starts a new

12:00 PM

ˇ Click OK to confirm your selection. Word adds the section break to your document.

section on a new page. Continuous - Starts a new section on the current page.

80

TEAM LinG

5

Format Pages

USING WORD

Tip

Will the appearance of my document change when I delete a section break?

Sam's Sporting Goods

Sam's Sporting Goods

Sam's Sporting Goods offers equipment for everyone's sporting needs. From the recreational golfer to the competitive downhill skier, we have the product for you.

When you delete a section break, the text above the break assumes the appearance of the text below the break. For example, if you changed the margins for the text below a section break, the text above the break will also display the new margins when you delete the break.

Please visit us at one of our many locations listed below. Our warehouses are always stocked full of equipment at prices that can't be beat!

Section Break New York, NY Boston, MA Cincinnati, OH Las Vegas, NV Jacksonville, FL Hartford, CT Salem, MA Atlanta, GA San Diego, CA Los Angeles, CA Denver, CO

Sam's Sporting Goods offers equipment for everyone's sporting needs. From the recreational golfer to the competitive downhill skier, we have the product for you. Please visit us at one of our many locations listed below. Our warehouses are always stocked full of equipment at prices that can't be beat! New York, NY Boston, MA Cincinnati, OH Las Vegas, NV Jacksonville, FL Hartford, CT Salem, MA Atlanta, GA San Diego, CA Los Angeles, CA Denver, CO

DELETE A SECTION BREAK

Good Gardening - Mic...

⁄ Click

to display your document in the Normal view.

12:00 PM

The Section Break line shows where one section ends and another begins. The line will not appear when you print your document.

Note: You may need to scroll through your document to view the line.

12:00 PM

Good Gardening - Mic...

¤ Click the Section Break line.

‹ Press the

Delete key to remove the section break.

TEAM81 LinG

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 1

2

3

You can vertically center the text on each page in your document. Vertically centering text is useful when creating title pages and short memos.

cm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

CENTER TEXT ON A PAGE

GLOBAL REPORT

Helping the Third World Countries

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

After vertically centering text, you can use the Print Preview feature to see how the centered text will appear on a printed page. For information on the Print Preview feature, see page 30.

cm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

By: Cathy Best, MBA University of Washington

When you vertically center text on a page, Word centers the text between the top and bottom margins of the page. For information on margins, see page 83.

CENTER TEXT ON A PAGE

Center

Company Newsletter...

⁄ Click anywhere in the document or section you want to vertically center.

Note: To vertically center only some of the text in a document, you must divide the document into sections. For more information, see page 80.

82

12:00 PM

12:00 PM

Company Newsletter...

¤ Click File. ‹ Click Page Setup.

› Click the Layout tab. ˇ Click this area to

The Page Setup dialog box appears.

display the vertical alignment options.

Á Click Center to vertically center the text on the page.

‡ Click OK to confirm the change. To remove the centering, repeat steps 1 to 7, except select Top in step 6.

TEAM LinG

5

CHANGE MARGINS

Format Pages

USING WORD

You can change the margins in your document to suit your needs. A margin is the amount of space between the text in your document and the edge of your paper. Word automatically sets the top and bottom margins to 1 inch and the left and right margins to 1.25 inches.

Changing the margins allows you to fit more or less information on a page and can help you accommodate letterhead and other specialty paper.

CHANGE MARGINS

Good Gardening - Mic...

⁄ Click anywhere in the document or section where you want to change the margins.

Note: To change the margins for part of a document, you must divide the document into sections. For more information, see page 80.

12:00 PM

¤ Click File. ‹ Click Page Setup. The Page Setup dialog box appears.

Good Gardening - Mic...

› Click the Margins tab. This area displays the current margins for the document or section.

ˇ Double-click the margin

12:00 PM

Repeat step 5 for each margin you want to change.

Á Click OK to confirm the change.

size you want to change and then type a new size.

TEAM83 LinG

ADD PAGE NUMBERS

You can have Word number the pages in your document. Numbering pages can help make a long document easier to organize when printed.

G L O B A L R E P O R T G L O B A L R E P O R G L O Helping the ThirdT B A L G L R ECountries World P O R O B He lpi ng the but the farmers andTh locals ird are T Seventy-fiveApercentL ofWo often guilty as well. 75% of the the E Co world's people live in the energy supplied in thetri UDCs is un HelRprld P es Oburning. in Third World. These produced by wood butg the farmer RareTo T S th eventy-five percen s and e locals T nations supply t of the get the developed this wood they must tear h often guilty as well. 75% ird World's people W

orld Cou Help ntries ing World the Third Countr ies

live in theof raw nations with a multitude down and eventuallyof the energytrees, Third World. These supplied in the UDC' materials and natural whole disappear. The s is eves nty produforests ced by wood burnin nation -fivethe supply but then perbuy develo centmany resources, the farm land no longer has g. To World's and also ofped get this the nation wooders people and sexports, they with a multit locatear ofte gui live in ude ls are of anything (40% ofthe holding U.S. itmust together. of raw Thour ird als ltyand downn trees, as wel Woand materi rld.natura l.erosion eventu 75% Th ene allyof l the exports are boughteseby Thisrgy results in soil and nat supplie the evesnty ion whole sup-fi forests resour d in the ces, ply disapp and ve pro ear.abilities. the also UD The pe W buy duc dev Third World). loss Clearly many of water the retaining lives rce orl C's is nat ed by wo ion bu the ntelop d's land ed sexport of the then wit peop of our od bur h ale longer farno gettthis mu s,in hasning. To (40% Th me livthe ltitu of ofird theW people developed U.S. ma e rs de wo in teri oft od thegan anythi theof raw en gu ngilty orl exportals and holdin locstals er. yitdmu s are d. nat bough dow togeth These na ura t by are tear n tree as the tiourc and underdeveloped Development l worlds reso in the Western we en ns s, This ll. erg and supand results Third es, 75% eveerosion in soil ply).the World sup ntu also wh Clearl na ofand pliindustrialize ally oleyfore buy y ma the are theny unavoidably ed oftio sense interrelated. is tosts It pro your de lives our ns in vel loss wi exp du the of disa op water of th orts the people ced by retaini ed ppeng UD a ,mu land the (40ltit ar. in ma abilitie the C'e sthe Th % develo s. wo isorts forsare expter this reason that isped isodessential ofe it for n noIt is geteconomy. ial ud U.S this wo . lon andbou and of raw gerbuhas underd rning. na anyThird evelop res od theto turthe edrich worlds ouird To Th important forght nations do develop alby their the g World rceWo hol wnthin Develo s, anrld) dinin mu are gyitthe tre pment unavo d als . Cle togsteth This teaer. ofofou interre o bu arly r rn resues, lated. to studyidably the problems production in other wh techniques, r exp the ltsan eventuWeste y ma sense ole indsoil peo ort isest isthe to plereason for nylivesIt loss indust this allyyour s, in erosion rialize exp (40the that offor devU. %help ortcountries it and and is to lan wat and especially them inap agriculture, in elop of s areerd und ersItdis d the econo pear. reta impor boeve S. ed inin is essenti tant nmy. ug Thlitie lop geffectively forthem. Th no abi the al ht ed for e rich irduna lon the are by wo nation overcome order to compete an s. on the rlds s ything World ger has orld). voi to W dab study to develop their lyproble theCl holdingMarkets. DeThird ofisthe inte velo ear msated ininother One major problem thepm World lyrrel for This kind of pe ent techni the isprodu this opies .most tog res in itthe It Th lereas countr lives ultction ethster in on We animp and ques, er. nrequires thehelp tha se development, d un is tos in soi itthem detvel lossen underdeveloped countries however, is to de orta l ero s especia rde op ntme ustr waterllyind forthem. ed vel ialisio agricu nyou the ecoof aretounoverco ze op lture, anrin nom rich retinain d but wosince nats ion ised that noty.toonly thes costly avo(UDC), machinery, stud Itcompe ing rld is esse yida order the One ab blypro ntia major is for Third te blem effecti int proble l ilit fories vely errela couthi inoth . on smted World to fossil the most inexploitation Colonial period, expensive fuels ofvelthe for ntrsies reaand er Depro op World dev underd . son me Marke It elop hel imove evelop nt in theForts.countries thaed This pt land porta duction thekind countr the of ir already it their arable rapidlysense develo rco toies ntme ismhas techniq W forthe is tooperation. pment (UDC uesest , howev to On ),the ind ernrequires ism. that , er, study richCompanies since ecoesp billions in debt eColon natiothe is obviously inust noecia ma theincreased. liz agrria not.lly jorpro my e yoe,this only icu ns from the costly ltur coun ialpro It is ess urin ble blem machi period nery, mscountries , in exploi und trierd tonot Thord but comeconomically mosttation developed in es an en possible. ird er oth pet eve expens W darable l ctiv e tia lop er (DC)ofare ive their for the effe help fossil ed the overc fuels cou land Woorl for to de ely on has ntr prothe (UD omC), rlddMa formabusing the land, ducti e the vel toiesrapidly rke operat op isblamed that Comp ts.countr m. on tecion. increa OnCo For Thithe sed. develop since the iriesdalready s kin e ma hniqu anies from the especi me of lon jor nt, ial es, allbillion pro per y in agr s inhow develo eve iodmcountr ble unde ped r, is obviou , exp this rde ordnot ies loit the in mo icudebt uires sly (DC) ir vel costly er toonl lture, in req arab n ofare opleed statio notymp ma econo blame chiyner (UDC micall codun dlan for has possible. abusin ensco ete eff inc), rapgidly ive foss tries the land,the exp reas Worl is ed. ective y, but thatCo il fue d Mark Colon sinmp ce ani ets. Thls forly on devial thees from the develope on. For elop peed oprati riod, cou is ies d ment, couexp theirbla ntrloi billion iestat(DC) however ntrkin of ady alre arame in deb ble for ion ofare not only cosstl t this, isreq dabu increased d lan uir hassing not obv y es eco iously rapidl they land, expensiv nomma icalch lyine e posry, develop . Companies siblbu e.t operatio fossil fuels for fro ed n. For blamed countries (D m the countri billions for abusi C) are es alread in ng the not eco debt this is y land, obviousl nomical y ly possi ble.

S S

To view the page numbers on your screen, your document must be displayed in the Print Layout view. For information on changing the view of a document, see page 24.

1 2

3 4

ADD PAGE NUMBERS

Top of page (Header)

The Olympic Games - ...

⁄ Click Insert. ¤ Click Page Numbers.

84

12:00 PM

The Page Numbers dialog box appears.

12:00 PM

The Olympic Games - ...

‹ Click this area to

› Click the position

select a position for the page numbers.

where you want the page numbers to appear.

TEAM LinG

5

Format Pages

USING WORD

Tip

How do I remove page numbers from my document?

Deleting a page number from your document’s header or footer will remove all the page numbers from your document.

1

⁄ Double-click a page number to display the Header or Footer area.

¤ Double-click the page number to select the number.

‹ Press the

Delete key to delete the page number.

Note: To close the Header or Footer area, click Close on the Header and Footer toolbar.

Right Center

The Olympic Games - ...

ˇ Click this area to select an alignment for the page numbers.

Á Click the alignment you want to use.

12:00 PM

This area displays a preview of the position and alignment you selected for the page numbers.

The Olympic Games - ...

‡ If you want to hide the page number on the first page of your document, click this option ( changes to ).

Note: This option is useful if the first page in your document is a title page.

12:00 PM

° Click OK to add the page numbers to your document. If you later make changes that affect the pages in your document, such as adding or removing text, Word will automatically adjust the page numbers for you.

TEAM85 LinG

F. Hill M. Cole E. Baker M. Wilson H. Reed D. Jones L. Bell N. King D. Morris K. Turner

M. Wilson S. Grant

COMPACT COMPACT

k oo kb or W TEAM LinG

USING EXCEL

Using Excel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Getting Started Pages 88-101

Save and Open a Workbook Pages 102-109

Edit a Worksheet Pages 110-119

Using Formulas and Functions Pages 120-133

Format a Worksheet Pages 134-145

Print a Worksheet Pages 146-153

Working With Charts Pages 154-161

$1200 $1100 $1000 $900 $800 $700 $600 $500 $400 $300 $200 $100 84 85

86

87

88

89

90

91

92 93

94 95 96 97

TEAM LinG

INTRODUCTION TO EXCEL

Excel is a spreadsheet program you can use to organize, analyze and attractively present data, such as a budget or sales report. ENT INCOME STATEM

REVENUE

Payroll Rent Supplies ES TOTAL EXPENS

1,180 $

$

INCOME

03 SALES 20

CE Total PRODUMar ch y January Februar 33,870 25000 00ges$ 13,670 $ Oran $ 8,700 $ 11,5 37000 les App 18000 50 13,9 $ 0 its 5,25 $ Grap0efru 0 00 $ 3,850 $ 4,85 ons 1,750 $ 5,25270 Lem0 $ 1,75 15000 $ 0 $ 1,75 $ 5,930 es 0 Lim 2,03 $ 0 $ 1,920 $ 1,98 30 25,1 $ 0 0 $ 9,03 $ 7,520 $ 8,58

2,920 $ 4,640 Limes

$ 8,740 Oranges

Lemons

Each Excel file, called a workbook, contains several worksheets that you can use to store your data and charts.

Apples s Grapefruit

Editing and Formatting

Using Formulas and Functions

Creating Charts

Excel allows you to efficiently enter, edit and format data in a worksheet. You can quickly enter a series of numbers, insert new rows or change the width of columns. You can also emphasize data by changing the font, color and style of data.

Formulas and functions allow you to perform calculations and analyze data in a worksheet. Common calculations include finding the sum, average or total number of values in a list.

Excel helps you create colorful charts to visually display worksheet data. If you change the data in your worksheet, Excel will automatically update the chart to display the changes. You can also move and resize a chart to suit your needs.

INCOME STA

TEMENT

January

REVENUE Payroll Rent

$8,700 $11 ,500 $13,670 $3,850 $1,750

Supplies $1,920 TOTAL EXP ENSES INCOME

88

February Mar ch

$1200 $1100 $1000 $900 $800 $700 $600

$4,850 $1,750

$5,250 $1,750

$400

$1,980

$2,030

$200

$500

$300

$100 84 85

86

87

88

89

90

91

92 93

94 95 96 97

TEAM LinG

1

PARTS OF THE EXCEL WINDOW

Getting Started

USING EXCEL

The Excel window displays many items you can use to work with your data.

Title Bar

Menu Bar

Standard Toolbar

Formatting Toolbar

Shows the name of the displayed workbook.

Provides access to lists of commands available in Excel and displays an area where you can type a question to get help information.

Contains buttons you can use to select common commands, such as Save and Print.

Contains buttons you can use to select common formatting commands, such as Bold and Underline.

Formula Bar

Displays the cell reference and the contents of the active cell. A cell reference identifies the location of each cell in a worksheet and consists of a column letter followed by a row number, such as A1. Active Cell

Displays a thick border. You enter data into the active cell. Cell

The area where a row and column intersect.

Column

A vertical line of cells. A letter identifies each column.

Row

A horizontal line of cells. A number identifies each row.

Worksheet Tabs

Scroll Bars

Task Pane

Each Excel file, called a workbook, is divided into several worksheets. Excel displays a tab for each worksheet.

Allow you to browse through a worksheet.

Contains options you can select to perform common tasks, such as creating a new workbook.

TEAM89 LinG

CHANGE THE ACTIVE CELL

You can use the mouse or keyboard to make any cell in your worksheet the active cell. You enter data into the active cell.

You can only make one cell in your worksheet active at a time. CHANGE THE ACTIVE CELL

Microsoft Office Excel...

The active cell displays a thick border.

90

12:00 PM

The cell reference for the active cell appears in this area. A cell reference identifies the location of each cell in a worksheet and consists of a column letter followed by a row number (example: A1).

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Click the cell you want to make the active cell.

12:00 PM

The cell reference for the new active cell appears in this area.

Note: You can also press the , , or key to change the active cell.

TEAM LinG

1

SCROLL THROUGH A WORKSHEET

Getting Started

USING EXCEL

You can scroll through your worksheet to view other areas of the worksheet. This is useful when your worksheet contains a lot of data and your computer screen cannot display all the data at once.

You can use a scroll bar to scroll up and down or left and right. The location of the scroll box on the scroll bar indicates which area of the worksheet you are viewing.

COMPACT COMPACT

SCROLL THROUGH A WORKSHEET

Microsoft Office Excel...

SCROLL UP OR DOWN

⁄ To scroll up or down one row, click

or

.

12:00 PM

To quickly scroll to any row in your worksheet, position the mouse over the scroll box and then drag the scroll box along the scroll bar until the row you want to view appears.

Microsoft Office Excel...

SCROLL LEFT OR RIGHT

⁄ To scroll left or right one column, click

or

.

12:00 PM

To quickly scroll to any column in your worksheet, position the mouse over the scroll box and then drag the scroll box along the scroll bar until the column you want to view appears.

TEAM91 LinG

ENTER DATA

You can enter data, such as text, numbers and dates, into your worksheet quickly and easily.

SALES REPORT IN UNITS

January February March April May

2000 10500 9400 6450 7890 8920

2001 8850 9750 8450 9000 7359

2002 9000 9500 8950 9400 8700

2003 10400 9850 9900 10850 11500

an De e m Na e C st m La t Na uct s d Fir Pro old it S Un

2

TA DA

Excel automatically left aligns text and right aligns numbers and dates you enter in cells.

ENTER DATA

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Click the cell where you want to enter data. Then type the data. The data you type appears in the active cell and in the formula bar.

92

12:00 PM

If you make a typing mistake while entering data, press the Backspace key to remove the incorrect data. Then type the correct data.

Microsoft Office Excel...

12:00 PM

Enter key to enter the data and move down one cell.

‹ Repeat steps 1 and 2

Note: To enter the data and move one cell in any direction, press the , , or key.

Note: In this book, the size of data was changed to 12 points to make the data easier to read. To change the size of data, see page 137.

¤ Press the

until you finish entering all your data.

TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

USING EXCEL

How can I quickly enter numbers?

Tip

Tip

You can use the number keys on the right side of your keyboard to quickly enter numbers into your worksheet. To be able to use these number keys, NUM must be displayed at the bottom of your screen. Num You can press the Lock key to display NUM on your screen.

Why did Excel change the appearance of a date I entered?

When you enter a date into your worksheet, Excel may change the format of the date to one of the following formats: 3/14/2003, 14-Mar or 14-Mar-03. To change the format of dates, see page 138.

Date:

Num Lock

March 14, 2003

NUM / 7

Home

2

1

End

0

AD3

9

Pg Up

5

4

Ins

3/14/2003

–

*

8

Formats:

+

6

14-Mar 14-Mar-03

3

PgDn

.

Enter

Del

PUSH

Result: 3

3/14/200

ales Target

Microsoft Office Excel...

If the text is too long to fit in a cell, the text will spill into the neighboring cell. If the neighboring cell contains data, Excel will display as much of the text as the column width will allow.

12:00 PM

If a number is too large to fit in a cell, Excel will display the number in scientific notation or as number signs (#).

Note: To change the width of a column to display text or a number, see page 134.

Microsoft Office Excel...

AUTOCOMPLETE

If the first few letters you type match the text in another cell in the same column, Excel will complete the text for you.

12:00 PM

To enter different text, continue typing.

⁄ To enter the text Excel provides, press the Enter key. TEAM93 LinG

SELECT CELLS INCOME STATEMENT

Before performing many tasks in Excel, you must select the cells you want to work with. Selected cells appear highlighted on your screen. This makes cells you select stand out from the rest of the cells in your worksheet.

REVENUE

January February March 120,000 135,000 140,000

Payroll 15,000 Rent 7,500 Supplies 4,500 TOTAL EXPENSES

15,000 7,500 6,200

15,000 7,500 7,640

INCOME

You must select the cells containing data you want to move or copy to another location in your worksheet or to change to a different font or size. To move or copy data, see page 112. To change the font or size of data, see pages 136 and 137.

SELECT CELLS

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

SELECT A CELL

⁄ Click the cell you want to select.

The cell becomes the active cell and displays a thick border.

Microsoft Office Excel...

SELECT A GROUP OF CELLS

⁄ Position the mouse over the first cell you want to select.

¤ Drag the mouse until you highlight all the cells you want to select.

94

12:00 PM

To select multiple groups of cells, press and hold down the Ctrl key as you repeat steps 1 and 2 for each group of cells you want to select. To deselect cells, click any cell.

TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

USING EXCEL

How do I select all the cells in my worksheet?

Tip

Tip

INCOME STATEMENT

REVENUE Payroll Rent

January February March 120,000 135,000 1367

15,000 7,500

15,000

How do I select data in a cell?

February $ 13 500 00

525 175

Febr uary $ 13 500 00

To select all the cells in your worksheet, click the box ( ) at the top left corner of your worksheet, where the row numbers and column letters meet.

⁄ To select data in a cell, double-click the cell that contains the data.

¤ Drag the mouse over the data in the cell until you highlight all the data you want to select.

E

5

Microsoft Office Excel...

SELECT A ROW

⁄ Click the number of the row you want to select.

12:00 PM

To select multiple rows, position the mouse over the number of the first row you want to select. Then drag the mouse until you highlight all the rows you want to select.

Microsoft Office Excel...

SELECT A COLUMN

⁄ Click the letter of the column you want to select.

12:00 PM

To select multiple columns, position the mouse over the letter of the first column you want to select. Then drag the mouse until you highlight all the columns you want to select.

TEAM95 LinG

COMPLETE A SERIES

Excel can save you time by completing a text or number series for you. A series is a sequence of data that changes, such as a range of consecutive numbers.

0

120,00

0

135,00

25,000

25,000

7,500 5,000

You can complete a series across a row or down a column in a worksheet. Excel completes a text series based on the text you enter in one cell. Excel completes a number series based on the numbers you enter in two cells.

0

140,00

25,000

7,500 6,000

7,500 7,500

COMPLETE A TEXT SERIES

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Enter the text you

‹ Position the mouse

want to start the series.

over the bottom right corner of the cell ( changes to ).

¤ Click the cell containing the text you entered.

› Drag the mouse over the cells you want to include in the series.

96

Microsoft Office Excel...

The cells display the text series.

12:00 PM

To deselect cells, click any cell.

Note: If Excel cannot determine the text series you want to complete, it will copy the text in the first cell to all the cells you select.

TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

USING EXCEL

Tip

Why does the Auto Fill Options button ( ) appear when I complete a series?

Tip

You can use the Auto Fill Options button ( ) to change the way Excel completes a series. For example, you can specify that Excel should not use the formatting from the original cell. Click the Auto Fill Options button to display a list of options and then select the option you want to use. The Auto Fill Options button is available only until you perform another task.

Can I complete a series that will repeat data in several cells?

Yes. Perform steps 1 to 4 on page 97, except enter the same text or data into the first two cells in step 1. Excel will repeat the information in all the cells you select.

+

9:00 A.M.

26 Jan...

9:00 A.M.

03 Febru

9:00 A.M.

14 Feb...

COMPLETE A NUMBER SERIES

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Enter the first two

‹ Position the mouse

numbers you want to start the series.

over the bottom right corner of the selected cells ( changes to ).

¤ Select the cells containing the numbers you entered. To select cells, see page 94.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

The cells display the number series.

To deselect cells, click any cell.

› Drag the mouse

over the cells you want to include in the series.

TEAM97 LinG

SWITCH BETWEEN WORKSHEETS Sheet1 Sheet2

A workbook contains several worksheets. You can easily switch between the worksheets in your workbook to view and compare all the data.

Sheet3

Worksheets can help you organize information in your workbook. For example, you can store information for each division of a company on a separate worksheet. SWITCH BETWEEN WORKSHEETS

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

This area displays a tab for each worksheet in your workbook. The displayed worksheet has a white tab.

98

⁄ Click the tab for the worksheet you want to display. The worksheet you selected appears. The contents of the other worksheets in your workbook are hidden behind the displayed worksheet.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

BROWSE THROUGH WORKSHEET TABS

If you have many worksheets in your workbook, you may not be able to see all the worksheet tabs.

Note: To insert additional worksheets, see page 100.

⁄ Click one of the following buttons to browse through the worksheet tabs. Display first tab Display previous tab Display next tab Display last tab TEAM LinG

1

RENAME A WORKSHEET

Getting Started

USING EXCEL

You can rename a worksheet in your workbook to better describe the contents of the worksheet.

Sheet2

Each worksheet in a workbook must have a unique name. Short worksheet names are generally better than long names since short names allow you to display more worksheet tabs on your screen at once. RENAME A WORKSHEET

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Double-click the tab for the worksheet you want to rename.

12:00 PM

The name of the worksheet is highlighted.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

¤ Type a new name for the worksheet and then press the Enter key.

Note: A worksheet name can contain up to 31 characters, including spaces.

TEAM99 LinG

INSERT A WORKSHEET

You can insert a new worksheet anywhere in your workbook to include additional information.

1995

Each workbook you create automatically contains three worksheets. You can insert as many new worksheets as you need. INSERT A WORKSHEET

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Click the tab for the worksheet you want to appear after the new worksheet.

100

¤ Click Insert. ‹ Click Worksheet.

Microsoft Office Excel...

The new worksheet appears.

12:00 PM

Excel displays a tab for the new worksheet.

TEAM LinG

1

DELETE A WORKSHEET

Getting Started

USING EXCEL

You can permanently remove a worksheet you no longer need from your workbook.

You cannot restore a worksheet once it has been deleted from your workbook. DELETE A WORKSHEET

Microsoft Office Excel...

12:00 PM

⁄ Click the tab for the

‹ Click Delete Sheet.

worksheet you want to delete.

Note: If Delete Sheet does not appear on the menu, position the mouse over the bottom of the menu to display the menu option.

¤ Click Edit.

Microsoft Office Excel...

A warning dialog box may appear, stating that Excel will permanently delete the data in the worksheet.

12:00 PM

› Click Delete to permanently delete the worksheet.

TEAM101 LinG

SAVE A WORKBOOK msn. The Microsoft Network

AD3

OK

O BO

K

K

O BO

OK BO RK

RK

WO

WO

OK BO RK

OK BO RK

WO

WO

OK

1

BO

RK

RK

BO RK

WO

WO

WO

You can save your workbook to store it for future use. Saving a workbook allows you to later review and make changes to the workbook.

6

2

3

7

4

5

POWER

RESET

AD3

You should regularly save changes you make to a workbook to avoid losing your work. SAVE A WORKBOOK

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Click

to save your workbook.

The Save As dialog box appears.

¤ Type a name for the workbook.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

Note: If you previously saved your workbook, the Save As dialog box will not appear since you have already named the workbook.

This area shows the location where Excel will store your workbook. You can click this area to change the location.

102

12:00 PM

This area allows you to access commonly used locations. You can click a location to save your workbook in the location.

‹ Click Save to save your workbook. TEAM LinG

2

CREATE A NEW WORKBOOK

Save and Open a Workbook

USING EXCEL

You can easily create a new workbook to store new data, such as a budget or sales report.

When you create a new workbook, Excel displays a blank worksheet on your screen. You do not have to close the workbook currently displayed on your screen before creating a new workbook. CREATE A NEW WORKBOOK

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Click

to create a new workbook.

12:00 PM

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

Music Collection

A new workbook appears. The previous workbook is now hidden behind the new workbook. Excel gives the new workbook a temporary name, such as Book2, until you save the workbook. To save a workbook, see page 102.

Book2

12:00 PM

A button for the new workbook appears on the taskbar.

TEAM103 LinG

OPEN A WORKBOOK I

msn. The Microsoft Network

You can open a saved workbook to view the workbook on your screen. Opening a workbook allows you to review and make changes to the workbook.

AD3 PU

You can specify where the workbook you want to open is located. After you open a workbook, Excel displays the name of the workbook at the top of your screen.

POWER

RESET

AD3

When you finish working with your workbook, you can close the workbook to remove it from your screen. OPEN A WORKBOOK

3rd Quarter Expenses

12:00 PM

Sales Report

⁄ Click

to open

a workbook.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

104

The Open dialog box appears.

Sales Report

12:00 PM

This area shows the location of the displayed workbooks. You can click this area to change the location.

¤ Click the name of

This area allows you to access workbooks in commonly used locations. You can click a location to display the workbooks stored in the location.

open the workbook.

the workbook you want to open.

‹ Click Open to

TEAM LinG

2

Save and Open a Workbook

USING EXCEL

Tip

How can I quickly open a workbook I recently worked with?

Excel remembers the names of the last four workbooks you worked with. You can use the Getting Started task pane or the File menu to quickly open one of these workbooks.

Note: The Getting Started task pane appears each time you start Excel. To display the Getting Started task pane, see page 8.

Use the Task Pane

Use the File Menu

⁄ Click the name of the

⁄ Click File. ¤ Click the name of the workbook

workbook you want to open.

Note: If the name of the workbook is not displayed, position the mouse over the bottom of the task pane to display the name.

The workbook opens and appears on your screen. You can now review and make changes to the workbook. This area displays the name of the open workbook.

Note: If the name of the workbook you want is not displayed, position the mouse over the bottom of the menu to display the name.

3rd Quarter Expenses

3rd Quarter Expenses

Sales Report

you want to open.

3rd Quarter Expenses

12:00 PM

If you already had a workbook open, the new workbook appears in a new Microsoft Office Excel window. You can click the buttons on the taskbar to switch between the open workbooks.

Sales Report

CLOSE A WORKBOOK

Before closing a workbook, you should save any changes you made to the workbook. To save changes to a workbook, see page 102.

12:00 PM

3rd Quarter Expenses

⁄ When you finish using workbook, click to close the workbook. The workbook disappears from your screen.

TEAM105 LinG

SWITCH BETWEEN WORKBOOKS

2

5

You can have several workbooks open at once. Excel allows you to easily switch from one open workbook to another.

SWITCH BETWEEN WORKBOOKS

Music Collection

⁄ Click Window to display a list of all the workbooks you have open.

106

My Monthly Budget

¤ Click the name of the workbook you want to switch to.

12:00 PM

Music Collection

The workbook appears. This area shows the name of the displayed workbook.

My Monthly Budget

12:00 PM

The taskbar displays a button for each open workbook. You can also click the buttons on the taskbar to switch between the open workbooks.

TEAM LinG

2

COMPARE WORKBOOKS

Save and Open a Workbook

USING EXCEL

You can display two workbooks on your screen at once. Excel displays one workbook above the other so you can easily compare data in corresponding rows. Comparing workbooks is useful if you want to compare an edited workbook to the original version of the workbook.

Sportz Inc. Sportz Inc.

First Quarter Sales Report

First Quarter Sales Report

January February March Jim

51,000

24,000

31,400

Mary

36,700

36,700

37,560

Jim

36,000

24,000

60,400

Arthur

30,000

78,000

38,500

Mary

36,300

56,700

17,560

Nancy

45,800

37,800

21,600

Arthur

36,000

78,000

37,500

Cathy

60,500

42,500

78,300

Nancy

37,800

69,800

21,600

Terry

47,800

15,800

95,200

Cathy

98,500

12,500

78,300

Scott

55,200

22,200

12,300

Terry

34,800

15,800

95,200

Andrew

39,000

34,000

37,000

Scott

80,200

22,200

12,300

Krista

41,500

90,500

27,500

Andrew

15,000

25,000

37,000

Randy

58,000

58,000

18,200

Krista

42,500

90,500

27,500

Michael

68,540

24,540

37,500

Randy

58,000

58,000

18,200

Jason

89,000

28,000

27,000

Michael

68,540

24,540

37,500

Robert

32,050

25,050

27,000

Jason

89,000

28,000

27,000

Robert

32,050

25,050

27,000

January February March

When you scroll through one workbook, Excel automatically scrolls through the other workbook for you, so you can compare the contents of the two workbooks.

COMPARE WORKBOOKS

Travel Budget

⁄ Open the two workbooks you want to compare.

Note: To open a workbook, see page 104.

Travel Budget Revised

12:00 PM

¤ Click Window in the current workbook. ‹ Click Compare Side by Side with to compare the current workbook with the other open workbook.

Travel Budget

Travel Budget Revised

12:00 PM

Excel displays the workbooks on your screen. One workbook appears above the other workbook.

› To scroll through the

The Compare Side by Side toolbar also appears.

ˇ When you finish comparing

workbooks, drag the scroll box up or down in one workbook. Excel automatically scrolls the other workbook for you. the workbooks on your screen, click Close Side by Side. TEAM107 LinG

E-MAIL A WORKSHEET

You can e-mail the worksheet displayed on your screen to exchange data with a friend, family member or colleague.

When you e-mail a worksheet, the worksheet appears in the body of the e-mail message.

Adam s,Jack Baker , Erin Bell, Lisa Brow n, Julie Cater , Alan Cole, Matt Cook, Jason Davis , Car l Evans ,S Fraser imon , Pau l

AD3

HSUP

Before you can e-mail a worksheet, Microsoft Office Outlook 2003 must be set up on your computer. E-MAIL A WORKSHEET

2001

2001

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Click

to e-mail the current worksheet.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

If the workbook contains data on more than one worksheet, a dialog box appears, asking if you want to send the entire workbook or just the current worksheet.

¤ Click this option to send the current worksheet.

108

‹ Click OK.

2002

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

An area appears for you to address the message.

› Click this area and type the e-mail address of the person you want to receive the message.

ˇ To send a copy of the message to a person who is not directly involved but would be interested in the message, click this area and type the e-mail address.

Note: To enter more than one e-mail address in step 4 or 5, separate each e-mail address with a semicolon (;). LinG TEAM

2

Save and Open a Workbook

USING EXCEL

Tip

Why would I include an introduction for a worksheet I am e-mailing?

Tip

How do I e-mail an entire workbook?

To e-mail an entire workbook, perform steps 1 to 6 below, selecting Send the entire workbook as an attachment in step 2. Then click Send to send the message. When you e-mail an entire workbook, the workbook is sent as an attached file.

Including an introduction allows you to provide the recipient of the message with additional information about the worksheet. For example, the recipient may require instructions or an explanation of the content of the worksheet.

[email protected]

Budgets.xls (12 KB)

2001

2001

2001

2002

Microsoft Office Excel...

Á Click this area and type a subject for the message.

12:00 PM

Note: If a subject already exists, you can drag the mouse over the existing subject and then type a new subject.

2002

2002

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

‡ To include an introduction for the worksheet you are e-mailing, click this area and type the introduction.

° Click Send this Sheet to send the

message.

TEAM109 LinG

EDIT OR DELETE DATA

ER

A S

ER

You can edit data in your worksheet to correct a mistake or update data. You can also remove data you no longer need.

EDIT DATA

2001

2001

2002

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Double-click the cell containing the data you want to edit. A flashing insertion point appears in the cell.

110

¤ Press the

or key to move the insertion point to where you want to remove or add characters.

2002

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

‹ To remove the character to the left of the insertion point, press the Backspace key. To remove the character to the right of the insertion point, press the Delete key.

› To add data where the insertion point flashes on your screen, type the data. ˇ When you finish making changes to the data, press the Enter key.

TEAM LinG

3

Edit a Worksheet

USING EXCEL

Tip

Can Excel automatically correct my typing mistakes?

Tip

Yes. Excel automatically corrects common spelling errors as you type. Here are a few examples.

adn

and

alot

a lot

comittee

don't

nwe

new

recieve seperate teh

No. When you delete the data in a cell, Excel will not remove the formatting you applied to the cell, such as a new font or color. Any new data you enter into the cell will display the same formatting as the data you deleted.

A B $95 $10 $200 $15 A B $45 $77 1 $95 $16 $17 $94 $200 $15 2 $45 $77 3 $17 $94 4

committee

don;t occurence

When I delete the data in a cell, will Excel remove the formatting from the cell?

occurrence receive separate the

DELETE DATA

2001

2002

Microsoft Office Excel...

REPLACE ALL DATA IN A CELL

⁄ Click the cell containing the data you want to replace with new data.

2001

12:00 PM

¤ Type the new data and then press the Enter key.

2002

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Select the cells containing the data you want to delete. To select cells, see page 94.

¤ Press the

Delete

12:00 PM

The data in the cells you selected disappears. To deselect cells, click any cell.

key.

TEAM111 LinG

MOVE OR COPY DATA

You can move or copy data to a new location in your worksheet.

Moving data allows you to reorganize data in your worksheet. When you move data, the data disappears from its original location. Copying data allows you to repeat data in your worksheet without having to retype the data. When you copy data, the data appears in both the original and new locations. MOVE OR COPY DATA

2002

2002

2003

2003

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

USING DRAG AND DROP

¤ Position the mouse

⁄ Select the cells

over a border of the selected cells ( changes to ).

containing the data you want to move. To select cells, see page 94.

112

‹ To move the data, drag the mouse to where you want to place the data. Note: A gray box indicates where the data will appear.

Microsoft Office Excel...

The data moves to the new location.

12:00 PM

To copy data, perform steps 1 to 3, except press and hold down the Ctrl key as you perform step 3.

TEAM LinG

3

Edit a Worksheet

USING EXCEL

Tip

How can I use the Clipboard task pane to move or copy data?

Tip

The Clipboard task pane displays the last 24 items you have selected to move or copy using the toolbar buttons. To display the Clipboard task pane, see page 8. To place a clipboard item into your worksheet, click the cell where you want to place the item and then click the item in the task pane. Records

Tapes

2002

2002

2003

2003

USING THE TOOLBAR BUTTONS

⁄ Select the cells containing the data you want to move or copy. To select cells, see page 94.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

¤ Click one of the

‹ Click the cell where

following buttons.

you want to place the data. This cell will become the top left cell of the new location.

Move data Copy data

Note: If the button you want is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

)

You can use the Paste Options button ( ) to change the way Excel copies data when you use the Copy button ( ). For example, you can specify that you want to copy only the formatting of the original cells to the new location. Click the Paste Options button to display a list of options and then select the option you want to use. The Paste Options button is available only until you perform another task.

CDs

Microsoft Office Excel...

Why does the Paste Options button ( appear when I copy data?

12:00 PM

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button. The data appears in the new location.

› Click

to place the data in the new location.

TEAM113 LinG

INSERT A ROW OR COLUMN EMPLOYEE HO

URS

You can add a row or column to your worksheet to insert additional data.

Week 1

Week 2

Week 3

45

32

37

35

33

37

Dave Bibby

20

38

35

Jeff Evans

30

35

36

Sue Thomas

35

36

39

Julie Simak

37

38

41

Kevin Cooper

38

42

42

Deb Shuter Jen Wright

When you add a row or column, Excel automatically adjusts the row numbers and column letters in your worksheet for you. INSERT A ROW

4

4

#N/A

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

Excel will insert a row above the row you select.

⁄ To select a row, click the row number.

114

¤ Click Insert. ‹ Click Rows.

Microsoft Office Excel...

The new row appears and all the rows that follow shift downward.

12:00 PM

To deselect a row, click any cell.

TEAM LinG

3

Edit a Worksheet

USING EXCEL

Do I need to adjust my formulas when I insert a row or column?

Tip

Tip

No. When you insert a row or column, Excel automatically updates any formulas affected by the insertion. For information on formulas, see pages 120 to 133.

How do I insert several rows or columns at once?

You can use one of the methods shown below to insert several rows or columns at once, but you must first select the number of rows or columns you want to insert. For example, to insert two columns, select two columns and then perform steps 2 and 3 below. To select multiple rows or columns, see page 95.

Insert Column Here

A

A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

B

A

B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

10 20 30

=A1+A2

C

10 20 30

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

654 5487 548 6541 453 5412 65 A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

=B1+B2

B 6413 4641 1123 7564 65 594 465

C 1230 2650 3850 4467 6541 1123 124

D

E

B

C

D 6413 4641 1123 7564 65 594 465

E 12 26 38 44 65 11 1

654 5487 548 6541 453 5412 65

INSERT A COLUMN

E

E

Microsoft Office Excel...

Excel will insert a column to the left of the column you select.

⁄ To select a column, click the column letter.

12:00 PM

¤ Click Insert. ‹ Click Columns.

Microsoft Office Excel...

The new column appears and all the columns that follow shift to the right.

12:00 PM

To deselect a column, click any cell.

TEAM115 LinG

DELETE A ROW OR COLUMN

You can delete a row or column to remove data you no longer want to display in your worksheet.

k1 Wee

k Wee

2

k Wee

37

38

30

Deb

E

in

Kev

Dan

38

35

est

hy B

Cat

39

35

40

er

p Coo

35

35

38

k

ma e Si

37

42

37

m Tho

42

38

35

Juli

41

36

as

Sue

39

s 20van

ff

Je

36

35 35

33 35

ter Shu ht Wrig n e J by e Bib v a D

37

32

45

When you delete a row, the remaining rows in your worksheet shift upward. When you delete a column, the remaining columns shift to the left. Excel automatically adjusts the row numbers and column letters in your worksheet for you.

3

37

an unc

D

h

ic ietr

ta D

Kris

DELETE A ROW

4

4

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ To select the row you want to delete, click the row number.

116

¤ Click Edit. ‹ Click Delete to delete the row.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

The row disappears and all the rows that follow shift upward.

To deselect a row, click any cell.

TEAM LinG

3

Edit a Worksheet

USING EXCEL

Tip

Why did #REF! appear in a cell after I deleted a row or column?

Tip

If #REF! appears in a cell in your worksheet, you may have deleted data needed to calculate a formula. Before you delete a row or column, make sure the row or column does not contain data that is used in a formula. For information on formulas, see pages 120 to 133.

How do I delete several rows or columns at once?

You can use one of the methods shown below to delete several rows or columns at once, but you must first select the rows or columns you want to delete. For example, to delete three columns, select the columns and then perform steps 2 and 3 below. To select multiple rows or columns, see page 95. Week 1 Week 2 Week 3

February

George $ 51,000 $ 45,600 Linda $ 36,700 $ 35,500 Paul $ 30,200 $ 25,500 John $ 45,800 $ 43,900

Total

$ 49,800 $ 146,400 $ 40,100 $ 112,300 $ 27,800 $ 83,500 $ 44,000 $ 133,700

45

30

35

Grapes

20

120

Lemons

65

70

Limes

80

70

55

Oranges Mangoes

50 40

90 50

65 45

Commission

$ 2,928 $ 2,246 $ 1,670 $ 2,674

90

$163,700 $150,500 $161,700 $475,900

25

#REF!

45

50

Total

March

Pears

January

Apples

s Plums ana Ban

ABC Inc. Sales Report

65

60

35 75

DELETE A COLUMN

E

E

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ To select the column you want to delete, click the column letter.

¤ Click Edit. ‹ Click Delete to delete the column.

Microsoft Office Excel...

The column disappears and all the columns that follow shift to the left.

12:00 PM

To deselect a column, click any cell.

TEAM117 LinG

UNDO CHANGES

Excel remembers the last changes you made to your worksheet. If you regret these changes, you can cancel them by using the Undo feature.

The Undo feature can cancel your last editing and formatting changes. If you do not like the results of canceling an editing or formatting change, you can easily reverse the results.

UNDO CHANGES

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Click

to undo the last change you made to your worksheet.

118

12:00 PM

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

Microsoft Office Excel...

12:00 PM

Excel cancels the last change you made to your worksheet.

To reverse the results of using the Undo feature, click .

You can repeat step 1 to cancel previous changes you made.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

TEAM LinG

3

ZOOM IN OR OUT

Edit a Worksheet

USING EXCEL

You can enlarge or reduce the display of data on your screen. Central Division Standings

es 6 6 6 6 6

Pool A Games Walt's Winners 6 The Chargers 6 Terry's Tigers 6 The Breakaways 6 The GO Team 6

Goals 15 13 12 10 9

Wins

Pool B Games Brian's Boys 6 The Good Guys 6 Greg 'n' Gang 6 The Professionals 6 All The Way 6 Team Spirit 6

Goals 15 13 12 12 8 4

Wins

Goals Wins 15 4 13 3 12 4 10 3 COLOR9VIEW 1

L

Losses 1 2 3 3 4

Ties

4 3 3 1 1

Losses 1 1 2 3 3 5

Ties

4 3 4 3 1 1

1 1 0 2 1

Points 9 7 6 4 3

1 2 0 0 2 0

Points 9 8 8 6 4 2

300% 200% 75% 50%

Zoom Settings

Changing the zoom setting allows you to see data in more detail or display more data on your screen at once. Changing the zoom setting will not affect the way data appears on a printed page.

ZOOM IN OR OUT

100%

50%

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Click

in this area to display a list of zoom settings.

Note: If the Zoom area is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the area.

¤ Click the zoom setting you want to use.

Note: If you select cells before performing step 1, the Selection setting enlarges the selected cells to fill the window. To select cells, see page 94.

Microsoft Office Excel...

The worksheet appears in the new zoom setting. You can edit the worksheet as usual.

12:00 PM

To return to the normal zoom setting, repeat steps 1 and 2, selecting 100% in step 2.

TEAM119 LinG

INTRODUCTION TO FORMULAS AND FUNCTIONS

A formula allows you to calculate and analyze data in your worksheet.

_

6

5

4

+

9

8

7

C

RM

MM+

2

1

.

x

3

0

=

/

A formula always begins with an equal sign (=).

OPERATORS

A formula can contain one or more operators. An operator specifies the type of calculation you want to perform. Comparison Operators

Arithmetic Operators You can use arithmetic operators to perform mathematical calculations.

A 1 2 3 4

B 5 10

5

=A1+B1

You can use comparison operators to compare two values. Comparison operators return a value of TRUE or FALSE.

A 1 2 3 4

B 5

TRUE

5

=A1= B1

Operator

Description

Operator

Description

+ * / % ^

Addition (A1+B1) Subtraction (A1-B1) Multiplication (A1*B1) Division (A1/B1) Percent (A1%) Exponentiation (A1^B1)

= > < >= <= <>

Equal to (A1=B1) Greater than (A1>B1) Less than (A1=B1) Less than or equal to (A1<=B1) Not equal to (A1< >B1)

120

TEAM LinG

4

Using Formulas and Functions

USING EXCEL

ORDER OF CALCULATIONS

CELL REFERENCES

A 2 4 6 8

Order of Calculations

1 2 3 4 5

Percent (%) Exponentiation (^) Multiplication (*) and Division (/) Addition (+) and Subtraction (-) Comparison operators

When a formula contains more than one operator, Excel performs the calculations in a specific order.

=A1+A2+A3*A4 C =2+4+6*8=54 =A1+(A2+A3)*A4 =2+(4+6)*8=82 =A1*(A3-A2)+A4 =2*(6-4)+8=12

When entering formulas, use cell references instead of actual data whenever possible. For example, enter the formula =A1+A2 instead of =10+20. When you use cell references and you change a number used in a formula, Excel will automatically redo the calculation for you.

=A2^A1+A3 2 =4 +6=22 You can use parentheses ( ) to change the order in which Excel performs calculations. Excel will perform the calculations inside the parentheses first.

1 2 3

A 1 0 3 4 0

B

4 =A1+A2= 5 0

FUNCTIONS A function is a ready-to-use formula that you can use to perform a calculation on the data in your worksheet. Examples of commonly used functions include AVERAGE, COUNT, MAX and SUM.

A function always begins with an equal sign (=). The data Excel will use to calculate a function is enclosed in parentheses ( ).

1 2 3 4 5 6

A 10 20 30 40

Specify Individual Cells

=AVERAGE(A1:A4) =(10+20+30+40)/4 = 25

When a comma (,) separates cell references in a function, Excel uses each cell to perform the calculation. For example, =SUM(A1,A2,A3) is the same as the formula =A1+A2+A3.

=COUNT(A1:A4) = 4 =MAX(A1:A4) = 40

Specify a Group of Cells

=SUM(A1:A4) =10+20+30+40 = 100

When a colon (:) separates cell references in a function, Excel uses the specified cells and all cells between them to perform the calculation. For example, =SUM(A1:A3) is the same as the formula =A1+A2+A3.

TEAM121 LinG

ENTER A FORMULA

You can enter a formula into any cell in your worksheet. A formula helps you calculate and analyze data in your worksheet.

EXPEN

B3+B4 = B1+B2+

.

x

3

2

1

$750 $300 $125 $50 $1,2 25

_

6

5

4

+

9

8

7

C

RM

M-

M+

SES

0

=

/

When entering formulas, you should use cell references instead of actual data whenever possible. A formula always begins with an equal sign (=).

ENTER A FORMULA

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Click the cell where

‹ Type the formula and

you want to enter a formula.

then press the

¤ Type an equal sign (=) to begin the formula.

122

Enter

key.

Note: As you enter the formula, Excel adds a colored outline to each cell you refer to in the formula.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

The result of the calculation appears in the cell.

The formula bar displays the formula for the cell.

› To view the formula you entered, click the cell containing the formula.

TEAM LinG

4

Using Formulas and Functions

USING EXCEL

What happens if I change a number used in a formula?

Tip

How can I quickly enter cell references into a formula?

Tip

When you use cell references and you change a number used in a formula, Excel will automatically redo the calculation for you.

A

1275 7

.

125

1 2 3 4 5

50 1,225

x

3

2

1

3 Insurance 4 Gas 5 Total

_

6

5

4

750 300

+

9

8

B

1 Rent 2 Car

C

RM

MM+

To quickly enter cell references, perform steps 1 and 2 on page 122 and then click the first cell you want to use in the formula. Type the operator you want to use to perform the calculation and then click the next cell you want to use in the formula. When you finish entering cell references and operators, press the Enter key to perform the calculation.

0

=

⁄ Double-click the cell containing the formula you want to change. The formula appears in the cell.

B

/

Microsoft Office Excel...

EDIT A FORMULA

A $2,000.00 $2,500.00 $2,225.00 $2,350.00 = A1+ A2

12:00 PM

Excel outlines each cell used in the formula with a different color.

Microsoft Office Excel...

12:00 PM

or key to move the flashing insertion point to where you want to remove or add characters.

‹ To add data where the insertion point flashes on your screen, type the data.

To remove the character to the left of the insertion point, press the Backspace key.

making changes to the formula, press the Enter key.

¤ Press the

› When you finish

TEAM123 LinG

ENTER A FUNCTION

Excel helps you enter functions into your worksheet. Functions allow you to perform calculations without having to type long, complex formulas.

1:A4) =SUM(A 4) GE(A1:A A R E V A = (E4,2) =ROUND (B1:B6) =COUNT

Excel offers over 200 functions to help you analyze data in your worksheet. There are financial functions, math and trigonometry functions, date and time functions, statistical functions and many more.

)

E1:E4 =MAX(

AD3

PUSH

C RM

MM+

7

_

6

5

4

+

9

8

2

1

.

x

3 =

/

0

ENTER A FUNCTION

SUM Math & Trig

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Click the cell where you want to enter a function.

¤ Click function.

124

to enter a

The Insert Function dialog box appears.

Microsoft Office Excel...

‹ Click this area to display the categories of available functions.

› Click the category

12:00 PM

Note: If you do not know which category contains the function you want to use, select All to display a list of all the functions.

containing the function you want to use.

TEAM LinG

4

Using Formulas and Functions

USING EXCEL

Tip

Can Excel help me find the function I should use to perform a calculation?

⁄ Perform steps 1 and 2

If you do not know which function to use to perform a calculation, you can have Excel recommend a function.

¤ Type a brief description of the calculation you want to perform and then press the Enter key.

below to display the Insert Function dialog box.

PMT

This area displays a list of recommended functions you can use to perform the calculation. You can perform steps 5 to 11 below to use a function Excel recommends.

B4:B9

SUM

Microsoft Office Excel...

This area displays the functions in the category you selected.

ˇ Click the function you want to use.

12:00 PM

This area describes the function you selected.

Á Click OK to continue.

Microsoft Office Excel...

The Function Arguments dialog box appears. If the dialog box covers data you want to use in the function, you can move the dialog box to a new location.

12:00 PM

‡ To move the dialog box, position the mouse over the title bar and then drag the dialog box to a new location.

TEAM125 LinG

ENTER A FUNCTION

When entering a function, you must specify which numbers you want to use in the calculation. You may need to specify several numbers or only one number, depending on the function you are using.

6600

1122

8800 2222

2200

9977

100 200

1

2 3

4

400 800

D 20

C 128

B

A

6688

12 22 68

21

601 288 204

60 80 97

ENTER A FUNCTION (CONTINUED)

B4:B9

Microsoft Office Excel...

This area displays boxes where you enter the numbers you want to use in the function.

12:00 PM

This area describes the numbers you need to enter.

Microsoft Office Excel...

° To enter the first number for the function, click the cell that contains the number.

12:00 PM

The cell reference for the number appears in this area.

Note: If the number you want to use does not appear in your worksheet, type the number.

126

TEAM LinG

4

Using Formulas and Functions

USING EXCEL

Tip

Can I enter a function by myself?

If you know the name of the function you want to use, you can type the function and cell references directly into a cell in your worksheet. You must start the function with an equal sign (=), enclose the cell references in parentheses ( ) and separate each cell reference with a comma (,). You can also separate cell references with a colon (:) to indicate that Excel should include the specified cells and all the cells between them in the function. When you type a function directly into a cell, a yellow box appears, displaying the name of the function. You can click the name of the function to display help information about the function.

Microsoft Office Excel...

· To enter another number for the function, click the next box.

12:00 PM

— Click OK to enter the function into your worksheet.

Microsoft Office Excel...

The result of the function appears in the cell.

12:00 PM

The formula bar displays the function for the cell.

‚ Repeat steps 8 and 9 until you have entered all the numbers you want to use in the function.

TEAM127 LinG

PERFORM COMMON CALCULATIONS

You can quickly perform common calculations on numbers in your worksheet. For example, you can calculate the sum of a list of numbers.

PERFORM COMMON CALCULATIONS

B4:B7

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Click the cell below or to the right of the cells containing the numbers you want to include in the calculation.

¤ Click

in this area to display a list of common calculations.

128

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

A moving outline appears around the cells that Excel will include in the calculation.

‹ Click the calculation

If Excel outlines the wrong cells, you can select the cells that contain the numbers you want to include in the calculation. To select cells, see page 94.

you want to perform.

Note: If you want to quickly add the numbers, you can click instead of performing steps 2 and 3.

12:00 PM

The cell you selected in step 1 displays the function Excel will use to perform the calculation.

TEAM LinG

4

Using Formulas and Functions

USING EXCEL

What common calculations can I perform?

Tip

Sum

Adds a list of numbers.

Average

Calculates the average value of a list of numbers.

Tip

Can I perform calculations on several columns or rows of data at the same time?

Yes. Select the cells below or to the right of the cells that contain the numbers you want to include in the calculation. To select cells, see page 94. Then perform steps 2 and 3 below. Product A

10 20 30

January

Count

Max

Calculates the number of values in a list.

February March

Microsoft Office Excel...

› Press the

Enter key to perform the calculation.

Month Totals

5 6 3

Finds the largest value in a list of numbers. Product A

Min

Product B

January

Finds the smallest value in a list of numbers.

February March

12:00 PM

The result of the calculation appears.

Microsoft Office Excel...

QUICKLY ADD NUMBERS

You can quickly display the sum of a list of numbers without entering a formula into your worksheet.

10 20 30

Product B

5 6 3

Month Totals

15 26 33

12:00 PM

This area displays the sum of the cells you selected.

⁄ Select the cells containing the numbers you want to add. To select cells, see page 94.

TEAM129 LinG

COPY A FORMULA

If you want to use the same formula several times in your worksheet, you can save time by copying the formula.

A

B

1

10

20

5

2

20

30

10

3

30

40

20

4

60

90

When you copy a formula to other cells in your worksheet, Excel automatically changes the cell references in the formula to match the new location. The cell references that change are called relative references.

=A1+A2+A3

C

35

=B1+B2+B3

=C1+C2+C3

COPY A FORMULA

Microsoft Office Excel...

12:00 PM

⁄ Enter the formula you

The formula bar displays the formula for the cell.

want to copy to other cells. To enter a formula, see page 122.

Microsoft Office Excel...

12:00 PM

‹ Position the mouse

› Drag the mouse

over the bottom right corner of the cell ( changes to ).

over the cells you want to receive a copy of the formula.

¤ Click the cell containing the formula you want to copy. 130

TEAM LinG

4

Using Formulas and Functions

USING EXCEL

Tip

I do not want Excel to change a cell reference when I copy a formula. What can I do?

You can use an absolute reference in the formula. An absolute reference is a cell reference that does not change when you copy a formula. To make a cell reference absolute, type a dollar sign ($) before both the column letter and the row number, such as $A$7.

A 1 2 Sales 3 4 Commission 5 6 Commission Rate 7 0.2 8 =$A$7*B2

This cell contains the formula =$A$7*B2.

Microsoft Office Excel...

The results of the formulas appear.

12:00 PM

The Auto Fill Options button ( ) also appears. You can click the button and then select an option to change the way Excel copies the formula. For example, you can specify that Excel should not use the formatting from the original cell.

B

C

D

Jason 10,000

Sarah 7,500

Kerrie 8,200

2,000

1,500

1,640 4

=$A$7*C2

=$A$7*D2

If you copy the formula to other cells in your worksheet, Excel does not change the absolute reference in the new formulas.

Microsoft Office Excel...

ˇ To view one of the new formulas, click a cell that received a copy of the formula.

12:00 PM

The formula bar displays the formula with the new cell references.

TEAM131 LinG

CHECK ERRORS IN FORMULAS

Excel can help you determine the cause of an error in a formula. Excel checks your formulas for errors as you work and marks cells that display certain error messages. For information on common error messages, see page 133.

AD3 PUSH

Errors in formulas are often the result of typing mistakes. Once you determine the cause of an error, you can edit the formula to correct the error. To edit a formula, see page 123. CHECK ERRORS IN FORMULAS

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

An error message appears in a cell when Excel cannot properly calculate the result of a formula.

A triangle appears in the top left corner of a cell displaying an error message when Excel can help you determine the cause of the error.

⁄ To determine the cause of an error, click a cell displaying a triangle.

132

Microsoft Office Excel...

12:00 PM

The Error Checking button ( ) appears.

This area displays the name of the error.

¤ Click the Error

‹ You can click Help on

Checking button to display options you can use to determine the cause of the error.

this error to view help information for the error.

You can click Show Calculation Steps to have Excel help you evaluate the cause of the error.

TEAM LinG

4

Using Formulas and Functions

USING EXCEL

COMMON ERRORS IN FORMULAS

An error message appears when Excel cannot properly calculate or display the result of a formula.

A 1 9924 2 5521 3 ##### 4 5 6 7

B

#####

C

The column is too narrow to display the result of the calculation. You can change the column width to display the result. To change the column width, see page 134.

A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

B

C

#DIV/0! The formula divides a number by zero (0). Excel considers a blank cell to have a value of zero.

50

#DIV/0!

This cell contains the formula =A1/A2 =50/0

This cell contains the formula =A1*A2

A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

B

C

10 20 30 #NAME?

#NAME? The formula contains a function name or cell reference Excel does not recognize. This cell contains the formula =AQ+A2+A3 In this example, the cell reference A1 was typed incorrectly.

A 1 10 20 2 3 January 4 #VALUE! 5 6 7

B

C

A 10 10 20 30 #REF!

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

B

C

#REF! The formula refers to a cell that is not valid. This cell contains the formula =A1+A2+A3 In this example, a row containing a cell used in the formula was deleted.

#VALUE! The formula refers to a cell that Excel cannot use in a calculation. This cell contains the formula =A1+A2+A3 In this example, a cell used in the formula contains text.

A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

B

C

10 20 30

=A1+A2+A3+A4

Circular Reference A warning message appears when a formula refers to the cell containing the formula. This is called a circular reference. This cell contains the formula =A1+A2+A3+A4

TEAM133 LinG

CHANGE COLUMN WIDTH

You can change the width of columns to improve the appearance of your worksheet and display any hidden data.

FEB JAN

3450 2460

5432 3758

066 gon 3 n i r Meu t r a 1958 52 n a B 5 c 2 n Du in a cell may 253 Data 25 ard Dan 9 w 1 d be hidden if the l E l e n 39cell is not wide 62 mpb Bria 6 a 3 C enough to display bie 5 hose r the data and the 6 e Deb d 8 il 1 h neighboring cell C a o s p also contains data. Dan om h You can increase T es l i the column width M to display all the data in the cell.

CHANGE COLUMN WIDTH

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ To change the width of a column, position the mouse over the right edge of the column heading ( changes to ).

134

¤ Drag the column edge until the dashed line displays the column width you want.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

The column displays the new width.

FIT LONGEST ITEM

⁄ To change a column width to fit the longest item in the column, double-click the right edge of the column heading. TEAM LinG

5

CHANGE ROW HEIGHT

Format a Worksheet

USING EXCEL

You can change the height of rows to add space between the rows of data in your worksheet.

CHANGE ROW HEIGHT

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ To change the height of a row, position the mouse over the bottom edge of the row heading ( changes to ).

¤ Drag the row edge until the dashed line displays the row height you want.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

The row displays the new height.

FIT TALLEST ITEM

⁄ To change a row height to fit the tallest item in the row, doubleclick the bottom edge of the row heading. TEAM135 LinG

CHANGE FONT OF DATA

You can change the font of data to enhance the appearance of your worksheet.

January

February

1202 2002 3006 1004 8012

1503 2204 2005 9031 6008

Jack Adams Erin Baker Lisa Bell Julie Brown Alan Carter

By default, Excel uses the Arial font. You can use another font to draw attention to headings or emphasize important data in your worksheet.

CHANGE FONT OF DATA

Arial

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Select the cells containing the data you want to change to a different font. To select cells, see page 94.

Note: If the Font area is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the area.

¤ Click

‹ Click the font you

in this area to display a list of the available fonts.

136

Microsoft Office Excel...

The data changes to the font you selected.

12:00 PM

To deselect cells, click any cell.

want to use.

TEAM LinG

5

CHANGE SIZE OF DATA

Format a Worksheet

USING EXCEL

You can increase or decrease the size of data in your worksheet.

8 point

12 point

14 point Larger data is easier to read, but smaller data allows you to fit more information on a page.

18 point

Excel measures the size of data in points. There are approximately 72 points in one inch.

24 point CHANGE SIZE OF DATA

12

16

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Select the cells containing the data you want to change to a new size. To select cells, see page 94.

¤ Click

in this area to display a list of the available sizes.

Note: If the Font Size area is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the area.

Microsoft Office Excel...

The data changes to the size you selected.

12:00 PM

To deselect cells, click any cell.

‹ Click the size you want to use.

TEAM137 LinG

CHANGE NUMBER FORMAT You can change the appearance of numbers in your worksheet without retyping the numbers.

SALES Salesperson Jan Feb 1564 1687 Richard 2008 2114 Nancy 1789 1487 Steve 1002 1298 Jason 2354 1809 Susan

SALES Salesperson Jan $1,564.00 Richard $2,008.00 Nancy $1,789.00 Steve $1,002.00 Jason $2,354.00 Susan

Feb $1,687.00 $2,114.00 $1,487.00 $1,298.00 $1,809.00

When you change the format of numbers, you do not change the value of the numbers. CHANGE NUMBER FORMAT

Currency

-$1,234.10

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Select the cells

‹ Click Cells.

containing the numbers you want to format. To select cells, see page 94.

The Format Cells dialog box appears.

¤ Click Format.

138

Microsoft Office Excel...

› Click the Number tab. ˇ Click the category that describes the numbers in the cells you selected.

12:00 PM

This area displays the options for the category you selected. The available options depend on the category you selected.

TEAM LinG

5

Format a Worksheet

USING EXCEL

What categories are available for formatting numbers?

Tip

Category:

Description:

Example:

General

Applies no specific number format.

100

Number Currency Accounting Date Time Percentage

Used to format numbers for general display. Used to format monetary values. Aligns the currency symbols and decimal points in a column of monetary values. Used to format dates. Used to format times. Used to format percentages.

100.00 $100.00 $ 100.00 $ 1200.00 23-Apr-03 12:00 PM 25.00%

Fraction Scientific

Used to format fractions. Used to format numbers in scientific notation.

1/4 1.00E+02

Text Special

Treats numbers as text. Used to format special numbers, such as Zip codes. Allows you to apply your own number format.

135 Hillcrest Street 90210

Custom

3-45-678

Currency

Currency

-$1,234.10

Microsoft Office Excel...

Á To select the number of decimal places you want the numbers to display, double-click this area. Then type the number of decimal places. ‡ To select the way you want negative numbers to appear, click one of the available styles.

12:00 PM

This area displays a sample of how the numbers will appear.

° Click OK to apply your changes.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

The numbers display the changes you specified. QUICKLY FORMAT NUMBERS

¤ Click one of the following buttons. Currency

⁄ Select the cells

Percent

containing the numbers you want to format.

Comma Add a decimal place Remove a decimal place

TEAM139 LinG

CHANGE DATA COLOR

You can change the color of data in your worksheet to draw attention to headings or important information.

Adding color to data is also useful for marking data you want to review or verify later. CHANGE DATA COLOR

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Select the cells containing the data you want to change to a different color. To select cells, see page 94.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

‹ Click the color you

Microsoft Office Excel...

The data appears in the color you selected. To deselect cells, click any cell.

12:00 PM

To return data to its original color, repeat steps 1 to 3, selecting Automatic in step 3.

want to use.

¤ Click

in this area to display the available colors.

140

TEAM LinG

5

CHANGE CELL COLOR

Format a Worksheet

USING EXCEL

You can add color to cells to make the cells stand out in your worksheet.

Changing the color of cells is useful when you want to distinguish between different areas in your worksheet. For example, in a worksheet that contains monthly sales figures, you can use a different cell color for each month. CHANGE CELL COLOR

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Select the cells you want to change to a different color. To select cells, see page 94.

¤ Click

in this area to display the available colors.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

‹ Click the color you

Microsoft Office Excel...

The cells appear in the color you selected. To deselect cells, click any cell.

12:00 PM

To remove color from cells, repeat steps 1 to 3, selecting No Fill in step 3.

want to use.

TEAM141 LinG

CHANGE ALIGNMENT OF DATA

You can align data in different ways to enhance the appearance of your worksheet.

When you enter data into cells, Excel automatically left aligns text and right aligns numbers and dates. CHANGE ALIGNMENT OF DATA

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Select the cells

¤ Click one of the following

containing the data you want to align differently. To select cells, see page 94.

buttons.

Microsoft Office Excel...

The data appears in the new alignment.

12:00 PM

To deselect cells, click any cell.

Left align Center Right align

142

Note: If the button you want is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

TEAM LinG

5

CENTER DATA ACROSS COLUMNS

Format a Worksheet

USING EXCEL

You can center data across columns in your worksheet. This is useful for centering titles over your data.

Jan

Feb

Mar

CA

7000

7000

5000

NY

6000

4000

7000

8000

7000

9000

FL

CENTER DATA ACROSS COLUMNS

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Select the cells you want to center the data across. To select cells, see page 94.

Note: The first cell you select should contain the data you want to center.

¤ Click

to center the data across the columns.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

Microsoft Office Excel...

12:00 PM

Excel centers the data across the columns.

If you no longer want to center the data across the columns, click the cell that contains the data and then repeat step 2.

TEAM143 LinG

BOLD, ITALICIZE OR UNDERLINE DATA

You can bold, italicize or underline data to emphasize data and enhance the appearance of your worksheet.

BOLD, ITALICIZE OR UNDERLINE DATA

Microsoft Office Excel...

12:00 PM

⁄ Select the cells

¤ Click one of the following

containing the data you want to bold, italicize or underline. To select cells, see page 94.

buttons. Bold Italic Underline Note: If the button you want is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

144

Microsoft Office Excel...

The data appears in the style you selected.

12:00 PM

To deselect cells, click any cell. To remove a bold, italic or underline style, repeat steps 1 and 2.

TEAM LinG

5

COPY FORMATTING

Format a Worksheet

USING EXCEL

You can copy the formatting of a cell to make other cells in your worksheet look exactly the same.

JaJnan

ar Mar FebFeb M

Product A Product

You may want to copy the formatting of cells to make all the titles in your worksheet look the same. This will give the information in your worksheet a consistent appearance.

C

tE

Produc

COPY FORMATTING

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Click a cell that displays the formatting you want to copy to other cells.

¤ Click

to copy the formatting of the cell.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

Microsoft Office Excel...

The mouse changes to when over your worksheet.

‹ Select the cells you want

12:00 PM

The cells you selected display the formatting. To deselect cells, click any cell.

to display the same formatting. To select cells, see page 94.

TEAM145 LinG

PREVIEW A WORKSHEET BEFORE PRINTING

You can use the Print Preview feature to see how your worksheet will look when printed. This allows you to confirm that the worksheet will print the way you expect.

Income Statement

January February March Revenue $ 12,000.00 $ 13,500.00 $ 14,000.00 Payroll Rent Product Other

$ 3,500.00 $ 3,500.00 $ 4,500.00 $ 1,200.00 $ 1,200.00 $ 1,200.00 $ 1,000.00 $ 1,200.00 $ 1,100.00 $ 500.00 $ 450.00 $ 650.00 $ 5,800.00 $ 7,150.00 $ 6,550.00

Net

$16,000.00 $14,000.00 $12,000.00 $10,000.00 $8,000.00 $6,000.00 $4,000.00 $2,000.00 $-

Revenue Net

January

February

March

Month

AD3

PUSH

PREVIEW A WORKSHEET BEFORE PRINTING

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Click

to preview your worksheet before printing.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

146

The Print Preview window appears.

Microsoft Office Excel...

This area displays a page from your worksheet. This area indicates which page is displayed and the total number of pages in your worksheet.

12:00 PM

¤ If your worksheet contains more than one page, you can click Next or Previous to view the next or previous page. You can also use the scroll bar to view other pages.

TEAM LinG

6

Print a Worksheet

USING EXCEL

Tip

Why does my worksheet appear in black and white in the Print Preview window?

If you are using a black-and-white printer, your worksheet appears in black and white in the Print Preview window. If you are using a color printer, your worksheet will appear in color.

Income Sta

Read

Bla

y

ckan Pri d-Wh nte ite r

Why don’t the gridlines appear on my worksheet in the Print Preview window?

By default, Excel will not print the gridlines that appear around each cell in your worksheet. To print gridlines and change other print options, see page 152.

tement

Revenue $ January February 12,000.00 March $ 13,500.00 $ 14,000.00 Payroll $ 3,500.00 $ Rent 3,500.00 $ 4,500.00 Product $$ 1,200.00 $ 1,200.00 1,000.00 $ $ 1,200.00 Other 1,20 0.00 $ 500.00 $ 450.00 $ 1,100.00 $ 650.00 Net $ 5,800.00 $ 7,150.00 $ 6,550.00 $16,000.00 $14,000.00 $12,000.00 $10,000.00 $8,000.00 $6,000.00 $4,000.00 $2,000.00

y Read

Revenue Net

$-

January

February

March

Month

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

‹ To magnify an area of the page, position the mouse over the area you want to magnify ( changes to ).

Tip

› Click the area to magnify the area.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

A magnified view of the area appears.

ˇ To once again display the entire page, click anywhere on the page.

Á When you finish previewing your worksheet, click Close to close the Print Preview window.

TEAM147 LinG

PRINT A WORKSHEET

You can produce a paper copy of the worksheet displayed on your screen. Printing a worksheet is useful when you want to be able to refer to the worksheet without using your computer.

1999

1999

2000

2000

Before printing your worksheet, make sure your printer is turned on and contains paper. PRINT A WORKSHEET

HP LaserJet 5MP 5MP LPT1

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Click any cell in the worksheet you want to print. To print only specific cells in your worksheet, select the cells you want to print. To select cells, see page 94.

148

¤ Click File. ‹ Click Print. The Print dialog box appears.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

› Click the part of the workbook you want to print ( changes to

Note: For information on the parts of the workbook that you can print, see the top of page 149.

ˇ If the part of the workbook ).

you selected to print contains more than one page, click an option to specify which pages you want to print ( changes to ). All - Prints every page Page(s) - Prints the pages

you specify

TEAM LinG

6

Print a Worksheet

USING EXCEL

Tip

What parts of a workbook can I print?

For information on using multiple worksheets in a workbook, see pages 98 to 101.

SHEET 1

Excel allows you to specify which part of a workbook you want to print. Each workbook is divided into several worksheets.

SHEET 2 SHEET 3 SHEET 4

Selection

Active sheet(s)

Entire workbook

Prints the cells you selected.

Prints the displayed worksheet.

Prints every worksheet in the workbook.

HP LaserJet 5MP 5MP LPT1

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

If you selected Page(s) in step 5, type the number of the first page you want to print. Press the Tab key and then type the number of the last page you want to print.

Á Click OK.

Microsoft Office Excel...

QUICKLY PRINT DISPLAYED WORKSHEET

⁄ Click

to quickly print the worksheet displayed on your screen.

12:00 PM

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

TEAM149 LinG

CHANGE PAGE ORIENTATION

Portrait UNITS SOLD

Landscape

Jan

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

SALES

Feb

Jan

$30,000 $25,000 $20,000

Feb

You can change the page orientation to change the way your worksheet appears on a printed page.

$15,000 $10,000 $5,000

Apples

Oranges

$0.00 Jan.

Feb.

Mar.

Apr.

May

June

July

Excel automatically prints your worksheets in the portrait orientation. The landscape orientation is useful when you want a wide worksheet to fit on one printed page. Changing the page orientation will not affect the way your worksheet appears on your screen.

CHANGE PAGE ORIENTATION

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Click File. ¤ Click Page Setup.

150

The Page Setup dialog box appears.

Microsoft Office Excel...

12:00 PM

‹ Click the Page tab. › Click the page

ˇ Click OK to confirm your change.

orientation you want to use ( changes to ).

Note: You can use the Print Preview feature to see how your worksheet will appear on a printed page. For information on using the Print Preview feature, see page 146.

TEAM LinG

6

CHANGE MARGINS

Print a Worksheet

USING EXCEL

Players

Games

Goals

Assists

Points

J. Adams E. Baker L. Bell J. Brown A. Carter M. Cole J. Cook C. Davis S. Evans P. Fraser S. Grant L. Harris F. Hill D. Jones N. King S. Lee A. Lewis A. Martin S. Miller D. Morris J. Nelson D. Price H. Reed E. Ross R. Smith M. Taylor K. Turner M. Wilson

60 60 60 60 60 55 60 59 40 58 45 35 60 40 60 40 60 40 60 60 30 56 33 60 60 35 60 60

50 52 49 44 43 24 33 19 22 19 21 15 25 13 21 13 10 22 12 10 10 12 10 4 5 10 2 2

35 24 20 20 21 38 29 30 20 21 19 23 12 21 12 20 22 10 19 18 17 10 7 12 10 4 10 5

85 76 69 64 64 62 62 49 42 40 40 38 37 34 33 33 32 32 31 28 27 22 17 16 15 14 12 7

RIGHT

You can change the margins in your worksheet. A margin is the amount of space between the data on a page and the edge of your paper.

LEFT

TOP

Excel automatically sets the top and bottom margins to 1 inch and the left and right margins to 0.75 inches. Changing the margins allows you to adjust the amount of information that can fit on a page. You may want to change the margins to accommodate letterhead or other specialty paper.

BOTTOM

CHANGE MARGINS

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Click File. ¤ Click Page Setup.

The Page Setup dialog box appears.

Microsoft Office Excel...

12:00 PM

‹ Click the Margins tab. › Double-click in the box for

Á Click OK to confirm your changes.

the margin you want to change. Then type a new margin in inches.

Note: You can use the Print Preview feature to see how your worksheet will appear on a printed page. For information on using the Print Preview feature, see page 146.

ˇ Repeat step 4 for each margin you want to change.

TEAM151 LinG

CHANGE PRINT OPTIONS

You can use the print options that Excel offers to change the way your worksheet appears on a printed page.

P

Salesp roduction erson S Janu Gary Mary 15 Teri 127 Sherie 98 Barr y 198 Larr y 174 Moe 145 Tom 147 Richard 132 Harr y 187 Total 174 1536

Changing the print options will not affect the way your worksheet appears on your screen.

CHANGE PRINT OPTIONS

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Click File.

¤ Click Page Setup.

Microsoft Office Excel...

The Page Setup dialog box appears.

‹ Click the Sheet tab.

152

12:00 PM

› Click each print option you want to use ( changes to ).

TEAM LinG

6

Print a Worksheet

USING EXCEL

Tip

What print options does Excel offer? Production Sales (1st Quarter 2001) Production Sales (1st Quarter 2001) Salesperson Gary Mary Teri Sherie Barry Larry Moe Tom Richard Harry Total

January February 154 147 127 149 98 125 198 141 174 123 145 194 147 164 132 137 187 158 174 112 1536 1450

March 123 132 156 187 149 167 154 132 182 147 1529

Production Sales (1st Quarter 2001)

Total 424 408 379 526 446 506 465 401 527 433 4515

Salesperson Gary Mary Teri Sherie Barry Larry Moe Tom Richard Harry Total

January February 154 147 127 149 98 125 198 141 174 123 145 194 147 164 132 137 187 158 174 112 1536 1450

March 123 132 156 187 149 167 154 132 182 147 1529

Production Sales (1st Quarter 2001)

Total 424 408 379 526 446 506 465 401 527 433 4515

Salesperson Gary Mary Teri Sherie Barry Larry Moe Tom Richard Harry Total

January February 154 147 127 149 98 125 198 141 174 123 145 194 147 164 132 137 187 158 174 112 1536 1450

March 123 132 156 187 149 167 154 132 182 147 1529

Total 424 408 379 526 446 506 465 401 527 433 4515

A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

B

C

D

E

Production Sales (1st Quarter 2001) Salesperson Gary Mary Teri Sherie Barry Larry Moe Tom Richard Harry Total

January February 154 147 127 149 98 125 198 141 174 123 145 194 147 164 132 137 187 158 174 112 1536 1450

March 123 132 156 187 149 167 154 132 182 147 1529

Total 424 408 379 526 446 506 465 401 527 433 4515

Salesperson Gary Mary Teri Sherie Barry Larry Moe Tom Richard Harry Total

January February 154 147 127 149 98 125 198 141 174 123 145 194 147 164 132 137 187 158 174 112 1536 1450

March 123 132 156 187 149 167 154 132 182 147 1529

Total 424 408 379 526 446 506 465 401 527 433 #Value!

##VALUE! VALUE!

##N/A N/A

Gridlines

Black and white

Draft quality

Prints lines around the cells in your worksheet.

Prints a colored worksheet in black and white. This is useful when you want to print a colored worksheet on a black-andwhite printer.

Reduces printing time by not printing gridlines and most graphics.

Cell errors

Row and column headings

Specifies the way cell errors appear on a printed page. For information on cell errors, see page 132.

Prints the row numbers and column letters.

#N/A

#N/A

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

By default, Excel will print any cell errors that appear in your worksheet.

ˇ To specify how you want cell errors to appear when you print your worksheet, click this area.

Á Click the way you want cell errors to appear.

Microsoft Office Excel...

‡ Click OK to confirm your changes.

12:00 PM

Note: You can use the Print Preview feature to see how your worksheet will appear on a printed page. For information on using the Print Preview feature, see page 146.

TEAM153 LinG

CREATE A CHART

You can create a chart to graphically display your worksheet data. Charts allow you to easily compare data and view patterns and trends.

The Chart Wizard takes you step by step through the process of creating a chart. CREATE A CHART

Column

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Select the cells containing the data you want to display in a chart, including the row and column labels. To select cells, see page 94.

¤ Click 154

to create a chart.

12:00 PM

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button. The Chart Wizard appears.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

‹ Click the type of chart

› Click the chart design

you want to create.

you want to use.

This area displays the available chart designs for the type of chart you selected.

ˇ Click Next to continue.

TEAM LinG

7

Working With Charts

USING EXCEL

Tip

Can I see a preview of my chart when I’m choosing the chart type and design?

Tip

What titles can I add to my chart?

Yes. After performing step 4 below, you can press and hold down the Press and Hold to View Sample $15,000

button to see a preview of how your chart will appear with the chart type and design you selected.

$10,000 REVENUE

$5,000 $January

February

March

Column

Press and Hold to View Sample

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

Á Click an option to specify the way you want Excel to plot the data from your worksheet ( changes to ). This area displays a preview of the chart.

‡ Click Next to continue. You can click Back at any time to return to a previous step and change your selections.

Chart title

Value axis

Category axis

Identifies the subject of your chart.

Indicates the unit of measure used in your chart.

Indicates the categories used in your chart.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

This area provides boxes you can use to add titles to the chart.

This area shows how the titles will appear in the chart.

Note: Some boxes are not available for some chart types.

· Click Next to continue.

° To add a title to the chart, click a box and type the title. Repeat this step for each title you want to add.

TEAM155 LinG

CREATE A CHART When creating a chart, you can choose to display the chart on the same worksheet as the data or on its own sheet, called a chart sheet.

Displaying a chart with your worksheet data is useful when you want to print the chart and data on the same page.

Displaying a chart on a chart sheet is useful when you want to view a chart separately from your worksheet data.

CREATE A CHART (CONTINUED)

Sheet1

Sheet1

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

‚ Click an option to specify where you want to display the chart ( changes to ).

As new sheet - Displays the chart on its own sheet, called a chart sheet.

Microsoft Office Excel...

If you selected As new sheet in step 10, you can type a name for the chart sheet in this area.

12:00 PM

— Click Finish to create the chart.

As object in - Displays

the chart on the same worksheet as the data.

156

TEAM LinG

7

Working With Charts

USING EXCEL

Tip

What happens if I change the data I used to create a chart?

Can I change the chart titles?

Tip

Yes. After you create a chart, you can change the chart title and axis titles in the chart. Click the title you want to change. A box appears around the title. Drag the mouse over the title until you select all the text. Type a new title and then click a blank area in the chart.

If you change the data you used to create a chart, Excel will automatically update the chart to display the changes.

INCOME STATEMENT

REVENUE

March Total January February $ 8,745.00 $ 11,500.00 $14,900.00 $13,670.00 $35,145.00

Payroll $ 3,850.00 $ 4,850.00 $ 5,250.00 $ 13,950.00 Rent $ 1,750.00 $ 1,750.00 $ 1,750.00 $ 5,250.00 Supplies $ 1,920.00 $ 1,980.00 $ 2,030.00 $ 5,930.00 TOTAL EXPENSES $ 7,520.00 $ 8,580.00 $ 9,030.00 $25,130.00

Income

$ 1,225.00 $ 2,920.00 $ 5,870.00 $ 10,015.00

Dollars

INCOME

Dollars

REVENUE

$15,000.00 $10,000.00 $5,000.00 $-

REVENUE

$15,000 $10,000 REVENUE

$5,000 $January

Jan

March

February

Feb Mar

Month

Month

Microsoft Office Excel...

In this example, the chart appears on the same worksheet as the data.

12:00 PM

The Chart toolbar also appears, displaying buttons that allow you to make changes to the chart.

The handles ( ) around a chart let you change the size of the chart. To hide the handles, click outside the chart.

Excel outlines the data you selected to create the chart.

Note: To move or resize a chart, see page 158.

Microsoft Office Excel...

DELETE A CHART

⁄ Click a blank area in the chart you want to delete. Handles ( ) appear around the chart.

¤ Press the

Delete

key to delete

12:00 PM

Note: To delete a chart displayed on a chart sheet, you must delete the sheet. To delete a worksheet, see page 101.

the chart.

TEAM157 LinG

MOVE OR RESIZE A CHART

You can change the location and size of a chart displayed on your worksheet.

Moving a chart to another location in your worksheet is useful if the chart covers your data. Increasing the size of a chart is useful if the information in the chart is too small to read.

ABC COMPANY

ABC ABCCOMPANY COMPANY ABC ABCCOMPANY COMPANY

ABC COMPANY

ABC COMPANY

ABC COMPANY

MOVE A CHART

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Position the mouse

¤ Drag the chart

over a blank area in the chart you want to move ( changes to Œ).

to a new location in your worksheet.

158

Microsoft Office Excel...

The chart appears in the new location.

12:00 PM

To deselect the chart, click outside the chart.

A dashed line indicates where the chart will appear.

TEAM LinG

7

Working With Charts

USING EXCEL

Tip

What handle ( ) should I use to resize a chart?

Tip

Can I move individual items in a chart?

Yes. To move the chart title, an axis title or the legend to a new location in a chart, position the mouse over the item. Then drag the item to a new location. You cannot move an item outside of the chart area.

ABC COMPANY

Jan Feb Mar

Changes the height of a chart

Jan t

Changes the width of a chart

t

t

Produc A

Changes the height and width of a chart at the same time

Produc B

Pr

oduct

Produc D

Feb Mar

C

RESIZE A CHART

Microsoft Office Excel...

12:00 PM

⁄ Click a blank area in the

‹ Drag the handle

chart you want to resize. Handles ( ) appear around the chart.

until the chart is the size you want.

¤ Position the mouse Œ

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

The chart appears in the new size.

To deselect the chart, click outside the chart.

A dashed line shows the new size.

over one of the handles (Œ changes to , , or ).

TEAM159 LinG

CHANGE THE CHART TYPE

After you create a chart, you can change the chart type to present your data more effectively.

The type of chart you should use depends on your data. For example, area, column and line charts are ideal for showing changes to values over time. Pie charts are ideal for showing percentages. CHANGE THE CHART TYPE

Microsoft Office Excel...

⁄ Click a blank area in the chart you want to change. Handles ( ) appear around the chart.

¤ Click

in this area to display the available chart types.

160

12:00 PM

Note: If the Chart toolbar is not displayed, see page 10 to display the toolbar.

Microsoft Office Excel...

12:00 PM

The chart displays the chart type you selected.

‹ Click the type of chart you want to use.

TEAM LinG

7

PRINT A CHART

Working With Charts

USING EXCEL

You can print your chart with the worksheet data or on its own page.

When you print a chart on its own page, the chart will expand to fill the page.

INCOME STATEMENT

REVENUE

March Total January February $ 8,745.00 $ 11,500.00 $13,670.00 $33,915.00

Payroll $ 3,850.00 $ 4,850.00 $ 5,250.00 $13,950.00 Rent $ 1,750.00 $ 1,750.00 $ 1,750.00 $ 5,250.00 Supplies $ 1,920.00 $ 1,980.00 $ 2,030.00 $ 5,930.00 TOTAL EXPENSES $ 7,520.00 $ 8,580.00 $ 9,030.00 $25,130.00 INCOME

$ 1,225.00 $ 2,920.00 $ 4,640.00 $ 8,785.00

Print a chart with worksheet data

Print a chart on its own page

PRINT A CHART

Microsoft Office Excel...

PRINT A CHART WITH WORKSHEET DATA

⁄ Click a cell outside the chart.

¤ Click

to print the chart with your worksheet data.

12:00 PM

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Excel...

PRINT A CHART ON ITS OWN PAGE

⁄ To print a chart displayed on a worksheet, click a blank area in the chart. To print a chart displayed on a chart sheet, click the tab for the chart sheet.

¤ Click

to print the chart on its own page.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

TEAM161 LinG

Bill's Auto Body Shop We perform body work on all makes and models of cars Our fully trained mechanics will get your car up and running quickly and efficiently

TEAM LinG

USING POWERPOINT

Using PowerPoint

1 2 3 4 5

Getting Started Pages 164-179

Edit Slides Pages 180-191

Add Objects to Slides Pages 192-207

Enhance a Presentation Pages 208-219

Fine-Tune a Presentation Pages 220-233

TEAM LinG

INTRODUCTION TO POWERPOINT

PowerPoint helps you plan, organize, design and deliver professional presentations.

Create and Edit a Presentation

Enhance a Presentation

Fine-Tune a Presentation

You can use PowerPoint’s AutoContent Wizard to quickly create a presentation or design your own presentation one slide at a time. You can then add, delete and move text in the presentation and check the presentation for spelling errors.

You can emphasize the text on a slide using a bold, italic or underline style. You can also change the font, size and color of text. You can enhance your slides by adding objects such as clip art images, AutoShapes, charts and diagrams.

If you plan to deliver a presentation on a computer screen, you can add special effects called transitions to help you move from one slide to the next. You can also reorganize the slides in your presentation and delete slides you no longer need.

Dinner Tonight! Keys to Good

Eleanor and Lou Whitman

ion Communicat

Patience Understanding ss to learn A willingne skills Active listening

Dictionary

164

TEAM LinG

PARTS OF THE POWERPOINT WINDOW

1

Getting Started

USING POWERPOINT

The PowerPoint window displays several items to help you perform tasks efficiently.

Title Bar

Menu Bar

Standard Toolbar

Shows the name of the displayed presentation.

Provides access to lists of commands available in PowerPoint and displays an area where you can type a question to get help information.

Contains buttons you can use to select common commands, such as Save and Open.

Formatting Toolbar

Contains buttons you can use to select common formatting commands, such as Bold and Underline.

Outline and Slides Tabs

Provide two ways of viewing the slides in your presentation.

Slide Pane

Displays the current slide. 12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

View Buttons

Notes Pane

Drawing Toolbar

Task Pane

Allow you to quickly change the way your presentation is displayed on the screen.

Displays the notes you have created for the current slide.

Contains buttons to help you work with objects in your presentation.

Contains options you can select to perform common tasks, such as creating a new presentation or searching for help information.

TEAM165 LinG

CREATE A PRESENTATION USING THE AUTOCONTENT WIZARD AutoContent Wizar d

You can use the AutoContent Wizard to create a presentation. The wizard asks you a series of questions and then sets up a presentation based on your answers.

M ar ke tin g g tin M ar ankeOv Pl jec tanerv iew ProPl Smithh Katie Smit By By Katie

Using the AutoContent Wizard to create a presentation is useful when you want ideas on how to compose and organize your presentation.

USING THE AUTOCONTENT WIZARD

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Click File. ¤ Click New.

The New Presentation task pane appears.

‹ Click From AutoContent wizard

to create a new presentation using the AutoContent Wizard.

166

Microsoft Office Pow...

The AutoContent Wizard appears, displaying a brief description of the wizard.

12:00 PM

› Click Next to start creating your presentation.

TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

Why did a dialog box appear after I selected a presentation in the AutoContent Wizard?

A dialog box appears if the presentation you selected is not installed on your computer. Insert the CD-ROM disc you used to install Office XP into your CD-ROM drive and then click Yes to install the presentation.

Note: A window may appear on your screen. Click in the top right corner of the window to close the window.

Tip

Is there another way to create a presentation?

If you want to design your own presentation without using the content and format PowerPoint suggests, you can create a blank presentation. Creating a blank presentation allows you to create and design each slide individually. To create a blank presentation, see page 170.

W

NE

Product/Services Overview

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

ˇ Click the category that best describes the type of presentation you want to create.

Note: If you are not sure which category to select, click All to display all the available presentations.

Á This area lists the presentations in the category you selected. Click the presentation that best suits your needs.

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

° Click the type of

· Click Next to continue.

output you want to use for your presentation ( changes to ).

You can click Back at any time to return to a previous step and change your answers.

‡ Click Next to continue. TEAM167 LinG

CREATE A PRESENTATION USING THE AUTOCONTENT WIZARD The AutoContent Wizard allows you to specify a title for the first slide in your presentation. You can also specify information you want to appear on each slide, such as the current date and the name of your company.

Marketing Plan

Presentation title Footer Date last updated Slide number

9/16/02

DATE P STAM

ABC Corporation

1

2

/02 9/16

3

4

5

6

7

USING THE AUTOCONTENT WIZARD (CONTINUED)

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

‚ Click this area and

— To add footer text

type the title you want to appear on the first slide in your presentation.

to each slide in your presentation, click this area and then type the text.

168

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

PowerPoint will add the current date and slide number to each slide in your presentation.

± If you do not want to add the current date or slide number, click the option you do not want to add ( changes to ).

Note: If you add the current date, PowerPoint will update the date displayed on the slides every time you open the presentation.

¡ Click Next to continue. TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

How do I replace the text suggestions that PowerPoint provides with my own text?

Tip

To replace the text suggestions, drag the mouse over the text to select the text and then type the text you want to use.

2

Revenue by Division

Can I change the design of the presentation I created using the AutoContent Wizard?

The design PowerPoint uses for the presentation depends on the presentation type you selected in the AutoContent Wizard. You can change the design of the presentation to better suit the content of the presentation. To change the design, see page 214.

State Revenue for D State Revenue for D 2

Quarterly Earnings State Revenue for D

1

State Revenue for D

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

The wizard indicates that you have provided all the answers needed to create your presentation.

™ Click Finish to create your presentation.

Microsoft Office Pow...

This area displays text suggestions PowerPoint provides for each slide in your presentation. You can replace this text with your own text. To replace the text, see the top of this page.

12:00 PM

This area displays the current slide.

TEAM169 LinG

CREATE A BLANK PRESENTATION

You can use PowerPoint to create a blank presentation. Blank presentations are useful when you want to create your own design and content for your slides.

Sunshine Vacations the lowest fares Providing travelers with in the industry r to the most popula Offering more flights ns destinatio able from our knowledge Expert travel advice staff

When you create a blank presentation, PowerPoint creates only the first slide. You can add additional slides to your presentation as you need them. To add a slide to your presentation, see page 190.

CREATE A BLANK PRESENTATION

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Click File. ¤ Click New.

The New Presentation task pane appears.

‹ Click Blank presentation. PowerPoint creates the blank presentation and displays the first slide on your screen.

170

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

This area displays the Slide Layout task pane, which you can use to select a layout for the first slide in the presentation. For information on slide layouts, see page 192.

› Click the layout you want to use. The slide displays the layout you selected. To add text to the slide, see page 182. To add objects to the slide, see pages 194 to 205.

TEAM LinG

1

SAVE A PRESENTATION

Getting Started

USING POWERPOINT

You can save your presentation to store it for future use. This allows you to later review and make changes to the presentation.

ght! Dinner Toni

Eleanor and

Lou Whitman

You should regularly save changes you make to a presentation to avoid losing your work. SAVE A PRESENTATION [Presentation1]

- [Presentation1]

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Click

to save your presentation.

The Save As dialog box appears.

¤ Type a name for the presentation.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

Note: If you previously saved your presentation, the Save As dialog box will not appear since you have already named the presentation.

This area shows the location where PowerPoint will store your presentation. You can click this area to change the location.

This area allows you to access commonly used locations. You can click a location to save your presentation in the location.

‹ Click Save to save your presentation. TEAM171 LinG

OPEN A PRESENTATION

You can open a saved presentation to view the presentation on your screen. This allows you to review and make changes to the presentation. AD3

HSUP

AD3

POWE POWER R

RESET

COMPACT COMPACT

OPEN A PRESENTATION

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Click

to open a presentation.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

The Open dialog box appears.

Microsoft Office Pow...

This area shows the location of the displayed presentations. You can click this area to change the location.

12:00 PM

This area allows you to access presentations in commonly used locations. You can click a location to display the presentations stored in the location.

¤ Click the name of the 172

presentation you want to open. TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

How can I quickly open a presentation I recently worked with?

PowerPoint remembers the names of the last four presentations you worked with. You can use the Getting Started task pane or the File menu to quickly open any of these presentations.

Note: The Getting Started task pane appears each time you start PowerPoint. To display the Getting Started task pane, see page 8.

Use the Task Pane

Use the File Menu

⁄ Click the name of the

⁄ Click File. ¤ Click the name of the

presentation you want to open.

Note: If the name of the presentation is not displayed, position the mouse over the bottom of the task pane to display the name.

presentation you want to open.

Note: If the name of the presentation you want is not displayed, position the mouse over the bottom of the menu to display the name.

School Improvement Project

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

This area displays the first slide in the presentation you selected.

‹ Click Open to open the presentation.

The presentation opens and appears on your screen. You can now review and make changes to the presentation.

Dinner Tonight

School Improvement...

12:00 PM

This area displays the name of the open presentation.

CLOSE A PRESENTATION

If you already had a presentation open, the new presentation appears in a new window. You can click the buttons on the taskbar to switch between the open presentations.

working with a presentation, click to close the presentation.

⁄ When you finish

TEAM173 LinG

CHANGE THE VIEW OF A PRESENTATION

You can view your presentation in several different ways on your screen.

Click to add notes

Click to add notes

Each view displays the same presentation. If you make changes to your presentation in one view, the other views will also display the changes.

Slide Show View

Slide Sorter View

Normal View

AD3 PUSH

CHANGE THE VIEW OF A PRESENTATION

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

NORMAL VIEW

¤ These tabs offer two ways

⁄ Click

to view the slides in your presentation. Click the tab for the method you want to use.

to display your presentation in the Normal view.

Outline - Display the text on each slide. Slides - Display a

174

miniature version of each slide.

Microsoft Office Pow...

This area displays a miniature version of each slide or the text on each slide, depending on the tab you selected.

‹ Click a slide or the

12:00 PM

This area displays the slide you selected and any notes you have created for the slide. For information on notes, see page 226.

text for a slide of interest.

TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

When would I use each view?

Normal view

Slide Sorter view

Slide Show view

Useful for creating and editing your presentation. The Normal view allows you to see different parts of your presentation, such as the current slide and any notes you have created for the current slide, on a single screen.

Useful for reorganizing and deleting slides. The Slide Sorter view allows you to see the overall organization of your presentation.

Useful for previewing your presentation. The Slide Show view allows you to view your presentation the way your audience will see the presentation.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

SLIDE SORTER VIEW

SLIDE SHOW VIEW

⁄ Click

⁄ Click

to display your presentation in the Slide Sorter view. This area displays a miniature version of each slide in your presentation.

to display your presentation in the Slide Show view.

A full-screen version of the current slide appears on your screen.

You can click anywhere on the current slide to move through the slides in your presentation and view the entire slide show. For more information on viewing a slide show, see page 224.

TEAM175 LinG

BROWSE THROUGH A PRESENTATION

Since your computer screen cannot display your entire presentation at once, you must browse through your presentation to view other areas of the presentation.

AD3 PUSH

BROWSE THROUGH A PRESENTATION

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Click

to display your presentation in the Normal view.

¤ Click the Outline ( ) tab to display the text in your presentation.

176

12:00 PM

You can use this scroll bar to browse through all the text in your presentation.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

SCROLL UP

SCROLL DOWN

⁄ Click

⁄ Click

to scroll up one line or slide.

to scroll down one line or slide.

You can use this scroll bar to browse through all the slides in your presentation.

TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

How can I browse through the notes in my presentation?

Tip

A wheeled mouse has a wheel between the left and right mouse buttons. Rolling this wheel forward or backward lets you quickly scroll up or down through your presentation. The Microsoft IntelliMouse is a popular example of a wheeled mouse.

Welco lcome me every everyone to to the the presenta presentation n and remind them I will be answeri ng questions once the pre sentation is finished.

Any notes you have created for the current slide appear in the Notes pane.

Microsoft Office Pow...

QUICKLY SCROLL

⁄ To quickly scroll through your presentation, drag the scroll box along the scroll bar.

How do I use a wheeled mouse to browse through my presentation?

⁄ To browse through the notes, click or .

Note: For information on creating notes, see page 226.

12:00 PM

As you drag this scroll box, a yellow box appears indicating the number and title of the slide you will display.

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

DISPLAY PREVIOUS OR NEXT SLIDE

⁄ Click one of the following buttons. Display previous slide Display next slide

TEAM177 LinG

E-MAIL A PRESENTATION

PowerPoint allows you to quickly e-mail your presentation to a friend, family member or colleague.

ABC Corp Overv orate iew

MAIL

Market

ABC Corporate Overview Company Repo rt By Jim Jones ABC Corporation

AD3

H SUP

AD3

Maxi

FAX MODEM

288

MG

POWER POWER

RESET

COMPACT COMPACT

AA

CH

CH

RQ

SQ

TR

HR

Before you can e-mail a presentation, Microsoft Office Outlook 2003 must be set up on your computer.

E-MAIL A PRESENTATION

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Click

to e-mail the presentation you currently have open.

178

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

Microsoft Office Pow...

A window appears for the e-mail message. This area displays the name and size of the presentation.

Healthy Eating.ppt - ...

12:00 PM

¤ Click this area and type the e-mail address of each person you want to receive the message. Separate each address with a semicolon (;).

TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

How can I address an e-mail message?

Tip

Why is the person I sent my presentation to unable to view my presentation properly?

When you e-mail a presentation, the presentation is sent as an attached file, which the recipient must open in PowerPoint on their own computer. If the recipient is using an earlier version of PowerPoint, some features of your presentation may not work properly on their computer.

To

Sends the message to each person you specify.

Microsoft PowerPoint - [Presentation1]

Carbon Copy (Cc)

Sends a copy of the message to people who are not directly involved, but would be interested in the message. 03

t 20

oin erP

Pow

Microsoft Office Pow...

‹ To send a copy of the message, click this area and type the e-mail address of each person you want to receive a copy. Separate each address with a semicolon (;).

Healthy Eating.ppt - ...

12:00 PM

› Click this area and type a subject for the message.

Note: If a subject already exists, you can drag the mouse over the existing subject and then type a new subject.

Microsoft Office Pow...

ˇ To include a message with the presentation you are e-mailing, click this area and type the message.

Our New Healthy Eati...

12:00 PM

Á Click Send to send the message with the attached presentation.

TEAM179 LinG

SELECT TEXT Delicious Before making changes to text in your presentation, you will often need to select the text you want to work with. Selected text appears highlighted on your screen.

Your meals are prepared by CordonBleu trained chefs. They use only the finest and freshest ingredients. We can accommodate many different tastes and styles.

We can accommodate many different tastes and styles. COMPACT COMPACT

R POWE

RESET

AD3

Num Lock

Caps Lock

Scroll Lock

SELECT TEXT

Microsoft Office Pow...

SELECT A WORD

⁄ Double-click the word you want to select.

180

12:00 PM

To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

SELECT A SENTENCE

¤ Press and hold down

⁄ Click anywhere in the

the Ctrl key as you click the sentence again.

sentence you want to select.

TEAM LinG

2

Edit Slides

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

How can I quickly select all the text on a slide?

You can use the Outline tab to quickly select all the text on a slide. The Outline tab displays the text for all the slides in your presentation.

Tip

Can I quickly select all the text in my presentation?

Yes. You can use the Outline tab to quickly select all the text in your presentation. Availability To order, or to receive our brochure and more information, please call: us at: (415) 555-5468

Overview We provide meals for the elderly, handicapped and people simply too busy to prepare a delicious meal that is nutritious, satisfying and low in fat!

Or visit our Web site at: www.dinnertonight.com We look forward to pampering you soon!

Our Organization

⁄ Click the Outline ( ) tab to display the text for all your slides.

⁄ Click the Outline (

¤ Click the number of the slide that

¤ Click anywhere in the Outline tab. ‹ Press and hold down the Ctrl key as

) tab to display the text for all your slides.

contains the text you want to select.

you press the A key to select all the text.

Microsoft Office Pow...

SELECT A POINT

⁄ Click the bullet ( beside the point you want to select.

)

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

SELECT ANY AMOUNT OF TEXT

¤ Drag the mouse

⁄ Position the mouse

over the text you want to select.

over the first word you want to select.

TEAM181 LinG

INSERT TEXT

PowerPoint allows you to type text onto a slide in your presentation quickly and easily.

January 12, 2003 Meeting Agenda

minutes

Call to order

Review from previous meeting

You can insert text in a text placeholder on a slide. If the slide you want to add text to does not have a text placeholder, you can change the layout of the slide. For information on changing the slide layout, see page 192.

Product development report

INSERT CHARACTERS

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Click where you want to insert the new text.

12:00 PM

The text you type will appear where the insertion point flashes on your screen.

Microsoft Office Pow...

¤ Type the text you want to insert.

12:00 PM

To insert a blank space, press the Spacebar.

Note: You can press the , , or key to move the insertion point.

182

TEAM LinG

2

Edit Slides

USING POWERPOINT

Is there another way to insert text?

Tip

Why does the AutoFit Options button ( ) appear when I insert text in a placeholder on a slide?

Tip

You can also insert text on the Outline tab in the Normal view. The Outline tab displays all the text for your presentation. Text you insert on the Outline tab will automatically appear on the slide in the Slide pane. For more information on the Outline tab, see page 174.

1

Business Plan During this presentation, y see why Hungry Pete's is lifetime business opportun end of the presentation, it that the restaurant will be consumers and a good inv for entrepreneurs.

2

Introduction • • • • • •

3

Mission statement Products and services Start-up costs Other expenses Goals Conclusion

If you insert more text than a placeholder can hold, PowerPoint automatically resizes the text to fit in the placeholder and the AutoFit Options button ( ) appears. The AutoFit Options button allows you to change how the text fits in the placeholder. For example, you can specify you do not want PowerPoint to automatically resize the text.

Business Plan During this presentation, you will see why Hungry Pete's is a once in a lifetime business opportunity. By the end of the presentation, it will be clear that the restaurant will be a hit with consumers and a good investment for entrepreneurs.

Mission Statement To provide customers with quality food and great serv

Outline tab

Slide pane

INSERT A NEW POINT

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Click at the end of the point directly above where you want to insert a new point.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

¤ Press the

Enter key to insert a blank line for the new point.

12:00 PM

‹ Type the text for the new point.

TEAM183 LinG

DELETE TEXT

You can delete text from a slide to remove information you no longer need in your presentation.

DELETE TEXT

books and

books and

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Select the text you want to delete. To select text, see page 180.

184

12:00 PM

¤ Press the

Delete key to remove the text from your presentation.

Microsoft Office Pow...

The text disappears. To delete a single character, click to the right of the character you want to delete and then press the Backspace key. PowerPoint will delete the character to the left of the flashing insertion point.

12:00 PM

Note: You can also perform these steps to delete text on the Outline tab in the Normal view. The Outline tab displays the text for all the slides in your presentation. For more information on the Outline tab, see page 174.

TEAM LinG

2

UNDO CHANGES

Edit Slides

USING POWERPOINT

PowerPoint remembers the last changes you made to your presentation. If you regret these changes, you can cancel them by using the Undo feature.

When canceling changes, you must start with the change you made most recently and work backwards through your changes. UNDO CHANGES

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Click

to undo the last change you made to your presentation.

12:00 PM

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

PowerPoint cancels the last change you made to your presentation.

To reverse the results of using the Undo feature, click .

You can repeat step 1 to cancel previous changes you made.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

TEAM185 LinG

MOVE OR COPY TEXT

You can move or copy text to a new location in your presentation. You can move or copy text directly on your slides or in the outline of your presentation.

er year on days p 15 vacati

Moving text is useful when you want to reorganize the ideas in your presentation. When you move text, the text disappears from its original location.

Company Information 35 hours per week Hours: 9:00 AM - 5:00 PM

Copying text allows you to repeat information in your presentation without having to retype the text. When you copy text, the text appears in both the original and new locations. MOVE OR COPY TEXT

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

USING DRAG AND DROP

¤ Position the mouse

⁄ Select the text

the selected text ( to ).

you want to move. To select text, see page 180.

186

over changes

‹ To move the text, drag the

Microsoft Office Pow...

The text moves to the new location.

12:00 PM

To copy text, perform steps 1 to 3, except press and hold

down the Ctrl key as you perform step 3.

mouse to where you want to place the text.

Note: The text will appear where you position the dotted insertion point on your screen.

TEAM LinG

2

Edit Slides

USING POWERPOINT

How can I use the Clipboard task pane to move or copy text?

Tip

Tip

USING THE TOOLBAR BUTTONS

⁄ Select the text you want to move or copy. To select text, see page 180.

¤ Click one of the following buttons. Move text Copy text

)

You can use the Paste Options button ( ) to change the format of the text you have moved or copied. For example, you can choose to keep the original formatting of the text by selecting Keep Source Formatting or change the formatting of the text to match the text in the new location by selecting Keep Text Only. Click the Paste Options button to display a list of options and then select the option you want to use. The Paste Options button is available only until you perform another task.

The Clipboard task pane displays up to the last 24 items you have selected to move or copy. To place a clipboard item in your presentation, click the location where you want the item to appear and then click the item in the task pane. For more information on task panes, see page 8.

Microsoft Office Pow...

Why does the Paste Options button ( appear when I move or copy text?

12:00 PM

Note: If the button you want is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button. The Clipboard task pane may appear. To use the Clipboard task pane, see the top of this page.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

‹ Click the location where you want to place the text.

› Click

to place the text in the new location.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button. The text appears in the new location.

TEAM187 LinG

CHECK SPELLING

You can find and correct all the spelling errors in your presentation.

PowerPoint does not check the spelling of text in some objects, such as charts and WordArt. PowerPoint automatically underlines misspelled words in red. The underlines will not appear when you print your presentation or view the slide show.

CHECK SPELLING

meals

mails mails

meals

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Click

to start the spell check.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

188

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

The Spelling dialog box appears if PowerPoint finds a misspelled word in your presentation.

¤ Click the word you want to use to correct the misspelled word. ‹ Click Change to

To skip the word and continue checking your presentation, click Ignore.

This area displays the first misspelled word.

replace the misspelled word with the word you selected.

Note: To skip the word and all other occurrences of the word, click Ignore All.

This area displays suggestions for correcting the word.

TEAM LinG

2

Edit Slides

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

Can PowerPoint automatically correct my typing mistakes?

Tip

PowerPoint automatically corrects common spelling errors, typos and capitalization errors as you type. Here are a few examples.

acheive claer developement foriegn hte

clear development foreign the occasion

recomend

recommend

statment wtih

statement with

monday

Monday

SPelling

Spelling

Microsoft Office Pow...

› Correct or ignore misspelled words until this dialog box appears, telling you the spell check is complete.

PowerPoint compares every word in your presentation to words in its dictionary. If a word in your presentation does not exist in the dictionary, the word is considered misspelled. PowerPoint will not find a correctly spelled word used in the wrong context, such as, “We have been in business for sit years.” You should review your presentation carefully to find this type of error.

achieve

occassion

How does PowerPoint find spelling errors in my presentation?

12:00 PM

ˇ Click OK to close the dialog box.

Microsoft Office Pow...

CORRECT ONE MISPELLED WORD

⁄ Right-click the misspelled word you want to correct. A menu appears with suggestions to correct the word.

12:00 PM

¤ To replace the misspelled word with one of the suggestions, click the suggestion. Note: If you do not want to use any of the suggestions to correct the word, click outside the menu to close the menu.

TEAM189 LinG

ADD A NEW SLIDE

You can insert a new slide into your presentation to add a new topic you want to discuss.

Hungry Pete's

Introduction

Mission Statement

Business Proposal

Pr oj

ec

te

d

Sa

le

Products Offered

Business Plan

s Services Offered

Goals

Accomplished to Date

PowerPoint allows you to choose which layout you want to use for the new slide.

ADD A NEW SLIDE

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Click the slide you

¤ Click New Slide

want to appear before the new slide.

to add a new slide.

190

Note: If the New Slide button is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

Microsoft Office Pow...

This area displays a miniature version of the new slide. This area displays the new slide.

12:00 PM

The Slide Layout task pane appears, allowing you to select a layout for the new slide.

TEAM LinG

2

Edit Slides

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

How much text should I display on a slide?

You should be careful not to include too much text on a slide in your presentation. If you add too much text to a slide, the slide may be difficult to read and you will minimize the impact of important ideas. If a slide contains too much text, you should add a new slide to accommodate some of the text.

Tip

What types of layouts can I use for a new slide?

Each slide layout displays a different arrangement of placeholders, which determine the position of text and objects on a slide. The icons in the placeholders indicate the type of information you can add to the placeholder. A list of points

Consumer ConsumerAttractions Attractions

¥Coloring forchildren ¥Coloringcontests contests for children ¥Birthday specials ¥Birthday specials ¥Private party lounge

¥Private party lounge

An object such as a table, chart, clip art image or diagram

Consumer Attractions ¥Coloring contests for children ¥Birthday specials ¥Private party lounge

Investor Attractions ¥Low risk investment ¥Unique business idea ¥Short term results expected within 1 year

A clip art image Investor Attractions ¥Low risk investment ¥Unique business idea ¥Short term results expected within 1 year

Microsoft Office Pow...

This area displays the available layouts for the slide. The layout determines the position of text and objects on the slide.

A chart

12:00 PM

You can use the scroll bar to browse through the available layouts.

‹ Click the layout you

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

The slide changes to the layout you selected.

Note: To select a different layout, repeat step 3.

› When the slide displays the layout you want to use, you can click to hide the Slide Layout task pane.

want to use for the new slide.

TEAM191 LinG

CHANGE THE SLIDE LAYOUT

You can change the layout of a slide in your presentation to accommodate text and objects you want to add.

Each slide layout displays a different arrangement of placeholders. Placeholders allow you to easily add objects you want to appear on a slide, such as a clip art image or a chart. CHANGE THE SLIDE LAYOUT

12:00 PM

School Improvement... Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

⁄ Display the slide

‹ Click Slide Layout.

you want to change to a new layout.

The Slide Layout task pane appears.

¤ Click Format.

192

12:00 PM

School Improvement...

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

This area displays the available slide layouts.

› Click the layout you want to use.

You can use the scroll bar to browse through the layouts.

TEAM LinG

3

Add Objects to Slides

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

How can I determine the types of placeholders a slide layout contains?

Tip

What should I consider when changing the slide layout?

If you have already added text or an object to a slide, you should choose a slide layout that includes a placeholder for the type of information you added. This helps to ensure that the slide will not become cluttered with overlapping objects and placeholders.

The icons displayed on each slide layout indicate the types of placeholders in the layout. Title List of points Object such as a table, chart, clip art image or diagram Clip art image Chart 321

Media clip Table Diagram or organization chart

School Improvement... Microsoft Office Pow...

The slide changes to the layout you selected.

12:00 PM 12:00 PM

Note: To select a different layout, repeat step 4 .

School Improvement... Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM 12:00 PM

ˇ When you finish selecting a slide layout, you can click to hide the Slide Layout task pane.

TEAM193 LinG

ADD AN AUTOSHAPE

PowerPoint provides ready-made shapes, called AutoShapes, that you can add to your slides.

PowerPoint offers several types of AutoShapes, such as arrows, stars and banners. ADD AN AUTOSHAPE

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

⁄ Display the slide

‹ Click the type of

ˇ Position the mouse

Á Drag the mouse

you want to add an AutoShape to.

AutoShape you want to add.

where you want to begin drawing the AutoShape.

until the AutoShape is the size you want.

¤ Click AutoShapes.

› Click the AutoShape you want to add.

194

TEAM LinG

3

Add Objects to Slides

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

Can I add text to an AutoShape?

Tip

You can add text to most AutoShapes. This is particularly useful when creating banner and callout AutoShapes. To add text to an AutoShape, click the AutoShape and then type the text you want the AutoShape to display. To change the size of the text, see page 209.

You can use the green and yellow dots to change the appearance of an AutoShape. To rotate an AutoShape, position the mouse over the green dot ( ) and then drag the mouse to a new position. To change the design of an AutoShape, position the mouse over the yellow dot ( ) and then drag the mouse until the shape displays the design you want.

SALE!

Microsoft Office Pow...

The AutoShape appears on the slide.

Note: To change the color of an AutoShape, see page 213.

Why do green and yellow dots appear on some AutoShapes?

12:00 PM

The handles ( ) around the AutoShape allow you to change the size of the AutoShape. To move or resize an AutoShape, see page 206.

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

DELETE AN AUTOSHAPE

¤ Press the

⁄ Click the AutoShape

key to remove the AutoShape from the slide.

you want to delete.

Delete

To deselect an AutoShape, click outside the AutoShape.

TEAM195 LinG

ADD WORDART

You can add WordArt to a slide in your presentation to display a decorative title or draw attention to important information.

SALES 5 4

5

3

4

2

3

1

2

0

1 0

2002

2001

WordArt allows you to create eye-catching text that is skewed, curved, rotated, stretched, threedimensional or even vertical. ADD WORDART

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

⁄ Display the slide

¤ Click

you want to add WordArt to.

WordArt.

to add

Microsoft Office Pow...

The WordArt Gallery dialog box appears.

12:00 PM

› Click OK to confirm your selection.

‹ Click the WordArt style you want to use.

196

TEAM LinG

3

Add Objects to Slides

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

How do I edit WordArt?

Tip

To edit WordArt text, double-click the WordArt to display the Edit WordArt Text dialog box. Then perform steps 5 and 6 below to specify the new text you want the WordArt to display.

Microsoft Office Pow...

The Edit WordArt Text dialog box appears.

ˇ Type the text you want the WordArt to display.

When I add WordArt to a slide, why does the WordArt toolbar appear?

The WordArt toolbar contains buttons that allow you to change the appearance of WordArt. For example, you can click to display all the letters in WordArt at the same height.

12:00 PM

Á Click OK to add the WordArt to the slide.

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

The WordArt appears on the slide.

DELETE WORDART

The handles ( ) around the WordArt allow you to change the size of the WordArt. To move or resize WordArt, see page 206.

want to delete and then press the Delete key.

To deselect WordArt, click outside the WordArt.

⁄ Click the WordArt you

TEAM197 LinG

ADD A PICTURE

You can add a picture stored on your computer to a slide in your presentation. Activitie

s Offere

•

Skiing

•

Campi

•

Fishin

•

d

ng

g Rafting

•

Swimm

•

Sights

ing eeing

Adding a picture is useful when you want to display your company logo or a picture of your products on a slide.

About Our Company

Resort

¥ Blue Springs Resort is located in Colorado’s Rocky Mountains. ¥ We offer activities year-round! ¥ It is family owned and

operated.

Rogers

ADD A PICTURE

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Display the slide you

‹ Click the picture

want to add a picture to.

icon ( ) to add a picture to the slide.

¤ Change the layout of the slide to one that includes a placeholder for a picture. To change the slide layout, see page 192.

198

Microsoft Office Pow...

The Insert Picture dialog box appears. This area shows the location of the displayed pictures. You can click this area to change the location.

12:00 PM

This area allows you to access pictures in commonly used locations. You can click a location to display the pictures stored in the location.

TEAM LinG

3

Add Objects to Slides

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

Where can I obtain pictures?

Tip

There are many places, such as Web sites and computer stores, that offer images you can use on your slides. You can also use a scanner to scan pictures into your computer or create your own pictures using an image editing program, such as Jasc Paint Shop Pro.

Why did the Picture toolbar appear when I added a picture to a slide?

The Picture toolbar contains buttons that allow you to change the appearance of a picture. For example, you can click or to increase or decrease the brightness of a picture. If the Picture toolbar does not appear, see page 10 to display the toolbar.

Baseball Game

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

› Click the picture you want to add to the slide.

ˇ Click Insert to add the picture to the slide.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

The picture appears on the slide.

DELETE A PICTURE

The handles ( ) around the picture allow you to change the size of the picture. To move or resize a picture, see page 206.

want to delete and then press the Delete key.

To deselect the picture, click outside the picture.

⁄ Click the picture you

TEAM199 LinG

ADD A CLIP ART IMAGE

You can add a professionally designed clip art image to a slide. Clip art images can help illustrate concepts and make your presentation more interesting and entertaining.

ADD A CLIP ART IMAGE

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Display the slide you want

‹ Click the clip art

to add a clip art image to.

icon ( ) to add a clip art image.

¤ Change the layout of the slide to one that includes a placeholder for a clip art image. To change the layout of a slide, see page 192.

200

Note: Depending on the layout you chose in step 2, you may need to double-click the placeholder to add a clip art image.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

The Select Picture dialog box appears. This area displays the clip art images you can add to your slide. You can use the scroll bar to browse through the clip art images.

› Click the clip art image you want to add to your slide.

ˇ Click OK to add the clip art image to your slide. TEAM LinG

3

Add Objects to Slides

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

Can I search for clip art images?

Tip

You can search for clip art images by specifying one or more words of interest in the Select Picture dialog box.

⁄ In the Select boats

Picture dialog box, click this area and type a word that describes the clip art image you want to search for. Then press the Enter key.

Where can I obtain more clip art images?

You can buy collections of clip art images at computer stores. Many Web sites, such as www.clipartconnection.com and www.noeticart.com, also offer clip art images you can use on your slides.

Clip Huge le

Art

Sa

The dialog box will display the clip art images that match the words you specify.

Microsoft Office Pow...

The clip art image appears on the slide.

12:00 PM

The handles ( ) around the clip art image allow you to change the size of the image. To move or resize a clip art image, see page 206.

Microsoft Office Pow...

The Picture toolbar may also appear, displaying buttons that allow you to change the clip art image.

Note: If the Picture toolbar does not appear, see page 10 to display the toolbar.

12:00 PM

To deselect a clip art image, click outside the image. DELETE A CLIP ART IMAGE

⁄ Click the clip art image you want to delete and then press the Delete key.

201

ADD A CHART

You can add a chart to a slide to show trends and compare data.

A chart is more visually appealing and often easier to understand than a list of numbers. ADD A CHART

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Display the slide you

‹ Click the chart icon

want to add a chart to.

(

¤ Change the layout of

Note: Depending on the layout you chose, you may need to double-click the placeholder to add a chart.

the slide to one that includes a placeholder for a chart. To change the slide layout, see page 192.

202

) to add a chart.

Microsoft Office Pow...

A datasheet appears, displaying sample data to show you where to enter information. If the datasheet does not appear, click to display the datasheet.

12:00 PM

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

› To replace the data in a cell, click the cell. A thick border appears around the cell. TEAM LinG

3

Add Objects to Slides

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

How do I change the data displayed in a chart?

Tip

Double-click the chart to activate the chart and display the datasheet. You can then perform steps 4 to 7 below to change the data displayed in the chart.

How can I add a chart without changing the slide layout?

You can click the Insert Chart button ( ) and then perform steps 4 to 7 below to add a chart to a slide without first changing the layout of the slide. Healthy Drinks Water Skim Milk Fruit Juice Sparkling Water

Click Click Click

Microsoft Office Pow...

ˇ Type your data and then press the Enter key. Note: To remove data from a cell and leave the cell empty, click the cell and then press the Delete key.

Á Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you finish entering all your data.

12:00 PM

As you enter data, PowerPoint updates the chart on the slide.

The datasheet disappears and you can clearly view the chart on the slide.

‡ When you finish

The handles ( ) around the chart allow you to change the size of the chart. To move or resize a chart, see page 206.

entering data for the chart, click a blank area on your screen.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

DELETE A CHART

⁄ Click the chart you want to delete and then press the Delete key.

TEAM203 LinG

ADD A DIAGRAM

You can add a diagram to a slide to illustrate a concept or idea.

PowerPoint offers several types of diagrams you can choose from, including Pyramid, Radial, Venn and Target diagrams. ADD A DIAGRAM

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

⁄ Display the slide you

‹ Click the diagram

want to add a diagram to.

¤ Change the layout of

icon ( ) to add a diagram to the slide.

the slide to one that includes a placeholder for a diagram. To change the slide layout, see page 192.

Note: Depending on the layout you chose, you may need to double-click the placeholder to add a diagram.

204

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

› Click the type of

This area displays a description of the diagram you selected.

diagram you want to add to the slide.

ˇ Click OK to add the diagram to the slide.

The Diagram Gallery dialog box appears.

TEAM LinG

3

Add Objects to Slides

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

When adding a shape to an organization chart, what options are available?

Tip

Coworker

Subordinate

Adds a shape beside the shape you selected.

Adds a shape below the shape you selected. Assistant

Uses an elbow connector to add a shape below the shape you selected.

How do I delete a diagram?

⁄ To delete a diagram, click a blank area in the diagram you want to delete.

Microsoft Office Pow...

The diagram appears on the slide. ADD A SHAPE

⁄ To add another shape to the diagram, click the shape above or beside the area where you want the new shape to appear.

Click to add text

¤ Press the

Delete

key.

Eleanor

Click to add text

Click to add text

A border appears around the diagram.

Manager

Click to add text

12:00 PM

¤ Click Insert Shape. Note: When adding a shape to an organization chart, you can click beside Insert Shape to display a list of options. For more information, see the top of this page.

Lou

Mary

Mark

Head Chef

Asst. Chef

Cook

Jane Kitchen Assistant

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

The new shape appears in the diagram.

¤ Type the text you want to add.

ADD TEXT TO A DIAGRAM

‹ When you finish

⁄ Click an area where

typing the text, click outside the text area.

you want to add text. A border appears around the area if you can add text to the area.

› Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each area of text you want to add.

TEAM205 LinG

MOVE OR RESIZE AN OBJECT

You can change the location and size of an object on a slide.

- MOVE -

- RESIZE PowerPoint allows you to move and resize objects such as AutoShapes, WordArt, pictures, clip art images and charts. MOVE AN OBJECT

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

⁄ Click the object you

‹ Drag the object to a

want to move. Handles ( ) appear around the object.

new location on the slide.

¤ Position the mouse over an edge of the object ( changes to ).

206

A dashed line indicates where the object will appear.

Microsoft Office Pow...

The object appears in the new location.

12:00 PM

To deselect the object, click outside the object.

TEAM LinG

3

Add Objects to Slides

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

How can I change the way an object is moved or resized?

Move Only Horizontally or Vertically

Maintain Object's Center When Resizing

To move an object only horizontally or vertically on a slide, press and hold down the Shift key as you move the object.

To keep the center of an object in the same place while resizing the object, press and hold down the Ctrl key as you resize the object.

RESIZE AN OBJECT

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

⁄ Click the object you

‹ Drag the handle

want to resize. Handles ( ) appear around the object.

until the object is the size you want.

¤ Position the mouse

A dashed line shows the new size.

over one of the handles ( changes to , , or ).

Microsoft Office Pow...

The object appears in the new size.

12:00 PM

To deselect the object, click outside the object.

TEAM207 LinG

CHANGE FONT OF TEXT

You can change the font of text to enhance the appearance of a slide.

You should consider your audience when choosing a font. For example, you may want to choose an informal font, such as Comic Sans MS, for a presentation to your co-workers and a conservative font, such as Times New Roman, for a presentation to your clients. CHANGE FONT OF TEXT

Arial

BCES Elementary School

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Select the text you

12:00 PM

want to change to a different font. To select text, see page 180.

Note: If the Font area is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the area.

¤ Click

‹ Click the font you

in this area to display a list of the available fonts.

208

Microsoft Office Pow...

The text you selected changes to the new font.

12:00 PM

To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

want to use.

Note: PowerPoint displays the fonts you have most recently used at the top of the list.

TEAM LinG

4

CHANGE SIZE OF TEXT

Enhance a Presentation

USING POWERPOINT

You can increase or decrease the size of text on a slide.

Larger text is easier to read, but smaller text allows you to fit more information on a slide. PowerPoint measures the size of text in points. There are 72 points in an inch. CHANGE SIZE OF TEXT

14

60

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Select the text you

12:00 PM

want to change to a new size. To select text, see page 180.

Note: If the Font Size area is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the area.

¤ Click

‹ Click the size you

in this area to display a list of the available sizes.

want to use.

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

The text you selected changes to the new size.

QUICKLY CHANGE SIZE OF TEXT

To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

¤ Click

⁄ Select the text you want to change to a new size. or to increase or decrease the size of the text.

Note: If the button you want is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

TEAM209 LinG

CHANGE STYLE OF TEXT

You can bold, italicize, underline or add a shadow to text to emphasize information on a slide.

You can add one style or a combination of styles to text. However, keep in mind that adding too many styles to text can be distracting and make the text difficult to read. CHANGE STYLE OF TEXT

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

⁄ Select the text you

Bold

want to bold, italicize, underline or add a shadow to. To select text, see page 180.

Italic

¤ Click one of the following buttons.

210

Underline Shadow

Note: If the button you want is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

Microsoft Office Pow...

The text you selected appears in the new style. To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

12:00 PM

To remove a bold, italic, underline or shadow style, repeat steps 1 and 2.

TEAM LinG

4

CHANGE ALIGNMENT OF TEXT

Enhance a Presentation

USING POWERPOINT

You can change the alignment of text on a slide to enhance the appearance of the slide.

CHANGE ALIGNMENT OF TEXT

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Select the text you

¤ Click one of the

want to align differently. To select text, see page 180.

following buttons. Left align Center Right align Note: If the button you want is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

The text appears in the new alignment.

To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

TEAM211 LinG

CHANGE TEXT COLOR

You can change the color of text on a slide to enhance the appearance of the slide and draw attention to important information.

CHANGE TEXT COLOR

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Select the text you

‹ Click the color you

want to change to a different color. To select text, see page 180.

want to use.

¤ Click

in this area to display the available colors.

212

Note: The available colors depend on the color scheme of the slide. For information on color schemes, see page 216.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

The text appears in the color you selected. To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

To once again display the text in the default color, repeat steps 1 to 3, selecting Automatic in step 3.

TEAM LinG

4

CHANGE OBJECT COLOR

Enhance a Presentation

USING POWERPOINT

You can change the color of an object on a slide to better suit the design of the slide. Acrylic Paint Acrylic

lic Acrayint

Paint

P

PowerPoint allows you to change the color of objects such as WordArt and charts. You can also change the color of most AutoShapes and some clip art images. CHANGE OBJECT COLOR

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Click the object you want

‹ Click the color you

to change to a different color. Handles ( ) appear around the object.

want to use.

¤ Click

in this area to display the available colors.

Note: The available colors depend on the color scheme of the slide. For information on color schemes, see page 216.

Microsoft Office Pow...

The object appears in the color you selected. To deselect the object, click outside the object.

12:00 PM

To once again display the object in the default color, repeat steps 1 to 3, selecting Automatic in step 3.

TEAM213 LinG

CHANGE THE DESIGN TEMPLATE

PowerPoint offers many design templates that you can choose from to give the slides in your presentation a professional look. You can change the design template for your entire presentation or for a single slide. Changing the design template for a single slide can make the slide stand out from the rest of your presentation.

CHANGE THE DESIGN TEMPLATE

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Click Design to display the Slide Design task pane.

Note: If the Design button is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

214

12:00 PM

The Slide Design task pane appears.

Microsoft Office Pow...

This area displays the available design templates.

12:00 PM

You can use the scroll bar to browse through the design templates.

Note: The design templates are organized into three sections––Used in This Presentation, Recently Used and Available For Use.

TEAM LinG

4

Enhance a Presentation

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

When I changed the design template for my presentation, why did some parts of my slides not change?

Tip

Yes. You can install additional design templates on your computer. Click Additional Design Templates at the end of the list of templates. PowerPoint will begin installing additional design templates on your computer.

The new design template may not affect parts of a slide you have previously formatted. For example, if you changed the color of text on a slide before changing the design template, the new design template will not affect the text you changed.

Introduction Missions statement Business plan Products and services Main attractions Start-up costs Other expenses Goals Conclusion

Microsoft Office Pow...

¤ Click the design template you want to use. All the slides in your presentation display the design template you selected.

Are there other design templates that I can use?

You can also click Design Templates on Microsoft Office Online at the end

of the list of templates. A Web page appears, allowing you to download additional design templates.

Introduction Mission statement Business plan Products and services Main attractions Start-up costs Other expenses Goals Conclusion

12:00 PM

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

‹ Click the arrow ( ) to

Note: To select a different design template, repeat step 2.

APPLY A DESIGN TEMPLATE TO ONE SLIDE

‹ When you finish

⁄ Display the slide you

› Click Apply to

selecting a design template, you can click to close the Slide Design task pane.

want to apply a design template to.

Selected Slides.

display a list of options.

¤ Position the mouse over the design template you want to use. An arrow ( ) appears.

TEAM215 LinG

CHANGE THE COLOR SCHEME

You can change the color scheme of all the slides in your presentation. You can also change the color scheme of a single slide. Changing the color scheme for a single slide can make the slide stand out from the rest of your presentation.

AcrylicAcr ylic Paint Paint ic Acryl int Pa

Each color scheme contains a set of eight coordinated colors, including colors for the background, text, lines, shadows, titles and accents. CHANGE THE COLOR SCHEME

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Click Design to display the Slide Design task pane.

Note: If the Design button is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

216

12:00 PM

The Slide Design task pane appears.

This area displays the available color schemes.

¤ Click Color Schemes

Note: The available color schemes depend on the current design template. For information on design templates, see page 214.

to display the available color schemes.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

You can use the scroll bar to browse through the color schemes.

‹ Click the color scheme you want to use.

TEAM LinG

4

Enhance a Presentation

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

What should I consider when changing the color scheme of slides?

Tip

When selecting a color scheme, you should consider how you will deliver the presentation. If you will be using overheads, you should choose a color scheme with a light background and dark text. If you will be using 35mm slides or delivering your presentation on a computer screen, you should choose a color scheme with a dark background and light text.

nigh Dinner To

t! Dinner Tonight!

and Eleanor man Lou Whit

Some of the slides in my presentation did not change to the new color scheme. What is wrong?

You may have used more than one design template in your presentation. By default, PowerPoint only applies the new color scheme to slides with the same design template as the current slide. To apply the color scheme to all the slides in your presentation, perform steps 2 to 4 on page 217, selecting Apply to All Slides in step 4. For more information on design templates, see page 214.

Eleanor and Lou Whitman

AD3

HSUP

AD3

POWER POWER

RESET

COMPACT COMPACT

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

All the slides in your presentation display the color scheme you selected.

Note: To select a different color scheme, repeat step 3.

› When you have finished selecting a color scheme, you can click to close the Slide Design task pane.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

CHANGE THE COLOR SCHEME FOR ONE SLIDE

‹ Click the arrow ( ) to display a list of options.

⁄ Display the slide you

› Click Apply to

want to use a different color scheme.

Selected Slides.

¤ Position the mouse over the color scheme you want to use. An arrow ( ) appears.

TEAM217 LinG

ANIMATE SLIDES

You can animate slides in your presentation to help keep your audience’s attention throughout the presentation. PowerPoint provides many preset animation schemes that you can use to add animation and movement to titles, bulleted text and paragraphs on your slides.

:

me

n

tio

A

he Sc

a nim

Although PowerPoint allows you to add a different animation scheme to each slide in your presentation, using too many different animation schemes may take the audience’s attention away from the information you present.

ANIMATE SLIDES Type a question for help

Type a question for help

No Animation

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Display the slide

‹ Click Animation

you want to animate.

Schemes.

¤ Click Slide Show.

The Slide Design task pane appears.

218

Microsoft Office Pow...

This area displays the available animation schemes.

12:00 PM

You can use the scroll bar to browse through the available animation schemes.

TEAM LinG

4

Enhance a Presentation

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

Tip

How do I preview the animation in a slide show?

You can click the Slide Show button in the Slide Design task pane to preview the animation in a slide show. You may need to click the current slide to display each animated item Faded wipe on the slide during the slide show. For more information on viewing a slide show, see page 224.

How do I remove an animation scheme from a slide?

An

im

at

io

n

Sc he

m

e:

To remove an animation scheme from a slide, repeat steps 1 to 4 below, except select No Animation in step 4.

Type a question for help

Type a question for help

Descend Descend

Microsoft Office Pow...

› Click the animation scheme you want to use.

12:00 PM

PowerPoint adds the animation scheme to the selected slide and displays a preview of the animation in this area.

Note: To select a different animation scheme, repeat step 4.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

ˇ To view the animation again, click Play. To add the animation scheme to all the slides in your presentation, click Apply to All Slides.

Á When you finish selecting an animation scheme, you can click to hide the Slide Design task pane.

TEAM219 LinG

REORDER SLIDES

You can change the order of the slides in your presentation. Reordering slides is useful when you want to reorganize the ideas in your presentation.

mpany About Our Co

ss Resort Wilderne Outdoor 's in Colorado is located untains Rocky Mo ow ned and It is family op era ted to 800 od ate up We acc om gue sts year act ivit ies We offer rou nd

REORDER SLIDES

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Click

‹ Drag the slide to a

¤ Position the mouse

new location. A line shows where the slide will appear.

to change to the Slide Sorter view. over the slide you want to move.

220

Microsoft Office Pow...

The slide appears in the new location.

12:00 PM

PowerPoint automatically renumbers the slides in your presentation.

TEAM LinG

5

DELETE A SLIDE

Fine-Tune a Presentation

USING POWERPOINT

at k that nd th tand rsta Quic un ders sy unde busy bu Wee W ve aa w ee have ha es es so w tim youu yo le so dule at tim ls at hedu ls sche ea sc mea eer m preliver ve pr ve deliv de ha u. you. wee ha ith yo at w with w that th ow ed know kn nged rang youu ls arra ar willill w ay yo way eals ee is w mea This Th ur m er your yo ther th henn ed andd lv an whe w rved g in volve invo serv be se be ting aitin wai no w is no is

You can remove a slide you no longer need from your presentation. Deleting a slide is useful if the slide contains outdated or incorrect information.

DELETE A SLIDE

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Click

to change to the Slide Sorter view.

¤ Click the slide you want to delete.

‹ Press the

Delete

key.

Microsoft Office Pow...

The slide disappears. PowerPoint automatically renumbers the remaining slides in your presentation.

12:00 PM

To immediately return the slide to the presentation, click .

TEAM221 LinG

ADD SLIDE TRANSITIONS

You can add transitions to slides in your presentation. A transition is a visual effect that appears when you move from one slide to the next.

Using transitions can help you introduce each slide during an on-screen slide show and signal your audience that new information is appearing. ADD SLIDE TRANSITIONS

Blinds Vertical

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Display the slide you want to add a transition to.

¤ Click Slide Show.

222

12:00 PM

‹ Click Slide Transition.

Microsoft Office Pow...

The Slide Transition task pane appears. This area displays the available transitions. You can use the scroll bar to browse through the transitions.

› Click the transition you want to use.

12:00 PM

PowerPoint adds the transition to the displayed slide and displays a preview of the transition.

Note: To view the transition again, repeat step 4.

TEAM LinG

5

Fine-Tune a Presentation

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

What should I consider when adding transitions to slides?

Tip

Although PowerPoint allows you to add a different transition to each slide in your presentation, using too many different transitions may distract the audience. The audience may focus on how each slide is introduced, rather than the information you are presenting.

How do I remove a transition from a slide?

Display the slide you want to remove a transition from and then perform steps 2 to 4 below, selecting No Transition in step 4.

No Transition

Verbal Non-verbal

March 24, 1997

Blinds Vertical

Medium

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

12:00 PM

ˇ To change the speed of the transition, click this area to display a list of speed options.

PowerPoint displays a preview of the transition with the speed you selected.

‡ To add the transition to all the slides in your presentation, click

If you cannot see the Apply to All Slides button, click to browse through the information in the task pane.

Á Click the speed you

Note: To view the transition with the speed again, repeat steps 5 and 6.

Apply to All Slides.

° When you finish selecting a

Note: To apply the transition to only the slide you displayed in step 1, skip to step 8.

transition, you can click to close the Slide Transition task pane.

want to use.

TEAM223 LinG

VIEW A SLIDE SHOW

You can view a slide show of your presentation on a computer screen. A slide show displays one slide at a time using the entire screen.

Before presenting a slide show to an audience, you can view the slide show to rehearse your presentation. VIEW A SLIDE SHOW

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Click the first slide

¤ Click

you want to view in the slide show.

slide show.

224

to start the

The slide you selected fills your screen.

Note: You can press the Esc key to end the slide show at any time.

‹ To display the next slide, click anywhere on the current slide.

TEAM LinG

5

Fine-Tune a Presentation

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

How can I use my keyboard to move through a slide show? Task:

Press this key:

Display the next slide

Spacebar

Display the previous slide Display any slide

Backspace

Type the number of the slide and then press

End the slide show

Esc

Pause the slide show and

B

turn the screen black Pause the slide show and turn the screen white

The next slide appears.

To return to the previous slide, press the Backspace key.

(Press

B

Enter

again to return

to the slide show) W

(Press

W

again to return

to the slide show)

› Repeat step 3 until

ˇ Click the screen to

this screen appears, indicating you have reached the end of the slide show.

exit the slide show.

TEAM225 LinG

CREATE NOTES

You can create notes that include the ideas you want to discuss for each slide in your presentation. You can use your notes as a guide when delivering your presentation. ence • Welcome audi kers • Introduce spea ence for • Thank audi attending

Notes can include statistics and information that you may need to refer to when answering questions from the audience.

CREATE NOTES

Microsoft Office Pow...

USING THE NORMAL VIEW

⁄ Display the slide you want to create notes for.

¤ Click this area and then

12:00 PM

If you type more than one line of text, you can use the scroll bar to browse through the text.

Microsoft Office Pow...

USING NOTES PAGES

⁄ Click View. ¤ Click Notes Page to display your notes pages.

12:00 PM

Note: If Notes Page does not appear on the menu, position the mouse over the bottom of the menu to display the menu option.

type the notes for the slide.

226

TEAM LinG

5

Fine-Tune a Presentation

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

When using the Normal view to create notes, how do I increase the size of the notes area?

To increase the size of the notes area in the Normal view, position the mouse over the top border of the area ( changes to ) and then drag the border up to a new location.

Tip

Can I print my notes pages?

You can print your notes pages so you will have a paper copy of the notes to refer to while delivering your presentation. Printing notes pages is also useful if you want to use the pages as handouts to help your audience follow your presentation. For information on printing notes pages, see page 230. ence me audi • Welco kers ce spea • Introdu e for nc die au • Thank ing attend

26%

100%

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

Note: You can use the scroll bar to view the notes pages for other slides.

Note: If the Zoom area is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the area.

‹ To magnify the notes page

› Click the

The notes page for the current slide appears.

so you can clearly view the notes, click in this area.

magnification you want to use.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

The notes page appears in the new magnification.

Note: To once again display the entire notes page, repeat steps 3 and 4, selecting Fit in step 4.

You can edit and format the notes page as you would any text in your presentation.

ˇ When you finish reviewing your notes pages, click to return to the Normal view.

TEAM227 LinG

PREVIEW A PRESENTATION BEFORE PRINTING

You can use the Print Preview feature to see how your presentation will look when printed. Using this feature allows you to confirm your presentation will print the way you want. You can choose the part of your presentation you want to preview, such as the slides, handouts, notes pages or outline. PREVIEW A PRESENTATION BEFORE PRINTING

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Click

to preview your presentation before printing.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

228

The Print Preview window appears.

Microsoft Office Pow...

This area displays a preview of the slide that will appear on the first printed page. ¤ To view the slides that will appear on the other printed pages, click one of the following buttons. Display previous page Display next page

12:00 PM

You can also use the scroll bar to view the slides that will appear on other printed pages.

TEAM LinG

5

Fine-Tune a Presentation

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

How do I magnify an area of a page I am previewing?

Tip

Position the mouse over the area you want to magnify ( changes to ) and then click the area to display a magnified view of the area. To once again display the entire page, you can click anywhere on the page.

How do I quickly print my presentation while working in the Print Preview window?

You can click the Print button ( ) to quickly print the presentation you are previewing.

K CLIC

Handouts (4 slides per page)

Microsoft Office Pow...

‹ To preview a different part of your presentation before printing, click this area.

12:00 PM

› Click the part of the presentation you want to preview. For information on the parts of your presentation that you can print, see the top of page 231.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

A preview of the part of the presentation you selected appears.

ˇ When you finish previewing your presentation, click Close to close the Print Preview window.

TEAM229 LinG

PRINT A PRESENTATION

You can produce a paper copy of a presentation for your own use or to hand out to your audience.

Missio

n Statem

ent

To prov ide restauran consume rs food and t which com with a comforta great serv bines qual ity ice reasonabble environm in a ent, all le price at a .

Busine

ss Pla

Inroduc

tion

Mission Stat Products ement and serv Main attra ices ctors Star t-up costs Other expenses Goals Conclus ion

n

During this why Hun presenta gry Pete tion, you lifetime will see 's is a busi clear that ness oppo once in a rtun consume the restauran ity. It will be t entrepren rs and a good will be a hit investme with eurs. nt for

Goals To beco fixture me a in downtow the n To expa area other nd to cities

Inroduction Mission

Statement Mission and services Products Main attractors costs Start-up expenses Other

Statement

with a quality consumers To provide which combines in a restaurant service all at a great food and environment, comfortable price. reasonable

Statement Mission and services Products Main attractors costs Start-up expenses Other

Statement

with a quality consumers To provide which combines in a restaurant service all at a great food and environment, comfortable price. reasonable

Business

Plan you will

see

in a this presentation, is a once It will be During Pete's opportunity. be a hit with why Hungry will business for lifetime the restaurant investment clear that and a good consumers . entrepreneurs

Goals Conclusion

Business

Plan you will

see

in a this presentation, is a once It will be During Pete's opportunity. be a hit with why Hungry will business for lifetime the restaurant investment clear that and a good consumers . entrepreneurs

Goals Conclusion

Offered

a To becomethe in fixture area downtown to To expand other cities

Products

menu Varied foods Finger dishes Pasta platters Seafood menu Vegetarian menu Children's

magazineaffiliates, national Television, station (city food magazines)promotions and newspaper city papers) combination Radio (AM/FM nts, both advertiseme

g

Business

Goals Conclusion

you will

see

a To becomethe in fixture area downtown to To expand other cities

Offered Products

menu Varied foods Finger dishes Pasta platters Seafood menu Vegetarian menu Children's

a To becomethe in fixture area downtown to To expand other cities

magazineaffiliates, national Television, station (city food magazines)promotions and newspaper city papers) combination Radio (AM/FM nts, both

magazine

national

Varied men Finger u foods Pasta dish Seafood es platters Vegetar Childrenian menu 's men u

Adverti sin

g

Televisio n, (city stat magazine food magion affiliate azines) s, nationa Radio l and (AM/FM newspaper advertis combination promotions ements, both city papers)

advertiseme

g

Advertisin Offered

Goals Plan

see you will in a this presentation, is a once It will be During Pete's opportunity. be a hit with why Hungry will business for lifetime the restaurant investment clear that and a good consumers . entrepreneurs

Business

Plan

in a this presentation, is a once It will be During Pete's opportunity. be a hit with why Hungry will business for lifetime the restaurant investment clear that and a good consumers . entrepreneurs

Statement Mission and services Products Main attractors costs Start-up expenses Other

Statement

with a quality consumers To provide which combines in a restaurant service all at a great food and environment, comfortable price. reasonable

see

Advertising

Advertisin

Goals n Inroductio

Mission

you will

d

g

Goals

Statement Mission and services Products Main attractors costs Start-up expenses Other

Statement

with a quality consumers To provide which combines in a restaurant service all at a great food and environment, comfortable price. reasonable

Plan

in a this presentation, is a once It will be During Pete's opportunity.be a hit with why Hungry will business for lifetime the restaurant investment clear that and a good consumers entrepreneurs.

a To becomethe in fixture area downtown to To expand other cities

Advertisin n Inroductio

Mission

Produc ts Off ered

Goals Conclusion

Goals

Business

Goals Conclusion

Goals

Mission

Statement Mission and services Products Main attractors costs Start-up Other expenses

Statement

with a consumers quality combines To provide which in a restaurant great service all at a food and environment, comfortable price. reasonable

n Inroductio

Mission

n Inroductio

Products

a To becomethe in fixture area downtown to To expand other cities

menu Varied foods Finger dishes Pasta platters Seafood menu Vegetarian menu Children's

magazineaffiliates, national Television, station (city food magazines)promotions and newspaper city papers) combination Radio (AM/FM nts, both

Before printing your presentation, make sure your printer is turned on and contains paper.

advertiseme

g

Advertisin Offered Products

menu Varied foods Finger dishes Pasta platters Seafood menu Vegetarian menu Children's

magazineaffiliates, national Television, station (city food magazines)promotions and newspaper city papers) combination Radio (AM/FM nts, both advertiseme

e s, national national affiliates, ines)promotions per aper promotions ation papers) ombination city papers) , both both city ments,

PRINT A PRESENTATION

Handouts

Microsoft Office Pow...

⁄ Click File. ¤ Click Print.

230

12:00 PM

The Print dialog box appears.

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

‹ Click this area to select the part of the presentation you want to print.

Note: For information on the available options, see the top of page 231. If you selected

› Click the part of the

Handouts in step 4, you

presentation you want to print.

can click this area to change the number of slides that will print on each page. TEAM LinG

5

Fine-Tune a Presentation

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

What parts of my presentation can I print?

1

Best-Selling Products Marketing Plan Joanne Smith Marketing Director Terrific Toys March 24, 1997

Terrific Toys

March 24, 1997

Marketing Plan

Terrific Toys

March 24, 1997

Terrific Toys

August 24, 2001

• Our graphic artist work hard to make sure our products stand out on toy store shelves • Our packaging is environmentally friendly and fully recyclable

• Recent opening of San Francisco warehouse

March 24, 1997

Advertising

• All our toys are guaranteed to satisfy customers or we refund the full purchase price

• Terrific Toys uses television, magazine, radio and newspaper promotions

Terrific Toys

1) Introduce Speakers 2) Opening Remarks 3) Encourage Comments & Questions From The Audience

Terrific Toys

Product Support

Terrific Toys

March 24, 1997

Terrific Toys

March 24, 1997

3

Best-Selling Products Baby Laughs-a-Lot Dress ‘em Teddy Galaxy Gladiators Mini Bots Shoobee dolls WordWonder

Distribution • Our warehouses operate around the clock to ensure our products reach their destinations • Recent opening of San Francisco warehouse

4

Packaging • Our graphic artists work hard to make sure our products stand out on toy store shelves • Our packaging is environmentally friendly and fully recyclable

• Terrific Toys offers a 1-800 number for all product inquiries

August 24, 2001

Marketing Plan

• • • • • •

Packaging

• Our warehouses operate around the clock to ensure our products reach their destinations

Joanne Smith Marketing Director Terrific Toys

2

Joanne Smith Marketing Director Terrific Toys

Marketing Plan Distribution

mG

Joanne Smith Marketing Director Terrific Toys

• Baby Laughs-a-Lot • Dress 'em Teddy • Galaxy Gladiators • Mini Bots • Shoobee dolls • WordWonder

Terrific Toys

Slides

Handouts

Notes Pages

Outline View

Prints one slide on each page. This is useful when you are printing transparencies for an overhead projector.

Prints one or more slides on each page. You can give handouts to your audience to help them follow your presentation.

Prints one slide and any notes you added to the slide on each page. You can use notes pages as a guide when delivering your presentation. To add notes to your slides, see page 226.

Prints the text displayed in the Outline view of your presentation. For information on the Outline view, see page 174.

Grayscale

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Pow...

ˇ Click an option to specify which slides you want to print ( changes to ).

Microsoft Office Pow...

slide displayed on your screen.

Á If you selected Slides in step 5, type the numbers of the slides you want to print in this area (example: 1,2,4 or 1-4).

Slides - Print the slides

‡ Click this area to specify

All - Print every slide in your presentation. Current slide - Print the

you specify.

if you want to print your slides in color, grayscale or pure black and white.

12:00 PM

° Click the way you want to print the slides.

· Click OK to print your presentation.

TEAM231 LinG

PACKAGE YOUR PRESENTATION ONTO A CD

You can package your presentation onto a CD and transport it to another computer. PowerPoint packages your presentation and all the files associated with the presentation, such as picture files. PowerPoint then compresses, or squeezes, the entire presentation to make the presentation easier to transport.

Outd

oor W

John

and L

inda

ilder

ness

Reso

rt

Roger

s

When the CD containing the presentation is inserted into a drive on another computer, the presentation will automatically play as a fullscreen slide show. PACKAGE YOUR PRESENTATION ONTO A CD

Presentation

Healthy Eating

12:00 PM

⁄ Insert a CD-R or

¤ Open the presentation

CD-RW disc into your recordable CD drive.

you want to package and transport to another computer. To open a presentation, see page 172.

Note: When you insert a CD, a dialog box appears, asking what you want Windows to do. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

232

‹ Click File. › Click Package for CD.

Healthy Eating

12:00 PM

The Package for CD dialog box appears.

This area displays the name of the presentation you will copy to the CD.

ˇ Type a name for

Note: Files associated with the presentation, such as picture files, are automatically included with the presentation. The PowerPoint Viewer is also included, so you can display the presentation on a computer that does not have PowerPoint installed. TEAM LinG

the CD you will store the presentation on.

5

Fine-Tune a Presentation

USING POWERPOINT

Tip

What type of CD can I use?

Tip

You can package your presentation onto a recordable CD, such as a blank CD-R (Compact Disc-Recordable), a blank CD-RW (Compact Disc-ReWritable) or a CD-RW disc with existing data on the disc. You can copy a presentation onto a CD-R disc only once. A CD-RW disc allows you to copy a presentation onto the disc many times. However, if you use a CD-RW disc with existing data, PowerPoint will ask you to erase the existing data before you package your presentation onto the disc. Outdoo r Wilder

Outdoo r Wilder ness

and Linda

ness

If you are not using Windows XP, you may need to package your presentation to a specific location on your computer and then use the software that came with your recordable CD drive to copy the presentation onto a CD.

Resort

Resort

John John

Why can’t I copy my presentation directly onto a CD?

and Linda

Rogers

⁄ Perform steps

Rogers

2 to 4 on page 232.

¤ Click Copy to Folder. Outdoo

John

and Linda

r Wildern

Outdoo ess Resort

John Rogers

and Linda

r Wildern ess Resort

Rogers

The Copy to Folder dialog box appears, displaying the location where the presentation will be saved.

‹ Click OK.

Healthy Eating

Á Click Copy to CD to package the presentation onto the CD. The Copying Files to CD dialog box appears.

12:00 PM

This area displays the progress of copying the files.

Healthy Eating

12:00 PM

A dialog box appears when PowerPoint has successfully copied the files to the CD.

° Click Close to close

‡ Click No to close the

Note: When you insert the CD into a CD drive on another computer, the presentation will automatically begin playing.

dialog box. If you want to copy the same files to another CD, click Yes and then insert a CD into the drive.

the Package for CD dialog box.

TEAM233 LinG

Garage Sale

ora XYZ Corp

on i t a r o p r XYZ Co ly Week

2003 1, Issue 1

oration p r o C Z Y r for X Record yea ide." ice we prov

serv to 03 a staff party e in, and 20 ar s re gu fi e r here will be achievement at fo T Th ar ye rd co e celebrate th Banquet Hall on has been a reration! e e Breton su YZ Corpo th X is is th e nsid Feb. 12. resident, Jack I O N O R AT Company P its his dedicated l staff mem C O R P ed 2 cr s, ms hopes al milies will be . m ar t da da n A ye A de ul si sf re es P succ eir fa Meet the ove, bers and th nd. staff for the ly tion's logo, ab to atte YZ Corpora ry well known as worked real le X e ab er h 3 e a on g ve kin e "Every ad has become ntinues to expand. , and we hav r way of than A Look Ahe co "This is ou ade this achievehard all yearindustry leader," the company m wing an at e d th f ou com af pr st be a s. ard to follo 4 id m e look forwyear with anelated Ada possible," sa Events t "W g an en in id m sa om pc U rd ved up this reco nt year," said Adams. ration achie XYZ Corpos by expanding e are her excelle er y 5 ot th n , ar pa ye om es is C their succ t line and concen- As for th believe XYZ A Look at sures Adams. me reasons to will be even their produc oviding excellent on has beco Safety Mea 5 pr on ti Z Corporati er, and the fuon ra Y s g X po re in u or at ig C tr F n lead sful! rvice. Productio an industry ight for this commore succes customer seourselves on cuscontinue looks br ployees. ill ide re w pr tu e s. e 6 m lin t "W da A s em ment e," said The producand the company is pany and it Weekly Com tomer servicextra mile to to expand, dly. "We go the r customers pi growing ra 6 ensure all oupy with the Board Summary ofinutes ry hap ve e ar Meeting M

Date: 4/22/99 All Day Long!

oints of Special p interest: YZ year for X ad • Record n! See le tio ra o rp Co etails. story for d r in store fo • What's head for a r the yea ee oration? S XYZ Corp d out. fin to page 3 the way in • Leading safety. workplace page 5. on See story

Right beside the Town Hall on Cedar Street

Public o t s r o o D . tion Opens a it," said Lee r o p r o safely we do gin next month, C ay -d to be XYZ yill a da Tours w tinuously throughry operates on ened ration has op XYZ Corpoits future employits doors to ring tours of the ees, by offe schools and intercompany tobers of the public. ested mem ns ublic Relatio Stacy Lee, Pid tours will enable Director, sa e how the compeople to se

de pan and run con. t a better un basis and ge how the company out the year e comstanding of back from th So far, feed been excellent, and works. r fo y it munity has eat opportun already "This is a gr le and people in the several groups have s. op ur pe do g to e r w un fo yo signed up to see what community efficiently and ow h d an e her

TEAM LinG

USING ACCESS

Using Publisher

1 2 3 4

Turner's

Getting Started Pages 236-253

Save, Print and Open a Publication Pages 254-261

Enhance a Publication Pages 262-279

Create and Work With Objects Pages 280-305

Turner's Constru

ction Turner E-mail: kevin@ turner.co m

Kevin Turner

TEAM LinG E-mail: kevin@turn er.com

INTRODUCTION TO PUBLISHER

Publisher is a desktop publishing program you can use to create professionally designed publications that combine text and graphics.

Can't wait to see you!

AD3 PUSH

HDD

RESET

A document created in Publisher is called a publication.

Creating Publications

Enhance Publications

Adding Objects to Publications

You can use Publisher to create a wide variety of publications, such as advertisements, business cards, calendars, invitation cards, labels, newsletters and resumes. You can even create publications you can display on the Web or send in e-mail messages. Publisher provides the layout and formatting for publications so you can concentrate on the content of your publications.

Publisher offers many ways to improve the appearance of your publications. You can change the font, size, alignment and color of text in a publication. You can also add a background color or pattern to a page. Publisher can also find design problems that you may not have noticed in a publication.

Publisher allows you to add many types of objects to enhance your publications. You can add pictures stored on your computer, professionally designed clip art images, AutoShapes, WordArt and tables. You can also add special design gallery objects, such as borders, calendars and coupons, to your publications.

Acrylic Paint

color

color

Paint

Acrylic

Pictures

236

color

Paint

Acrylic

Text Effects

TEAM LinG

PARTS OF THE PUBLISHER WINDOW

1

Getting Started

USING PUBLISHER

The Publisher window displays many items that allow you to create and work with your publications.

Title Bar

Menu Bar

Standard Toolbar

Formatting Toolbar

Shows the name of the displayed publication.

Provides access to lists of commands available in Publisher and displays an area where you can type a question to get help information.

Contains buttons that allow you to select common commands, such as Save and Print.

Contains buttons that allow you to select common formatting commands, such as Bold and Italic.

Connect Text Boxes Toolbar

Contains buttons that allow you to create and work with connected text boxes. When text boxes are connected, text that will not fit in the first text box will flow into the next connected text box. Objects Toolbar

Contains buttons that allow you to add objects, such as tables and pictures, to a publication. Task Pane

Contains options you can select to perform common tasks, such as creating a new publication.

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

12:00 PM

Rulers

Help you align objects in a publication. Workspace

Displays the publication you are currently working with.

Scroll Bars

Page Icons

Object Position

Allow you to move through the current page in a publication.

Allow you to switch between the pages in a publication.

Displays the position of a selected object or the mouse pointer from the left and top edges of the current page, in inches.

TEAM237 LinG

CREATE A PUBLICATION

You can quickly and easily create a professionally designed publication.

Publisher provides the layout and formatting for most types of publications so you can concentrate on the content of your publications. CREATE A PUBLICATION

Publications for Print

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Publi...

⁄ Click File.

¤ Click New.

Publication1 - Microso...

The New Publication task pane appears.

Note: The New Publication task pane also appears each time you start Publisher.

238

12:00 PM

‹ Click the category that best describes the type of publication you want to create.

TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

USING PUBLISHER

Tip

What types of publications can I create? ure ch Bro

1

2

Primary Business Address Your Address Line 2 Your Address Line 3 Your Address Line 4

ard stc Po

Primary Business Address Your Address Line 2 Your Address Line 3 Your Address Line 4 Phone: 201-555-8912 Fax: 201-555-4839 E-mail: [email protected]

Barry Pruett Manager of Sales

12:00 PM

Web Page - Microsoft...

Mailing Address Line 1 Mailing Address Line 2 Mailing Address Line 3 Mailing Address Line 4 Mailing Address Line 5

Mailing Address Line 1 Mailing Address Line 1 Mailing Address Line 1 Mailing Address Line 1 Mailing Address Line 1

310 Wilson Lane Los Angeles, CA 90010

ard sC es sin Bu

Publications for Print

Web Sites and E-mail

Design Sets

Blank Publications

Creates publications you can print, such as advertisements, brochures, business cards, calendars, invitation cards, labels, newsletters and resumes.

Creates publications you can display on the Web or send in e-mail messages.

Creates publications that have a similar design. For example, the Personal Stationery Sets allows you to create an address label, envelope and letterhead that display the same design.

Creates blank publications so you can produce and design the publication yourself.

12:00 PM

Publication1 - Microso...

A list of the types of publications in the category appears.

› Click the type of publication you want to create.

ˇ If another list of publication types appears, click a type of publication in the list.

This area displays the available designs for the type of publication you selected. You can use the scroll bar to browse through the designs.

Á Click the design you want to use.

Publication1 - Microso...

12:00 PM

Publisher creates the publication.

This area displays a page in the publication.

Note: The first time you create a publication, the Personal Information dialog box appears, asking you to provide personal information. Publisher automatically adds this information to your publications. Enter the information and then click OK to close the dialog box.

You can replace the sample text and pictures in the publication with your own text and pictures.

TEAM239 LinG

ZOOM IN OR OUT

You can enlarge or reduce the display of a publication on your screen. XYZ Corporation

IT'S A SPECIAL

300% 200% 75% 50%

IT'S A OCCASION SPEC OCCASIO

You can increase the zoom setting to view an area of your publication in more detail or decrease the zoom setting to view more of your publication at once.

COLOR VIEW

ZOOM IN OR OUT

25%

50%

12:00 PM

McKenzie Computers ...

⁄ Click

in this area to display a list of zoom settings.

240

¤ Click the zoom setting you want to use.

Note: You can also select an object before performing steps 1 and 2 to enlarge the selected object to fill the workspace. To select an object, click the object.

McKenzie Computers ...

The publication appears in the new zoom setting. You can edit the publication as usual.

12:00 PM

QUICKLY ZOOM IN OR OUT

⁄ You can click these buttons to quickly zoom out ( ) or zoom in ( ).

To once again display the entire page, repeat steps 1 and 2, selecting Whole Page in step 2.

TEAM LinG

1

MOVE THROUGH PAGES

Getting Started

USING PUBLISHER

If your publication contains more than one page, you can easily display the contents of another page.

COLOR VIEW

MOVE THROUGH PAGES

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

This area displays an icon for each page in your publication. The icon for the current page is highlighted.

One or two arrows ( , ) appear if Publisher cannot show all the page icons. You can click an arrow to display the hidden page icons.

Archaeology Digest - ...

⁄ Click the icon for the page you want to view. The page you selected appears.

12:00 PM

Note: Two pages may appear on your screen if your publication has facing pages like those found in a book. Publications such as newsletters and catalogs often have facing pages.

TEAM241 LinG

N E W

ADD A NEW PAGE

You can add a new page to your publication to include additional information.

ADD A NEW PAGE

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

⁄ Click the icon for the page you want to appear before or after the new page. This area displays the page you selected.

242

¤ Click Insert. ‹ Click Page.

Archaeology Digest - ...

The Insert Page dialog box appears.

Note: The dialog box may be different, depending on the type of publication you are working with. Publications such as catalogs, newsletters and Web sites display a different dialog box.

12:00 PM

› Double-click the number in this area and type the number of new pages you want to add.

ˇ Click an option to specify if you want to add the new page before or after the current page ( changes to TEAM ). LinG

1

Getting Started

USING PUBLISHER

Tip

Which option should I select when adding a new page?

Wild Wild Cats! WildCats! Cats!

Wild Wild Cats! WildCats! Cats!

Join the adventure as we take aa Join Jointhe theadventure adventureas aswe wetake take a look at the amazing habits ofof look lookatatthe theamazing amazinghabits habits of these ferocious felines! these theseferocious ferociousfelines! felines!

Join the adventure as we take aa Join Jointhe theadventure adventureas aswe wetake take a look at the amazing habits ofof look lookatatthe theamazing amazinghabits habits of these ferocious felines! these theseferocious ferociousfelines! felines!

Wild Wild Cats! WildCats! Cats! Wild Cats!

Join the adventure as we take aa Join Jointhe theadventure adventureas aswe wetake take a look atatthe amazing habits ofof look the amazing look theadventure amazinghabits habits of a Joinatthe as we take these ferocious felines! these ferocious felines! theseat ferocious felines! look the amazing habits of these ferocious felines!

Insert blank pages

Adds a blank page to your publication so you can create all the content for the page yourself.

Create one text box on each page

Adds a page that contains a large text box so you can immediately start adding text to the page.

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

Á Click an option to add

‡ If you selected

a blank page, add a page that contains one text box or add a page that displays all the objects shown on another page ( changes to ).

Duplicate all objects on page in step 6, double-click

Duplicate all objects on page

Adds a page that displays all the objects shown on another page so you can quickly create a new page based on the content and appearance of an existing page.

Archaeology Digest - ...

12:00 PM

The new page appears in your publication.

the number in this area and type the number of the page that contains the objects you want to duplicate.

° Click OK to add the new page.

TEAM243 LinG

MOVE A PAGE

You can change the order of the pages in your publication. Moving pages in a publication is useful when you want to reorganize information.

MOVE A PAGE

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

⁄ Click the icon for the page you want to move. This area displays the page you selected.

244

¤ To move the page, position the mouse over the icon for the page. ‹ Drag the icon for the page to a new location. An arrow ( ) shows where the page will appear.

Archaeology Digest - ...

The page appears in the new location.

12:00 PM

Note: If your publication has facing pages like those found in a book, you should move both pages of a two-page spread together.

TEAM LinG

1

DELETE A PAGE

Getting Started

USING PUBLISHER

You can delete a page you no longer want to include in your publication.

If your publication has facing pages like those found in a book, you should delete only an even number of pages. If you delete an odd number of pages, some pages which are right-hand pages will become left-hand pages and vice versa. In publications that print pages in multiples of four, such as catalogs, you should delete pages in multiples of four.

DELETE A PAGE

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

⁄ Click the icon for the page you want to delete. This area displays the page you selected.

Archaeology Digest - ...

¤ To delete the page, click Edit.

The page disappears from your publication.

‹ Click Delete Page.

Publisher renumbers the pages in your publication.

Note: If Delete Page is not displayed, position the mouse over the bottom of the menu to display the option.

12:00 PM

Note: If your publication has facing pages like those found in a book, the Delete Page dialog box may appear. Click an option to delete both pages, only the left page or only the right page. Then click OK. If other dialog boxes appear, click OK to close the dialog boxes.

TEAM245 LinG

UNDO CHANGES

Publisher remembers the last changes you made to your publication. If you regret these changes, you can cancel them by using the Undo feature.

The Undo feature cancels your changes in the order you made the changes, starting with the last change. UNDO CHANGES

Archaeology Digest - ...

⁄ Click

to undo the last change you made to your publication.

246

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

Publisher cancels the last change you made to your publication.

12:00 PM

To reverse the results of using the Undo feature, click .

You can repeat step 1 to cancel previous changes you made.

TEAM LinG

1

SELECT TEXT

Getting Started

USING PUBLISHER

OPEN HOUSE

Before making changes to text in your publication, you must first select the text you want to work with. Selected text appears highlighted on your screen.

Where: 123 Blue Mountain Road Date: Saturday, August ust 14 Time: 2-5 PM

Mountain

Phone: (212) 555-1234

SELECT TEXT

You are cordially invited to visit the Mayfield Museum.

For more information,

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

SELECT ANY AMOUNT OF TEXT

SELECT A WORD

⁄ Position the mouse

⁄ Double-click

over the first word you want to select.

the word you want to select.

¤ Drag the mouse

over the text you want to select.

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

SELECT ALL THE TEXT IN A TEXT BOX

⁄ Click anywhere in the text box that contains the text you want to select.

¤ Click Edit. ‹ Click Select All.

DESELECT TEXT

⁄ To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

TEAM247 LinG

CHECK SPELLING t ica l b

n io

Pu

You can find and correct all the spelling errors in your publication.

or S pelling Err

Publisher compares words in your publication to words in its dictionary. If a word does not exist in Publisher’s dictionary, the word is considered misspelled.

invied invited ivied

envied invade

Publisher will not find a correctly spelled word used in the wrong context, such as “We have been in business for sit years.” You should carefully review your publication to find this type of error. Publisher will not spell check words typed in UPPERCASE letters.

CHECK SPELLING

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

Publisher automatically underlines misspelled words in red. The underlines will not appear when you print your publication.

248

⁄ Click

to spell check your publication. To spell check only one text box in your publication, click inside the text box before performing step 1.

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

The Check Spelling dialog box appears if Publisher finds a misspelled word in your publication. This area displays the first misspelled word.

12:00 PM

This area displays suggestions for correcting the word.

¤ The Check all stories option spell checks your entire publication. You can click this option to turn the option on ( ) or off ( ).

TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

USING PUBLISHER

Tip

Can Publisher automatically correct my typing mistakes?

Tip

How can I quickly correct a misspelled word in my publication?

Yes. Publisher automatically corrects common spelling and capitalization errors as you type. Here are a few examples.

adn alot comittee don;t nwe occurence recieve seperate teh THe friday

¤ Click the suggestion you want to use to correct the word.

Note: If you do not want to use any of the suggestions, click outside the menu to close the menu.

and a lot committee don't new occurrence receive separate the The Friday

⁄ Right-click the misspelled word. A menu appears with suggestions to correct the word.

Exhibit

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

‹ Click the word you want to use to correct the misspelled word.

› Click Change to correct the misspelled word in your publication.

12:00 PM

To skip the word and continue checking your publication, click Ignore.

Note: To skip the word and all other occurrences of the word in your publication, click Ignore All.

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

ˇ Correct or ignore misspelled words until this dialog box appears, telling you the spell check is complete.

Á Click OK to close the dialog box.

12:00 PM

Note: If you did not choose to spell check your entire publication in step 2, a dialog box appears after Publisher finishes checking the current text box. You can click Yes or No to specify if you want to spell check the rest of your publication.

TEAM249 LinG

FIND AND REPLACE TEXT SUNSHINE VACATIONS PRESENTS

You can find and replace every occurrence of a word or phrase in your publication. This is useful if you have frequently misspelled a name or typed an incorrect product price.

Spend 10 days and 9 nights on a cruise in the Mediterranean Sea. The luxurious cruise ship Paradise Paradiso will set sail from Barcelona, Spain and then you will sail on to the coasts of France, Italy, and Greece, stopping at the most beautiful and picturesque ports along the way. Paradise On board Paradiso, you will find everything you can ever dream of.

Save $$$ when you book Early! Save $$$ when you book Early!

FIND AND REPLACE TEXT

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

⁄ Click Edit. ¤ Click Replace.

250

12:00 PM

Note: If Replace is not displayed, position the mouse over the bottom of the menu to display the option.

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

The Find and Replace task pane appears.

‹ Click this area and type the text you want to find.

12:00 PM

› Click this area and type the text you want to replace the text you typed in step 3.

ˇ Click Find Next to start the search. TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

USING PUBLISHER

Tip

How can the Find and Replace feature help me quickly enter text?

You can type a short form of a word or phrase, such as UM, throughout a publication. You can then use the Find and Replace feature to replace the short form with the full word or phrase, such as University of Massachusetts.

Tip

Can I find text in my publication if I do not want to replace the text?

Yes. You can use the Find feature to locate a word or phrase in your publication. To find text in your publication, perform steps 1 to 3 below, except select Find in step 2. Then perform step 5 until you find the text of interest. SUNSHINE VACATIONS PRESENTS

versity of I attend the Uni The University Massachusetts. ts is located of Massachuset offers a wide and t hers in Am rams. variety of prog

Spend 10 days and 9 nights on a cruise in the Mediterranean Sea. The luxurious cruise ship will set sail from Barcelona, Spain and then you will sail on to the coasts of France, Italy, and Greece, stopping at the most beautiful and picturesque ports along the way. On board , you will find everything you can ever dream of.

U

M

DX-7730

Save $$$ when you book Early!

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

Publisher highlights the first matching text it finds.

Note: To zoom in on your publication so you can more clearly view the highlighted text, see page 240.

Á Click one of the following options. Find Next to ignore the text. Replace to replace the text

with the text you specified. Replace All to replace the

text everywhere in your publication.

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

In this example, Publisher replaces the text and searches for the next matching text.

‡ Ignore or replace matching text until a dialog box appears, telling you that Publisher has finished searching.

° Click OK to close the dialog box.

· When you finish finding and replacing text in your publication, click to close the Find and Replace task pane.

TEAM251 LinG

IMPORT TEXT FROM ANOTHER DOCUMENT WORD DOCUMENT

You can add text to your publication from a document you previously created.

PUBLICATION

The house is located at the intersection of Erin Mills Parkway and Daisy Road. Within a five minute walk of the house, you will find shops, restaurants and cinemas. The house is approximately 3000 square feet and was built in Sept 2000. In addition to the four bedrooms and 5 bathrooms, you will also find a study on the main floor and a library on the top floor. Hardwood floors are used throughout the house!

Importing text from another document allows you to first create the text for your publication in a word processing program, such as Word. This lets you take advantage of a word processor’s powerful editing features to create the text for your publication. IMPORT TEXT FROM ANOTHER DOCUMENT

12:00 PM

McKenzie Computers ...

⁄ Click

to add a text

box.

¤ Position the mouse where you want to begin drawing the text box.

252

‹ Drag the mouse until the text box is the size you want.

12:00 PM

McKenzie Computers ...

The text box appears in your publication. The handles ( ) around the text box allow you to change the size of the text box. To move or resize a text box, see page 298.

› Click Insert.

ˇ Click Text File. Note: If Text File does not appear on the menu, position the mouse over the bottom of the menu to display the menu option.

TEAM LinG

1

Getting Started

USING PUBLISHER

Tip

What types of documents can I import text from?

Tip

You can import text from any text document on your computer, such as a document created in Word, WordPad or Notepad.

Record year for XYZ Corporation The figures are in, and 1998 has been a record year for XYZ Corporation! Company President, John Williams, credits his dedicated staff for the successful year. "Everyone here worked really hard all year, and we have become an industry leader,"said an elated Williams. XYZ Corporation achieved their success by expanding their product line and concentrating on providing excellent customer •service. "We pride ourselves on customer service," said Williams. "We go the extra mile to ensure all our customers are very happy with the service we provide."There will be a staff party to celebrate the achievement at the Breton Banquet Hall on Feb. 12. Williams hopes all staff members and their families will be able to attend. "This is our way of thanking a staff that made this achievement possible," said a proud Williams. As for this year, there are reasons to believe XYZ Corporation will be even more successful! The product line will continue to expand, and the company is growing rapidly.

WO

RD

Why does a dialog box appear, asking if I want to use autoflow?

If the text you are importing from another document does not fit within the text box you created in your publication, Publisher asks if you want to use autoflow.

Record year for XYZ Corporation

Record year for XYZ Corporation The figures are in, and 1998 has been a record year for XYZ Corporation! Company President, John Williams, credits his dedicated staff for the successful year. "Everyone here worked really hard all year, and we have become an industry leader,"said an elated Williams. XYZ Corporation achieved their success by expanding their product line and concentrating on providing excellent customer service. "We pride ourselves on customer service," said Williams. "We go the extra mile to ensure all our customers are very happy with the service we provide."There will be a staff party to celebrate the achievement at the Breton Banquet Hall on Feb. 12. Williams hopes all staff members and their families will be able to attend. "This is our way of thanking a staff that made this achievement possible," said a proud Williams. As for this year, there are reasons to believe XYZ Corporation will be even more successful! The product line will continue to expand, and the company is growing rapidly.

WO R

DP AD

The figures are in, and 1998 has been a record year for XYZ Corporation! Company President, John Williams, credits his dedicated staff for the successful year. "Everyone here worked really hard all year, and we have become an industry leader,"said an elated Williams. XYZ Corporation achieved their success by expanding their product line and concentrating on providing excellent customer service. "We pride ourselves on customer service," said Williams. "We go the extra mile to ensure all our customers are very happy with the service we provide."There will be a staff party to celebrate the achievement at the Breton Banquet Hall on Feb. 12. Williams hopes all staff members and their families will be able to attend. "This is our way of thanking a staff that made this achievement possible," said a proud Williams. As for this year, there are reasons to believe XYZ Corporation will be even more successful! The product line will continue to expand, and the company is growing rapidly.

NO TEP AD Click Yes to have Publisher create a new text box on a new page to display the extra text. Then follow the instructions on your screen.

Click No to close the dialog box without using autoflow. You can then create another text box to display the extra text and connect the text boxes. To connect text boxes, see page 292.

Computer Specs

12:00 PM

McKenzie Computers ...

The Insert Text dialog box appears. This area shows the location of the displayed documents. You can click this area to change the location.

Á Click the name of the document that contains the text you want to add to your publication.

‡ Click OK.

McKenzie Computers ...

The text from the document you selected appears in the text box you created.

12:00 PM

To deselect the text box, click outside the selected area.

Formatting that was applied to the text in the original document may appear in the text box.

TEAM253 LinG

SAVE A PUBLICATION

You can save your publication to store it for future use. Saving a publication allows you to later review and make changes to the publication.

AD3 PUSH

COMPACT COMPACT

POWER

RESET

AD3

You should regularly save changes you make to a publication to avoid losing your work. SAVE A PUBLICATION

Publication1 - Microso...

⁄ Click

to save your publication. The Save As dialog box appears.

254

12:00 PM

Note: If you previously saved your publication, the Save As dialog box will not appear since you have already named the publication.

Publication1 - Microso...

¤ Type a name for the publication. This area shows the location where Publisher will store your publication. You can click this area to change the location.

12:00 PM

This area allows you to access commonly used locations. You can click a location to save your publication in the location.

‹ Click Save to save your publication. TEAM LinG

2

PRINT A PUBLICATION

Save, Print and Open a Publication

USING PUBLISHER

You can produce a paper copy of the publication displayed on your screen.

Before printing, make sure your printer is turned on and contains an adequate supply of paper. You should also make sure your printer contains the type and size of paper your publication requires. The type and size of paper you can use depends on the printer. PRINT A PUBLICATION

HP LaserJet 5MP 5MP LPT1

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

⁄ Click File. ¤ Click Print.

The Print dialog box appears.

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

‹ Click an option to specify if you want to print all the pages, specific pages or the currently displayed page ( changes to ).

12:00 PM

If you selected Pages in step 3, type the number of the first page you want to print. Press the Tab key and then type the number of the last page you want to print.

› Click OK. TEAM255 LinG

PREVIEW A PUBLICATION BEFORE PRINTING

WAY TO GO VACATIONS PRESENTS

You can use the Print Preview feature to see how your publication will look when printed. The Print Preview feature allows you to confirm that your publication will print the way you expect.

Spend 10 days and 9 nights in Europe. Your trip will begin in England and then you'll journey over to France, Germany, Austria and Switzerland. Be sure to bring a camera as you visit the ancient capitals of the old world! You'll be amazed as you visit sites such as the Eiffel Tower, London Bridge and other famous landmarks!

You cannot make changes to your publication in the Preview window. PREVIEW A PUBLICATION BEFORE PRINTING

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

⁄ If your publication contains more than one page, you can click the icon for the first page you want to preview.

256

The page you selected appears in this area.

¤ Click

to preview your publication.

Exhibit Invitation (Pre...

The Preview window appears, displaying the page you selected from your publication.

‹ If your publication contains more than one page, you can click these buttons to display the previous page ( ) or the next page ( ).

12:00 PM

› To magnify an area of a page, position the mouse over the area of the page you want to magnify.

ˇ Click the area to magnify the area of the page.

TEAM LinG

2

Save, Print and Open a Publication

USING PUBLISHER

Tip

Can I print directly from the Preview window?

Tip

Yes. In the Preview window, you can click the Print button ( ) to quickly print all the pages in your publication.

Why does my publication appear in black and white in the Preview window?

If you are using a black-and-white printer, your publication appears in black and white in the Preview window. If you are using a color printer, your publication will appear in color.

Archeology Digest (...

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation (Pre...

A magnified view of the area appears. To once again display the entire page, click anywhere on the page.

Á To display more than one page at once so you can see the overall style of your publication, click .

12:00 PM

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation (Pre...

The number of pages you specified appears. To once again display a single page, click .

° When you finish previewing your publication, click Close to close the Preview window.

‡ Drag the mouse down and to the right until you select the number of pages you want to display.

TEAM257 LinG

OPEN A PUBLICATION

You can open a saved publication to view the publication on your screen. Opening a saved publication allows you to review and make changes to the publication.

d pie – , root beer an shish kebabs Burgers and e come by! BBQ–pleas a g vin ha We're

OPEN A PUBLICATION

Exhibit Invitation

Archaeology Digest - ...

⁄ Click

to open a publication.

258

12:00 PM

The Open Publication dialog box appears.

Archaeology Digest - ...

12:00 PM

This area shows the location of the displayed publications. You can click this area to change the location.

¤ Click the name of

This area allows you to access publications stored in commonly used locations. You can click a location to display the publications stored in the location.

open the publication.

the publication you want to open.

‹ Click Open to

TEAM LinG

2

Save, Print and Open a Publication

USING PUBLISHER

Tip

How can I quickly open a publication I recently worked with?

Publisher remembers the names of the last few publications you worked with. You can use one of the following methods to quickly open one of these publications. Use the File Menu

Use the Task Pane Publications for Print

The New Publication task pane appears each time you start Publisher. To display the New Publication task pane at any time, see page 8.

⁄ Click File. ¤ Click the name of the publication you want to open.

⁄ Click the name of the publication you want to open.

Archaeology Digest - ...

The publication opens and appears on your screen. You can now review and make changes to the publication. This area displays the name of the publication.

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

12:00 PM

If you already had a publication open, the publication you selected appears in a new Microsoft Office Publisher window. You can click the buttons on the taskbar to switch between the open publications.

Archaeology Digest - ...

CLOSE A PUBLICATION

Before closing a publication, you should save any changes you made to the publication. To save changes to a publication, see page 254.

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

⁄ When you finish working with a publication, click to close the publication. The publication disappears from your screen.

TEAM259 LinG

E-MAIL A PUBLICATION

You can e-mail your publication to a friend, colleague or family member. Publisher allows you to send just one page of a publication or send an entire publication as an attached file in an e-mail message.

MAIL

AD3

HSUP

AD3

Maxi FAX MODEM

288

MG

POWER POWER

To e-mail a publication, you must have the Outlook 2003 or Outlook Express (version 5.0 or later) e-mail program set up on your computer.

RESET

COMPACT COMPACT

AA

CH

CH

RQ

SQ

TR

HR

E-MAIL ONE PAGE IN YOUR PUBLICATION

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

⁄ Click the icon for the page in your publication that you want to send in an e-mail message. The page you selected appears in this area.

260

¤ Click

to send the displayed page in an e-mail message.

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

12:00 PM

An area that allows you to address the message appears.

› Click this area and

‹ Click this area and

ˇ Click Send to send the message.

type the e-mail address of the person you want to receive the message.

type a subject for the message.

TEAM LinG

2

Save, Print and Open a Publication

USING PUBLISHER

Tip

Will the person receiving the e-mail message need Publisher installed to view the publication?

When sending just one page of a publication in an e-mail message, the person receiving the message does not need to have Publisher installed to view the page. When sending your entire publication as an attached file, the person receiving the message must have Publisher 2002 or later installed to view the publication. PUBLISHER NOT INSTALLED

Tip

Can I send the e-mail message to more than one person?

Yes. To send the e-mail message to more than one person, use a semicolon (;) to separate each e-mail address you type. To send a carbon copy of the message to a person who is not directly involved but would be interested in the message, click inside the Cc area and type the e-mail address of the person.

To...

[email protected];; [email protected]

Cc...

[email protected]

Subject: COMPACT COMPACT

POWER

RESET

AD3

;

E-MAIL YOUR ENTIRE PUBLICATION

This message has not been sent.

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

Before e-mailing your entire publication, you should save any changes you made. To save a publication, see page 254.

⁄ Click File.

¤ Click Send E-Mail. ‹ Click Send Publication as Attachment.

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

A window that allows you to send the entire publication in an e-mail message appears.

› Click this area and type the e-mail address of the person you want to receive the message.

Egyptian Exhibit Invit...

12:00 PM

ˇ Click this area and type a subject for the message.

Á Click this area and type the message you want to include with the publication.

‡ Click Send to send the message. TEAM261 LinG

CHANGE FONT OF TEXT

You can change the font of text to enhance the appearance of your publication.

The

Amazing World of

W ild Cats!

Join the adventure as we take a look at the amazing habits of these ferocious felines!

dLa

8pt

e FW ont 8pt

10pt

Abc AArial bc an Bookm yle Old St

a

P d nLt Fo

i

12pt

14pt

18pt

18pt

O

R

Z

I

e R bX

8pt

10pt

12pt

14pt

Abc Times an om New R

S

18pt

g

Font

10pt

12pt

14pt

R

e

i

CHANGE FONT OF TEXT

da Sans Typewriter

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

⁄ Select the text you

‹ Click the font you

want to change to a different font. To select text, see page 247.

want to use.

¤ Click

in this area to display a list of the available fonts.

262

Note: The fonts you have most recently used appear at the top of the list.

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

The text you selected changes to the new font.

12:00 PM

To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

TEAM LinG

3

CHANGE SIZE OF TEXT

Enhance a Publication

USING PUBLISHER

You can increase or decrease the size of text in your publication.

Larger text is easier to read, but smaller text allows you to fit more information on a page. Publisher measures the size of text in points. There are 72 points in an inch. CHANGE SIZE OF TEXT

20

36

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

⁄ Select the text you

‹ Click the size you

want to change to a new size. To select text, see page 247.

want to use.

¤ Click

in this area to display a list of the available sizes.

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

The text you selected changes to the new size.

QUICKLY CHANGE THE SIZE OF TEXT

To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

¤ Click a button to decrease (

⁄ Select the text you want to change to a new size. or increase (

) ) the size of the text.

Note: If the button you want is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

TEAM263 LinG

BOLD, ITALICIZE OR UNDERLINE TEXT

You can bold, italicize or underline text to emphasize information in your publication.

BOLD, ITALICIZE OR UNDERLINE TEXT

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

⁄ Select the text you

¤ Click one of the following

want to bold, italicize or underline. To select text, see page 247.

buttons. Bold Italic Underline

264

Note: If the button you want to use is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

The text you selected appears in the new style. To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

12:00 PM

To remove a bold, italic or underline style from text, repeat steps 1 and 2.

TEAM LinG

3

CHANGE ALIGNMENT OF TEXT

Enhance a Publication

USING PUBLISHER Right Align

WAY TO GO VACATIONS PRESENTS

Center

You can enhance the appearance of your publication by aligning text in different ways.

Left Align

Spend 10 days and 9 nights in Europe. Your trip will begin in England and then you'll journey over to France, Germany, Austria and Switzerland.

Justify

Be sure to bring a camera as you visit the ancient capitals of the old world! You'll be amazed as you visit sites such as the Eiffel Tower, London Bridge and other famous landmarks!

Changing the alignment of text affects how the left and right edges of text appear within a text box. CHANGE ALIGNMENT OF TEXT

12:00 PM

McKenzie Computers ...

⁄ Select the text

Left align

you want to align differently. To select text, see page 247.

Center

¤ Click one of the

Justify

following buttons.

Right align

Note: If the button you want to use is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

12:00 PM

McKenzie Computers ...

The text appears in the new alignment.

To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

TEAM265 LinG

CHANGE TEXT COLOR

You can change the color of text in your publication to draw attention to a heading or to enhance a section of information.

CHANGE TEXT COLOR

12:00 PM

McKenzie Computers ...

⁄ Select the text you

‹ Click the color you

want to change to a different color. To select text, see page 247.

want to use.

¤ Click

in this area to display the available colors.

266

Note: The available colors depend on the color scheme used in your publication. To change the color scheme, see page 277.

McKenzie Computers ...

The text appears in the color you selected.

12:00 PM

To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

TEAM LinG

3

ADD A BACKGROUND COLOR OR PATTERN TO A PAGE

Enhance a Publication

USING PUBLISHER

You can add a background color or pattern to a page in your publication to help add visual interest to the page.

ADD A BACKGROUND COLOR OR PATTERN TO A PAGE

12:00 PM

Garage Sale Flyer - M...

⁄ Click the icon for the page you want to add a background color or pattern to. This area displays the page you selected.

Garage Sale Flyer - M...

12:00 PM

¤ Click Format. ‹ Click Background.

› Click the background

ˇ Click the color or

color you want to use.

pattern you want to use.

Note: If Background is not displayed, position the mouse over the bottom of the menu to display the menu option.

This area displays the available colors and patterns for the background color you selected. You can use the scroll bar to browse through the available colors and patterns.

Note: If you do not want the page to display a color or pattern, click .

The Background task pane appears.

The page instantly displays the color or pattern you TEAM267 LinG selected.

CREATE A DROP CAP

You can create a large capital letter at the beginning of a paragraph to enhance the appearance of the paragraph.

Drop caps are frequently used in the first paragraph of a publication to catch the reader’s eye. CREATE A DROP CAP

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

⁄ Click the paragraph you want to display a drop cap.

¤ Click Format. ‹ Click Drop Cap.

268

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

12:00 PM

Note: If Drop Cap does not appear on the menu, position the mouse over the bottom of the menu to display the menu option.

› Click the Custom

Á Double-click the number

Drop Cap tab.

in this area and type the number of lines high you want the drop cap to be.

The Drop Cap dialog box appears.

This area displays a preview of the drop cap.

ˇ Click the position and size you want to use for the drop cap.

‡ Double-click the number in this area and type the number of letters you want to use for the drop cap.

TEAM LinG

3

Enhance a Publication

USING PUBLISHER

Tip

Does Publisher offer any other drop cap styles?

Yes. Publisher offers several pre-made drop cap styles that you can quickly apply to a paragraph in your publication.

⁄ Perform steps 1 to 4 below, except select the Drop Cap tab in step 4.

¤ Click the drop cap style you want to use.

‹ Click OK to apply the Drop Cap style.

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

° These areas display the font, font style and color for the drop cap. You can click an area to select a different font, font style or color. Note: The available colors depend on the color scheme used in your publication. For information on color schemes, see page 277.

12:00 PM

If an area is not available, click beside the area ( changes to ).

· Click OK to create the drop cap.

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

The drop cap appears in your publication.

REMOVE A DROP CAP

⁄ Perform steps 1 to 3 to redisplay the Drop Cap dialog box and then click Remove.

TEAM269 LinG

CHANGE LINE SPACING

You can change the amount of space between the lines of text in your publication.

By default, Publisher uses the size of text to determine the size of line spacing. The larger the text in your publication, the larger the space between lines. CHANGE LINE SPACING

Left

We proudly present the newest and fastest computer system available on the market. This new 3.0 GHz computer comes with 256 MB of RAM, a 60 GB hard drive, a DVD-RW drive and lots more.

We proudly present the newest and fastest computer system available on the market. This new 3.0 GHz computer comes with 256 MB of RAM, a 60 GB hard drive, a DVD-RW drive and lots more.

12:00 PM

McKenzie Computers ...

⁄ Select the text you

¤ Click

want to display a new line spacing. To select text, see page 247.

The Paragraph dialog box appears.

270

.

McKenzie Computers ...

This area displays the line spacing for the text you selected.

12:00 PM

This area displays a sample of the current line spacing for the text you selected.

TEAM LinG

3

Enhance a Publication

USING PUBLISHER

Tip

Why would I want to change the line spacing in my publication?

Tip

Line spacing prevents letters in a line of text from touching letters in the line above or the line below. Proper line spacing can help make your publication easier to read.

Can I change the line spacing between paragraphs?

Yes. You can change the amount of space that appears before or after a paragraph.

⁄ To change the line spacing before or after a paragraph, select the paragraph.

00 s d

¤ Click

to display the Paragraph dialog box.

Left

‹ Click

or in one of these areas to increase or decrease the amount of space before or after the paragraph.

0 square feet • 1500 d d floors fl • Hardwood

Left

We proudly present the newest and fastest computer system available on the market. This new 3.0 GHz computer comes with 256 MB of RAM, a 60 GB hard drive, a DVD-RW drive and lots more.

12:00 PM

McKenzie Computers ...

‹ Click

or to increase or decrease the amount of space between the lines of text you selected.

ˇ Click OK to confirm your changes.

12:00 PM

McKenzie Computers ...

Publisher changes the line spacing of the text you selected.

To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

› Repeat step 3 until this area displays the line spacing you want to use in your publication.

TEAM271 LinG

CREATE A BULLETED OR NUMBERED LIST

You can separate items in a list by beginning each item with a bullet or number.

Bulleted lists are useful for items in no particular order, such as items in a shopping list. Numbered lists are useful for items in a specific order, such as instructions. CREATE A BULLETED OR NUMBERED LIST

34,000-year-old human bone found in Germany Warrior shield from Roman period reassembled Archaeologists study 64,000-year-old volcanic explosion in south-east Asia.

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

⁄ Select the text you

¤ Click one of the

want to display as a bulleted or numbered list. To select text, see page 247.

following buttons.

272

Add numbers Add bullets

Note: If the button you want is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

Archaeology Digest - ...

A bullet or number appears in front of each item in the list.

12:00 PM

To remove bullets or numbers from a list, repeat steps 1 and 2.

To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

TEAM LinG

3

COPY FORMATTING

Enhance a Publication

USING PUBLISHER

You can copy the formatting of text to make one area of text in your publication look exactly like another.

You may want to copy the formatting of text to make all the important words in your publication look the same. This will give the text in your publication a consistent appearance. COPY FORMATTING

12:00 PM

Birthday Card - Micro...

⁄ Select the text that

¤ Click

displays the formatting you want to copy. To select text, see page 247.

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

to copy the formatting of the text.

12:00 PM

Birthday Card - Micro...

The mouse changes to when over your publication.

‹ Select the text you want to display the same formatting.

The text displays the formatting. To deselect text, click outside the selected area.

TEAM273 LinG

CREATE COLUMNS

You can display text in columns like those found in a newspaper to make the text easier to read and improve the layout of your publication.

CREATE COLUMNS

12:00 PM

McKenzie Computers ...

⁄ Click the text box that contains the text you want to display in columns. Handles ( ) appear around the text box.

¤ Click columns.

274

to create

Note: If the button is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

McKenzie Computers ...

The text in the text box appears in the number of columns you specified.

12:00 PM

To remove columns, repeat steps 1 to 3, selecting one column in step 3.

‹ Drag the mouse until you highlight the number of columns you want to create.

TEAM LinG

CHANGE THE PUBLICATION DESIGN

3

Enhance a Publication

USING PUBLISHER

You can instantly change the overall design of your publication to suit your preferences.

CHANGE THE PUBLICATION DESIGN

Archaeology Digest - ...

⁄ Click Format. ¤ Click Publication Designs.

12:00 PM

The Publication Designs task pane appears.

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

This area displays the available designs. You can use the scroll bar to browse through the available designs.

‹ Click the design you want to use.

The publication instantly displays the new design.

› When you finish selecting a design, you can click to close the Publication Designs task pane.

TEAM275 LinG

CHANGE THE FONT SCHEME

You can change the font scheme used in your publication. Each font scheme gives your entire publication a consistent, professional appearance. Each font scheme contains both a major font and a minor font. A major font is usually used for titles and headings and a minor font is usually used for body text.

MAJOR FONT

Edwardian

Script ITC

Minor Font

Tw Cen M

T

When you select a new font scheme, Publisher will change all the text in your publication to match the new font scheme, including text you previously changed to another font. CHANGE THE FONT SCHEME

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

⁄ Click Format.

¤ Click Font Schemes. The Font Schemes task pane appears.

This area displays the available font schemes. You can use the scroll bar to browse through the available font schemes.

‹ Click the font scheme you want to use.

276

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

The text in your publication instantly displays the font scheme you selected.

› When you finish selecting a font scheme, you can click to close the Font Schemes task pane. TEAM LinG

3

CHANGE THE COLOR SCHEME

Enhance a Publication

USING PUBLISHER

You can change the color scheme used in your publication. Each color scheme contains a set of coordinated colors to enhance your publication.

CHANGE THE COLOR SCHEME

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

⁄ Click Format. ¤ Click Color Schemes.

The Color Schemes task pane appears.

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

This area displays the available color schemes. You can use the scroll bar to browse through the available color schemes.

‹ Click the color scheme you want to use.

The publication instantly displays the color scheme you selected.

› When you finish selecting a color scheme, you can click to close the Color Schemes task pane. TEAM277 LinG

CHANGE THE PUBLICATION OPTIONS Portrait Page

Most publications offer a set of options you can select to change different aspects of the publication, such as the layout.

Orientation

dar

Monthly Calen

ge Orientation Landscape Pa

r Yearly Calenda

For example, when working with a calendar, you can choose a different page orientation, display a monthly or yearly calendar and specify if you want to include a schedule of events.

Events Schedule of

Some types of publications, such as award certificates, labels and resumes, do not offer publication options. CHANGE THE PUBLICATION OPTIONS

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

⁄ Click Format. ¤ Click Quick Publication Options.

278

Note: The name of the command depends on the type of publication you are working with. For example, look for Newsletter Options when working with a newsletter and Calendar Options when working with a calendar. The Options task pane appears.

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

This area displays the available options for the current publication. In this example, you can change the layout of the publication.

‹ Click the layout you want to use.

The publication instantly displays the new layout.

› When you finish changing the options for the publication, you can click to close the Options task pane.

TEAM LinG

3

CHECK YOUR PUBLICATION FOR DESIGN PROBLEMS

Enhance a Publication

USING PUBLISHER

You can use Design Checker to find design problems that you might not have noticed in your publication.

Object Partially Off Page

Text Doesn't Fit In Text Box

Empty Text Box

Design Checker will find design problems such as an object that is partially off a page, an empty text box, text that does not fit in a text box and a picture that is not sized proportionally. Design Checker will not find every design problem in your publication. You should still carefully review your publication for design flaws.

CHECK YOUR PUBLICATION FOR DESIGN PROBLEMS

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

⁄ Click Tools. ¤ Click Design Checker.

12:00 PM

The Design Checker task pane appears and Publisher checks your publication for design problems.

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

12:00 PM

This area displays each design problem that Design Checker finds in your publication.

Publisher selects the object that is causing the problem. You can correct the problem by making the necessary changes.

‹ Click a problem of

› When you finish reviewing

interest.

the design problems in your publication, click Close Design Checker.

TEAM279 LinG

ADD AN AUTOSHAPE

Publisher provides a group of ready-made shapes, called AutoShapes, that you can add to your publication.

Publisher offers several types of AutoShapes, including lines, arrows, stars and banners. ADD AN AUTOSHAPE

12:00 PM

Garage Sale Flyer - M...

⁄ Click

to add an AutoShape to your publication. A menu appears.

12:00 PM

Garage Sale Flyer - M...

‹ Click the AutoShape

› Position the mouse

ˇ Drag the mouse

you want to add.

where you want to begin drawing the AutoShape.

until the AutoShape appears the way you want.

¤ Click the type of AutoShape you want to add.

280

TEAM LinG

4

Create and Work With Objects

USING PUBLISHER

Tip

Can I add text to an AutoShape?

Tip

You can add text to most AutoShapes. Adding text is particularly useful for AutoShapes such as banners and callouts. To add text to an AutoShape, click the AutoShape and then type the text you want to add. When you finish typing the text, click outside the AutoShape.

How can I change the design of an AutoShape?

You can change the design of any AutoShape that displays a yellow handle ( ). To redesign an AutoShape, click the AutoShape and position the mouse over the yellow handle ( changes to ). Then drag the mouse until the AutoShape appears the way you want.

2003 Awards Ceremony

Garage Sale Flyer - M...

The AutoShape appears in your publication. The handles ( ) around the AutoShape allow you to change the size of the AutoShape. To move or resize an AutoShape, see page 298.

12:00 PM

To hide the handles ( ) around the AutoShape, click outside the AutoShape.

12:00 PM

Garage Sale Flyer - M...

DELETE AN AUTOSHAPE

⁄ Click the edge of the

¤ Press the

Delete key to delete the AutoShape.

AutoShape you want to delete. Handles ( ) appear around the AutoShape.

TEAM281 LinG

ADD A PICTURE

You can add a picture stored on your computer to your publication. Sun

Mon

Wed

Tues

16

15

21

22

28

Adding a picture is useful if you want to display your company logo, a picture of your products or a favorite family photograph in your publication.

12

11

10

9

8

6

5

4

3

2

1

Sat

Fri

Thurs

17

23

29

18

24

13

19

25

20

26

27

30

ADD A PICTURE

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

⁄ Click

to add a picture. A menu appears.

Archaeology Digest - ...

12:00 PM

¤ Click Picture from

‹ Position the mouse

› Drag the mouse

File.

where you want to begin drawing the frame for the picture.

until the frame for the picture is the size you want. The Insert Picture dialog box appears.

282

TEAM LinG

4

Create and Work With Objects

USING PUBLISHER

Tip

Where can I get pictures that I can add to my publication?

You can purchase collections of pictures at computer stores or obtain pictures on the Internet. You can also use a scanner to scan pictures into your computer or create your own pictures using a drawing program.

Program

Tip

How do I delete a picture I no longer want to appear in my publication?

Click the picture you want to delete. Handles ( ) appear around the picture. Press the Delete key to delete the picture.

Program

M O

–R

CD

Early Pyramid

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

This area shows the location of the displayed pictures. You can click this area to change the location. You can click a location in this area to display the pictures stored in the location.

ˇ Click the picture you want to add to your publication.

Á Click Insert to add the picture to your publication.

Archaeology Digest - ...

The picture appears in your publication. The handles ( ) around the picture allow you to change the size of the picture. To move or resize a picture, see page 298.

12:00 PM

When a picture is selected, the Picture toolbar appears, displaying buttons that allow you to change the appearance of the picture.

‡ To hide the Picture toolbar and the handles ( ) around the picture, click outside the picture.TEAM283 LinG

ADD CLIP ART BEAUTIFUL FLOWERS CATALOG

You can add professionally designed clip art images to your publication. Clip art images can help illustrate ideas and make your publication more visually appealing.

SUMMER 2003

ADD CLIP ART

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

⁄ Click

to add clip art to your publication. A menu appears.

284

¤ Click Clip Art.

Archaeology Digest - ...

The Clip Art task pane appears.

12:00 PM

‹ Click Organize clips to view all the available clip art images in the Microsoft Clip Organizer.

TEAM LinG

4

Create and Work With Objects

USING PUBLISHER

Tip

In the Microsoft Clip Organizer, what type of clip art images will I find in each collection?

My Collections

Office Collections

Web Collections

Displays the pictures that came with Microsoft Windows and pictures you created or obtained on your own.

Displays the pictures that came with Microsoft Office.

Displays the pictures that are available at Microsoft’s Web site and at Web sites in partnership with Microsoft.

Favorites

Emily

Archaeology Digest - ...

The Microsoft Clip Organizer window appears.

Note: The first time you add clip art to a publication, the Add Clips to Organizer dialog box appears. To catalog the clip art images and other media files on your computer, click Now in the dialog box.

Favorites - Microsoft ...

12:00 PM

This area displays the folders that contain the clip art images you can add to your publication. A folder displaying a plus sign ( ) contains hidden folders.

Archaeology Digest - ...

12:00 PM

Buildings - Microsoft ...

› To display the hidden

ˇ Click a folder

folders within a folder, click the plus sign ( ) beside a folder ( changes to ).

of interest.

The hidden folders appear.

Note: You must be connected to the Internet to view the contents of the Web Collections folder.

This area displays the clip art images in the folder you selected.

TEAM285 LinG

ADD CLIP ART

After you locate a clip art image you want to use, you can easily place the image in your publication.

ADD CLIP ART (CONTINUED)

Archaeology Digest - ...

Á To add a clip art image to your publication, position the mouse over the image.

286

Buildings - Microsoft ...

12:00 PM

‡ Drag the clip art image to the workspace in your publication.

Archaeology Digest - ...

The clip art image appears in the workspace of your publication.

12:00 PM

Buildings - Microsoft ...

· Drag the clip art image to the location where you want the image to appear.

° To place the clip art image on a page in your publication, position the mouse over the image.

TEAM LinG

4

Create and Work With Objects

USING PUBLISHER

Tip

After I add a clip art image, why does the button for the Microsoft Clip Organizer window remain on the taskbar?

The button for the Microsoft Clip Organizer window remains on the taskbar so you can easily redisplay the window and add another clip art image to your publication. If you do not want to add another clip art image, click the button on the taskbar to redisplay the window. Then click to close the window.

Tip

How do I delete a clip art image I no longer want to appear in my publication?

Click the image you want to delete. Handles ( ) appear around the image. Press the Delete key to delete the clip art image.

Buildings - Microsoft ...

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

The clip art image appears on the page. The handles ( ) around the image allow you to change the size of the image. To move or resize an image, see page 298.

Buildings - Microsoft ...

12:00 PM

McKenzie Computers ...

When a clip art image is selected, the Picture toolbar appears, displaying buttons that allow you to change the appearance of the image.

You can search for clip art images by specifying a word in the Clip Art task pane.

To hide the Picture toolbar and the handles ( ) around the clip art image, click outside the image.

and type a word that describes the clip art image you want to search for. Then press the Enter key.

SEARCH FOR CLIP ART IMAGES

⁄ Double-click this area

12:00 PM

A list of matching clip art images appears.

¤ To add a clip art image to your publication, click the image. TEAM287 LinG

ADD WORDART

You can add WordArt to your publication to enhance a title or draw attention to important information.

ADD WORDART

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

⁄ Click

to add

¤ Click the WordArt

WordArt.

style you want to use.

The WordArt Gallery dialog box appears.

‹ Click OK to confirm your selection.

Archaeology Digest - ...

The Edit WordArt Text dialog box appears.

› Type the text you want the WordArt to display.

12:00 PM

Note: You should be careful not to make any spelling mistakes. Publisher’s spell check feature will not check the spelling of WordArt text.

ˇ Click OK to add the WordArt to your publication. 288

TEAM LinG

4

Create and Work With Objects

USING PUBLISHER

Tip

How do I edit WordArt text?

Tip

To edit WordArt text, double-click the WordArt to redisplay the Edit WordArt Text dialog box. Then perform steps 4 and 5 below to specify the new text you want the WordArt to display.

How can I change the shape of WordArt?

To change the shape of WordArt, click the WordArt you want to change. In the WordArt toolbar that appears, click the WordArt Shape ( ) button. Then select the shape you want to use for the WordArt.

ick Cl lick C

Archaeology Digest - ...

The WordArt appears in your publication. The handles ( ) around the WordArt allow you to change the size of the WordArt. To move or resize WordArt, see page 298.

12:00 PM

When WordArt is selected, the WordArt toolbar appears, displaying buttons that allow you to change the appearance of the WordArt. To hide the WordArt toolbar and the handles ( ) around the WordArt, click outside the WordArt.

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

DELETE WORDART

⁄ Click the WordArt you

¤ Press the

Delete key to delete the WordArt.

want to delete. Handles ( ) appear around the WordArt.

TEAM289 LinG

ADD A TEXT BOX

When you want to add text to your publication, you need to add a text box to hold the text. Text boxes control the placement of text in a publication.

ADD A TEXT BOX

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

⁄ Click

to add a

text box.

¤ Position the mouse where you want to begin drawing the text box.

290

‹ Drag the mouse until the text box is the size you want.

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

The text box appears in your publication. The handles ( ) around the text box allow you to change the size of the text box. To move or resize a text box, see page 298.

12:00 PM

› Type the text you want to appear in the text box.

TEAM LinG

4

Create and Work With Objects

USING PUBLISHER

Tip

The text I entered in a text box does not fit in the text box. What can I do?

Tip

When you type more text than a text box can hold, Publisher displays the overflow indicator ( ) below the text box. To display the extra text, you can increase the size of the text box (see page 298), decrease the size of the text (see page 263) or connect the text box to another text box (see page 292).

Publisher automatically underlines possible misspelled words in red. The red underlines will not appear when you print your publication. To correct misspelled words, see page 248.

Be sure to bring a camera as you visit the ancient capitals of the old world! You'll be amazed as you visits sites such as the Eiffel Tower, London Bridge and other famus landmarks!

Be sure to bring a camera as you visit the ancient capitals of the old world! You'll be amazed as you visit sites such as the Eiffel Tower, London Bridge and

famus

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

When I type text in a text box, why do some words display a wavy, red underline?

ˇ If the text you are

Á When you finish

DELETE A TEXT BOX

typing is too small to read, press the F9 key to zoom in so you can clearly view the text.

typing the text, click outside the text box to hide the handles ( ) around the text box.

⁄ Click an edge of the

Note: For more information on zooming in and out of your publication, see page 240.

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

¤ Press the

Delete key to delete the text box.

text box you want to delete. Handles ( ) appear around the text box.

TEAM291 LinG

CONNECT TEXT BOXES

You can connect text boxes so you can continue information in another location in your publication. Text that will not fit in one text box will flow into the next connected text box.

B g n i Fish

s y a D oat x t Bo Tex

1 pter xt Box Cha Te

A series of connected text boxes is referred to as a story. Connected text boxes can appear on the same page or across many pages.

ox tB Tex

CONNECT TEXT BOXES

12:00 PM

McKenzie Computers ...

When you type more text than a text box can hold, Publisher displays the overflow indicator ( ) below the text box.

⁄ Create a new text box. To create a text box, see page 290.

292

McKenzie Computers ...

¤ Click inside the text

› Click inside the new

box that contains the extra text.

text box to connect the text boxes.

‹ Click

to connect the text box that contains the extra text to the new text box ( changes to ).

12:00 PM

Publisher connects the text boxes. Any text that did not fit in the first text box appears in the connected text box.

TEAM LinG

4

Create and Work With Objects

USING PUBLISHER

Tip

How can I quickly determine which text boxes are connected?

Tip

Click anywhere inside a text box that connects to another text box. Press and hold down the Ctrl key as you press the A key. Publisher highlights all the text in the connected text boxes. To deselect the text, click a blank area in your publication.

"Has there been any contact since the distress call sent out at 07:00 hours?" Captain Jasper MacAlpine asked. He took a sip of his steaming coffee while bracing himself as a wave crashed into the side of the coast guard cutter. "No, we haven't heard a word," first officer Jim Squires replied curtly. "But with this weather sir, I don't think it looks good." It was nearing 10 o'clock in the morning. The fishing boat The Lucky Star had been

missing for over two hours. Jasper took a deep breath and rubbed his temples. The Lucky Star was Clarence Brighton's boat. Jasper played Sunday morning hockey with Clarence and his two crewmates, Simon "Slim" Irvine and Junior Perkins, at the local community center in Port Dover.

Click

+

⁄ Click inside a connected text box. An icon appears above and/or below the text box.

You can insert a section break. Click to the left of the text you want to move to the next text box. Then press and hold down the Ctrl key as you press the Enter "Has there been any contact since the distress call sent out at 07:00 hours?" key. To remove Captain Jasper MacAlpine asked. He took a sip of his steaming coffee while bracing a section break, himself as a wave crashed into the side of the coast guard cutter. click to the left "No, we haven't heard a word," first officer k lic C Jim Squires replied curtly. "But with this of the text you weather sir, I don't think it looks good." It was nearing 10 o'clock in the morning. The fishing boat The Lucky Star had been moved to the second text box "No, we haven't heard a word," first officer and then press Jim Squires replied curtly. "But with this weather sir, I don't think it looks good." the Backspace It was nearing 10 o'clock in the morning. The fishing boat The Lucky Star had been key. missing for over two hours. Jasper took a

A

Ctrl

12:00 PM

McKenzie Computers ...

MOVE BETWEEN CONNECTED TEXT BOXES

How can I move text from the bottom of one connected text box to the top of another?

¤ Click an icon to move to the previous ( or next ( ) connected text box.

)

Publisher will select the previous or next connected text box. Handles ( ) appear around the selected text box.

+

deep breath and rubbed his temples. The Lucky Star was Clarence Brighton's boat.

Enter

12:00 PM

McKenzie Computers ...

BREAK THE CONNECTION BETWEEN TWO TEXT BOXES

⁄ Click inside the first text box you no longer want to connect to another text box.

¤ Click

to break the connection between the text boxes. Publisher will remove the text from the second text box and add the text back to the first text box.

TEAM293 LinG

ADD A TABLE

You can add a table to neatly display information in your publication. Tables can help you organize lists of information, such as product details or sales figures.

A table consists of rows, columns and cells. Row Column Cell

ADD A TABLE

4 4

[None]

12:00 PM

McKenzie Computers ...

⁄ Click

to add a table to your publication.

¤ Position the mouse where you want the top left corner of the table to appear.

294

‹ Drag the mouse until the table is the size you want.

12:00 PM

McKenzie Computers ...

The Create Table dialog box appears.

› Double-click the number in this area and type the number of rows you want to include in your table.

ˇ Double-click the number in this area and type the number of columns you want to include in your table.

TEAM LinG

4

Create and Work With Objects

USING PUBLISHER

How can I quickly add a row to the bottom of a table?

Tip

Tip

To quickly add a row to the bottom of a table, click the bottom right cell in the table and then press the Tab key.

How do I delete a table I no longer want to appear in my publication?

Click the edge of the table you want to delete. Handles ( ) appear around the table. Press the Delete key to delete the table.

"

"Click

4 4

List 3

McKenzie Computers ...

Á Click the style you want to use for your table.

12:00 PM

12:00 PM

McKenzie Computers ...

This area displays a sample of the table style you selected and information about the type of data this style of table usually stores.

The table appears in your publication. The handles ( ) around the table allow you to change the size of the table. To move or resize a table, see page 298.

‡ Click OK to add the table to your publication.

° To add text to the table, click inside a cell and then type the text.

Note: To zoom in so you can clearly view the text you type, see page 240.

· When you finish adding text to the table, click outside the table.

TEAM295 LinG

ADD A DESIGN GALLERY OBJECT

You can add attractive design gallery objects, such as reply forms, calendars, logos, coupons and borders, to your publication.

Many of the objects available in the design gallery contain sample text that you can replace with your own text. ADD A DESIGN GALLERY OBJECT

Objects by Design

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

⁄ Click

to add a design gallery object to your publication.

The Design Gallery dialog box appears.

My Objects

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

¤ Click a tab to display the available design gallery objects by category or by design.

‹ Click the category or design set of interest.

This area displays the objects in the category or design set you selected.

› Click the object you want to add to your publication.

ˇ Click Insert Object 296

to add the object.

TEAM LinG

4

Create and Work With Objects

USING PUBLISHER

Tip

How can I change the appearance of a design gallery object I added to my publication?

To change the appearance of a design gallery object, click the object and then click the icon ( ) that appears below the object. A task pane appears that allows you to choose a new design for the object. In the task pane, click the design you want to use.

Note: If the icon ( ) does not appear below the design gallery object, you cannot change the appearance of the object.

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

The design gallery object appears in your publication. The handles ( ) around the object allow you to change the size of the object. To move or resize an object, see page 298.

12:00 PM

To hide the handles ( around the object, click outside the object.

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

)

DELETE A DESIGN GALLERY OBJECT

¤ Press the

Delete

key

to delete the object.

⁄ Click the edge of the object you want to delete. Handles ( ) appear around the object.

TEAM297 LinG

MOVE OR RESIZE AN OBJECT

You can change the location and size of an object in your publication.

Happy Birthday!

For example, you may want to move a picture to a more suitable location or increase the size of a text box to display more text. MOVE AN OBJECT

12:00 PM

Archaeology Digest - ...

⁄ Position the mouse over an edge of the object you want to move ( changes to ).

¤ Drag the object to a new location.

298

Note: To drag the object in a straight line, press and hold down the Shift key as you drag the object.

Archaeology Digest - ...

The object appears in the new location.

12:00 PM

To deselect the object, click outside the object.

A dashed line indicates where the object will appear.

TEAM LinG

4

Create and Work With Objects

USING PUBLISHER

Tip

Which handle ( an object?

) should I use to resize

Tip

When I select an object, why does a green handle ( ) appear?

You can use the green handle ( ) to rotate the object. To rotate an object, position the mouse over the green handle ( changes to ). Then drag the mouse in the direction you want to rotate the object.

Changes the height of an object Changes the width of an object Changes the height and width of an object at the same time

RESIZE AN OBJECT

Archaeology Digest - ...

12:00 PM

⁄ Click the object you want

‹ Drag the handle until

to resize. Handles ( ) appear around the object.

the object is the size you want.

¤ Position the mouse

Note: To maintain the object’s proportions, press and hold down the Shift key as you drag a corner handle.

over one of the handles ( changes to , , or ).

A dashed line indicates the new size.

Archaeology Digest - ...

The object appears in the new size.

12:00 PM

To deselect the object, click outside the object.

TEAM299 LinG

CHANGE THE COLOR OF AN OBJECT

NGE

You can change the color of an object to draw attention to the object or to improve the appearance of the object.

CHANGE COLOR TO ORA

Publisher allows you to change the color of objects such as text boxes, AutoShapes and WordArt. CHANGE THE COLOR OF AN OBJECT

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

⁄ Click the object you want

‹ Click the color you

to display in a different color. Handles ( ) appear around the object.

want to use.

¤ Click

in this area to display the available colors.

300

Note: The available colors depend on the color scheme used in your publication. For information on color schemes, see page 277.

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

The object displays the color you selected.

12:00 PM

To deselect the object, click outside the object.

Note: If you do not want the object to display a color, perform steps 1 to 3, selecting No Fill in step 3.

TEAM LinG

4

CHANGE THE COLOR OF THE LINE AROUND AN OBJECT

Create and Work With Objects

USING PUBLISHER

You can enhance an object by changing the color of the line surrounding the object.

Publisher allows you to change the line color for objects such as text boxes, pictures, clip art images and WordArt. By default, many types of objects are surrounded by a dashed line, which will not appear when you print your publication. When you change the line color, Publisher will print the line in the color you selected. CHANGE THE COLOR OF THE LINE AROUND AN OBJECT

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

⁄ Click the object you

‹ Click the line color

want to display a different line color. Handles ( ) appear around the object.

you want to use.

¤ Click

in this area to display the available line colors.

Note: The available line colors depend on the color scheme used in your publication. For information on color schemes, see page 277.

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

The line surrounding the object displays the new color. To deselect the object, click outside the object.

12:00 PM

Note: If you do not want the object to display a line, perform steps 1 to 3, selecting No Line in step 3.

TEAM301 LinG

CHANGE THE STYLE OF THE LINE AROUND AN OBJECT X

BO

XT

E Adams: TMr. I am delighted to inform you that

You can enhance an object by changing the style of the line surrounding the object.

your company has been selected to receive a Community Spirit Award. Your staff's efforts to raise money to buy new equipment for the local

1/4 PT

hospital are admirable. A reception will be held to honor you

E

Publisher allows you to change the line style for objects such as text boxes, pictures, clip art images and AutoShapes.

R TU

and the other winners at

C PI

Hall at 8 p.m. on Breton Banquet T July 12 ARth .

IP

CL

3 PT

Nancy L. Spencer, Chairperson Community Spirit Awards Committee

1PT

By default, many types of objects are surrounded by a dashed line, which will not appear when you print your publication. When you change the line style, Publisher will print the line in the style you selected.

E

AP

T

H OS

AU

2 PT

CHANGE THE STYLE OF THE LINE AROUND AN OBJECT

You are cordially invited to visit the Mayfield Museum for a oncein-a-lifetime event. See rarely viewed Egyptian mummies and artifacts from the Cairo Museum.

You are cordially invited to v the Mayfield Museum for a o in-a-lifetime event. See rarel viewed Egyptian mummies a artifacts from th Cairo Museum

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

⁄ Click the object you

‹ Click the line style

want to display a different line style. Handles ( ) appear around the object.

you want to use.

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

The line surrounding the object displays the new style. To deselect the object, click outside the object.

12:00 PM

Note: If you do not want the object to display a line, perform steps 1 to 3, selecting No Line in step 3.

¤ Click

to display the available line styles.

302

TEAM LinG

4

CHANGE THE WAY TEXT WRAPS AROUND AN OBJECT

Create and Work With Objects

USING PUBLISHER

After you add an object to your publication, you can change the way the text wraps around the object.

You can have Publisher wrap text to form a square around an object or fit tightly around an object. Publisher can also wrap text around the top and bottom of an object. CHANGE THE WAY TEXT WRAPS AROUND AN OBJECT

12:00 PM

Vacation Flyer - Micro...

⁄ Click the object you want to wrap text around. Handles ( ) appear around the object.

‹ Click Text Wrapping. › Click the way you want the text to wrap around the object.

Vacation Flyer - Micro...

The text wraps around the object in the way you selected. To deselect the object, click outside the object.

12:00 PM

If you do not want Publisher to wrap the text around the object, perform steps 1 to 4, selecting None in step 4.

¤ Click Arrange. TEAM303 LinG

ADD A SHADOW TO AN OBJECT

You can add a shadow to an object to make the object appear as if it is raised off the page.

Publisher allows you to add a shadow to objects such as text boxes, clip art images and AutoShapes. ADD A SHADOW TO AN OBJECT

12:00 PM

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

⁄ Click the object you want to add a shadow to. Handles ( ) appear around the object.

¤ Click

to select a shadow style.

304

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

‹ Click the shadow style you want to use.

Exhibit Invitation - Mi...

The object displays the shadow you selected. To deselect the object, click outside the object.

12:00 PM

If you do not want the object to display a shadow, perform steps 1 to 3, selecting No Shadow in step 3.

TEAM LinG

ADD A 3-D EFFECT TO AN OBJECT

4

Create and Work With Objects

USING PUBLISHER

You can add a three-dimensional effect to an object to give the object depth in your publication.

Publisher allows you to add a 3-D effect to many AutoShapes, WordArt and design gallery objects. ADD A 3-D EFFECT TO AN OBJECT

12:00 PM

Garage Sale Flyer - M...

⁄ Click the object you want to add a 3-D effect to. Handles ( ) appear around the object.

¤ Click a 3-D effect.

to select

Garage Sale Flyer - M...

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Formatting toolbar to display the button.

The object displays the 3-D effect you selected.

‹ Click the 3-D effect

To deselect the object, click outside the object.

you want to use.

Note: If the 3-D effects are dimmed, you cannot add a 3-D effect to the object you selected.

12:00 PM

If you do not want the object to display a 3-D effect, perform steps 1 to 3, selecting No 3-D in step 3.

TEAM305 LinG

Time

12:30

's r t o t c Do ointmen App pm 2 y a

2:00 3:50

L

Marke Presen

TEAM LinG

tat

USING OUTLOOK

Using Outlook

1 2 3

Exchange E-mail Pages 308-327

Manage Information Pages 328-345

Outlook With Business Contact Manager Pages 346-375

Activities

Lunch w

rketing

tation

ith Kevin

Time

9:00

meeting

Activities

Sales me

eting

12:15

TEAM LinG

Lunch w

i

INTRODUCTION TO OUTLOOK

+

Outlook can help you manage your e-mail messages, appointments, contacts, tasks and notes.

July 2001 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

Buy milk and bread

12

13

14

Pick up the kids Go to the gym Prepare dinner

Appointment List

Bob White Janet Young

Bring home work

MESSAGE Please send me the latest sales report. Bob

E-MAIL

APPOINTMENT Time: 8:15 a.m. Date: Aug 20, 2001 Name: George Gon Phone: (555) 555-3974 APPOINTMENTS

Meeting has been re-booked for Friday.

Some editions of Microsoft Office 2003 include Outlook with Business Contact Manager to help you keep track of your business contacts and activities. For information on Outlook with Business Contact Manager, see page 346.

Exchange E-mail

Manage Information

You can use Outlook to exchange e-mail messages with friends, family members and colleagues. You can create and send a new message or reply to a message you have received. Outlook provides several mail folders to help you organize your e-mail messages and reduce the number of junk mail messages that arrive in your Inbox.

Outlook offers many features that allow you to manage information. You can keep track of your appointments, store information about your contacts and create a list of things to do. You can also create notes to store small pieces of information, such as reminders or ideas. Outlook also provides a Journal that you can use to keep track of your daily activities.

m

y 10

sa

m@ te

rrifi

ctoy

s.co

Tuesday, Jul

8 MAIL

9

00

10

00

11 12

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

AD3

Chicago Stamp Club -...

POWER RESET

288

MG

AA

CH

COMPACT COMPACT

CH

RQ

SQ

TR

HR

ll rcS kco oL

308

s aC kcp oL

00

pm

1

00

2

00

3

00

UVWXYZ IJ KLMNOPQRST ABCDEFGH

light Book f o t t o Chicag

Maxi

FAX MODEM

12:00 PM

am

m kcouLN

TEAM LinG

1

PARTS OF THE OUTLOOK WINDOW

Exchange E-mail

USING OUTLOOK

The Outlook window displays several items to help you perform tasks efficiently.

Title Bar

Menu Bar

Toolbar

Shows the name of the Outlook feature or folder you are currently working with.

Provides access to lists of commands available in Outlook and displays an area where you can type a question to get help information.

Contains buttons that allow you to create new items and select common commands, such as Print.

Navigation Pane

Provides an easy way to access all the Outlook features and folders.

Carl Davis [email protected]

Carl Davis 9:03... Change of Plans

Reading Pane

Displays the contents of the Outlook feature or folder you are currently working with.

OUTLOOK FEATURES Mail

Calendar

Contacts

Allows you to compose, store and work with e-mail messages.

Allows you to keep track of appointments.

Contains an address book where you can store contact information.

Tasks

Notes

Folder List

Allows you to create a list of things to do.

Allows you to create and store brief reminder notes.

Allows you to quickly access all your personal folders in Outlook.

TEAM309 LinG

READ MESSAGES

You can easily open and read the contents of your e-mail messages.

USA

29

When you receive a new message, your computer plays a sound, an envelope icon appears at the bottom right corner of your screen and a desktop alert briefly appears. The desktop alert displays the person’s name, a subject and a short preview of the message so you can determine if you want to read the message right away. READ MESSAGES

Sue Grant [[email protected]]

Inbox

Ryan Smith [[email protected]]

Ann Lewis

Ann Lewis

Ryan Smith 10:37... Fundraising Com..

12:00 PM

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

⁄ Click Mail to be able to read and work with your e-mail messages.

‹ Click Inbox to view the

¤ To immediately check for new messages, click Send/Receive or press the F9 key.

The number in brackets beside the Inbox folder indicates the number of messages you have not yet read.

310

messages you have received.

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

This area displays your messages. Unread messages display a closed envelope ( ) and appear in bold type.

› Click a message you

12:00 PM

This area displays the contents of the message you selected. To view the contents of another message, click the message.

want to read.

TEAM LinG

1

Exchange E-mail

USING OUTLOOK

Tip

What mail folders does Outlook use to store my messages?

Deleted Items

Stores messages you have deleted.

Drafts

Stores messages you have not yet completed.

Inbox

Stores messages sent to you.

Junk E-mail

Stores messages Outlook considers to be junk mail.

Outbox

Temporarily stores messages that have not yet been sent.

Sent Items

Stores copies of messages you have sent.

Search Folders

Contains folders that display messages that meet certain conditions, such as messages you have flagged ( ), messages larger than 100 KB and messages you have not yet read.

Ann Lewis [[email protected]]

Ryan Smith [[email protected]] Ann Lewis

'David Jones' Thu...

Ryan Smith 10:37... Fundraising Com...

'Jason Cook' Thu... 'Mark Taylor' Thu... RE: Sales Meeting

[mailto:[email protected]]

12:00 PM

Sent Items - Microsof...

⁄ To display all the mail folders, click beside

To display the folders within the Search Folders folder, click beside

This area displays the messages in the folder you selected.

Search Folders

Personal Folders

(

‹ To view the contents of a message, click the message.

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

READ MESSAGES IN OTHER MAIL FOLDERS

(

changes to

).

The mail folders appear.

changes to

).

¤ Click the folder that contains the messages you want to read.

12:00 PM

This area displays the contents of the message.

TEAM311 LinG

SEND A MESSAGE

You can send an e-mail message to express an idea or request information.

Thursd ay meetin g

Linds Thereay, Board will be Pleas room a Board e let C. If there of Gove me meeti are know rnors any meeti Than ng, pleas itemsif you ng this Jack k you, e informthat will be you able Thurs would to attend me day and at 4 I will like added. p.m. add in them to discu to the ss agendat the a.

29 USA

COLO

RV IEW

To practice sending a message, you can send a message to yourself. SEND A MESSAGE

[email protected] [email protected]

Ryan Smith [[email protected]] Ann Lewis is 10:37 AM sing Comm...

12:00 PM

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

⁄ Click

beside

New.

¤ Click Mail Message to send a new message.

312

A window that allows you to compose a message appears.

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

Untitled Message

‹ Type the e-mail address of the person you want to receive the message.

› To send a copy of the message to a person who is not directly involved but would be interested in the message, click this area and then type the e-mail address of the person.

12:00 PM

Note: To send the message or a copy of the message to more than one person in step 3 or 4, separate each e-mail address you type with a semicolon (;).

TEAM LinG

1

Exchange E-mail

USING OUTLOOK

Tip

How can I express emotions in my messages?

Tip

You can type sets of characters to express emotions in your messages. These characters resemble human faces if you turn them sideways. When you type certain sets of characters to express a happy, sad or indifferent emotion, Outlook will automatically replace the characters with an image.

How can I save time when typing messages?

You can use abbreviations for commonly used words and phrases to save time when typing messages. Meaning BTW

by the way

FAQ

frequently asked questions

FWIW

for what it’s worth

Emotion:

Type:

IMO

in my opinion

Cry

:’-(

JK

just kidding

Laugh

:-D

L8R

later

Surprise

:-O

LOL

laugh out loud

Happy

:) changes to

ROTFL

Sad

:( changes to

rolling on the floor laughing

Indifferent

:| changes to

SO

significant other

WRT

with respect to

[email protected]

[email protected]

[email protected]

[email protected]

Ann Lewis

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

ˇ Click this area and then type a subject for the message.

Á Click this area and then type the message.

Business Convention ...

12:00 PM

Outlook automatically underlines misspelled words in red and grammar errors in green as you type. To correct spelling and grammar errors, see page 318. Note: You should use upper and lower case letters when typing the message. A message written in all CAPITAL LETTERS is annoying and difficult to read.

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

‡ If you want to indicate the importance of the message, click a button to mark the message as very important ( ) or not very important ( ).

Note: You can click the button again if you no longer want to indicate the importance of the message.

Business Convention ...

12:00 PM

° Click Send to send the message. Outlook sends the message and stores a copy of the message in the Sent Items folder. To display the messages in the Sent Items folder, see page 311. TEAM313 LinG

SELECT A NAME FROM THE ADDRESS BOOK

When sending a message, you can use the Address Book to quickly select the name of the person you want to receive the message.

[email protected]

SES DRES IL AD E-MA

Name hom Jack T

Address

abc.com jthomas@

as

abc.com sjones@

ones Sue J

Name

Address

Parker Silvia

sparker@ab

mart Joy S

c.com

jsmar t@abc.

com

abc.com bcarey@

arey Bill C Henr y

AIL ADDRESSES E-M

Kim

abc.com hkim@

Selecting names from the Address Book saves you from having to remember the e-mail addresses of people you often send messages to. SELECT A NAME FROM THE ADDRESS BOOK

Amy Martin (am... amy@ Janet Young (jyoung... jyoun David Jones (davidj... david Emily Ross (eross... eross Simon Evans (sevans... sevan fhill@ Frank Hill (fhill...

Amy Martin Janet Young David Jones Emily Ross Simon Evans Frank Hill

Emily Ross ([email protected])

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

⁄ To create a new message, perform steps 1 and 2 on page 312. A window that allows you to compose a message appears.

314

Untitled Message

12:00 PM

¤ To select a name from the Address Book, click To. The Select Names dialog box appears.

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

This area shows the name of the address list that contains the displayed names. You can click this area to display the names in another list.

‹ Click the name of the person you want to receive the message.

Untitled Message

12:00 PM

› Click To. This area displays the name of the person you selected. You can repeat steps 3 and 4 for each person

you want to receive the message.

TEAM LinG

1

Exchange E-mail

USING OUTLOOK

Tip

When selecting a name from the Address Book, what address lists are available to select names from?

Tip

A carbon copy (Cc) sends an exact copy of a message to a person. A blind carbon copy (Bcc) sends an exact copy of a message to a person, without anyone else knowing that the person received the message.

CONTACTS

You can select names from the Contacts list, which displays the name of every person you have entered an e-mail address for in your contact list. To add a person to your list of contacts, see page 332. If you have Outlook with Business Contact Manager installed on your computer, you can also select names from the Accounts and Business Contacts lists. To add an account or business contact, see page 348 or 352.

What is the difference between a carbon copy and a blind carbon copy?

ACCOUNTS

6

5

4

USA 29

3

2

1

USA 29

9

8

7

*

0

#

BUSINESS CONTACTS

USA 29

USA 29

Emily Ross ([email protected])

Amy Martin (am... amy@ Janet Young (jyoung... jyoun David Jones (davidj... david eross Emily Ross (eross... Simon Evans (sevans... sevan Frank Hill (fhill... fhill@

Amy Martin Janet Young David Jones Emily Ross Simon Evans Frank Hill

Frank Hill ([email protected])

Emily Ross ([email protected]) Frank Hill ([email protected])

Contacts - Microsoft ...

ˇ To send a carbon copy or blind carbon copy of the message to another person, click the name of the person. Á Click Cc or Bcc.

Untitled Message

12:00 PM

These areas display the name of the person you selected. You can repeat steps

Contacts - Microsoft ...

These areas display the name of each person you selected from the Address Book.

Untitled Message

12:00 PM

You can now finish composing the message.

5 and 6 for each person

you want to receive a copy of the message.

‡ Click OK to confirm the names you selected.

TEAM315 LinG

ATTACH A FILE TO A MESSAGE

You can attach a file to a message you are sending. Attaching a file is useful when you want to include additional information with a message.

To: Cc:

om s.sportz.c mary@sale om .c an john@mar

You can attach many types of files to a message, including documents, pictures, videos and sounds. The computer receiving the message must have the necessary hardware and software installed to display or play the file you attach.

erby Fishing D om Subject: s.sportz.c le sa h@ ra sa Fishing D erby Winne r your d ations on Congratul I’m looking forwar t! en achievem at the awards otos you to seeing ve also included ph I' le. ceremony! t in an attached fi even from the

When you attach a picture to a message, you can change the size of the picture. Changing the size of a picture is useful for reducing the file size of the picture so it will transfer faster over the Internet. ATTACH A FILE TO A MESSAGE

Map

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

⁄ To create a message, perform steps 1 to 6 starting on page 312. ¤ Click

to attach a file to the message.

316

Surprise Party - Mess...

12:00 PM

The Insert File dialog box appears.

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

Surprise Party - Mess...

This area shows the location of the displayed files. You can click this area to change the location. This area allows you to access files stored in commonly used locations. You can click a location to display the files stored in the location.

12:00 PM

‹ Click the name of the file you want to attach to the message.

› Click Insert to attach the file to the message.

TEAM LinG

1

Exchange E-mail

USING OUTLOOK

Tip

Why did a dialog box appear, stating that the file I attached is potentially unsafe?

Some types of files, such as program files, may contain viruses, which can damage the information on a computer. If the recipient of your message uses Outlook, the person may not be able to open the file you attached. To specify if you want to send the file, click Yes or No in the dialog box.

Tip

What should I consider before opening an attached file?

You will not be able to open attached files that Outlook believes may contain viruses. If Outlook allows you to open an attached file, you should still check the file for viruses with an anti-virus program before opening the file. Anti-virus programs, such as McAfee VirusScan and Norton AntiVirus, are available in computer stores and on the Internet. SCANNER

?

?? USA 29

Open Me!

[email protected]] Sue Grant First Quarter...

Small (448 x 336 px)

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

This area displays the name of the file you selected. If you attached a picture to the message, the Attachment Options task pane appears.

Surprise Party - Mess...

12:00 PM

ˇ To change the size of the picture, click this area to display the available size options. Á Click the picture size you want to use.

‡ Click Send to send the message.

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

12:00 PM

OPEN AN ATTACHED FILE

¤ To open an attached

⁄ Click a message with an

file, double-click the name of the file.

attached file. A message with an attached file displays a paper clip icon ( ). This area displays the name(s) of the file(s) attached to the message.

A dialog box may appear, asking if you want to open or save the file. Click Open or Save in the dialog box to open or save the file. TEAM317 LinG

CHECK SPELLING AND GRAMMAR

Before you send a message, you can find and correct all the spelling and grammar errors in the message. Outlook will not find a correctly spelled word used in the wrong context, such as “We have been in business for sit years.” You should carefully review your message to find this type of error.

Outlook compares every word in your message to words in its dictionary. If a word does not exist in the dictionary, the word is considered misspelled.

By default, Outlook will not spell check words typed in all UPPERCASE letters.

CHECK SPELLING AND GRAMMAR

courteous

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

Outlook automatically underlines misspelled words in red and grammar errors in green. The underlines will not appear when the person receives your message.

318

Recent Shipment - M...

12:00 PM

⁄ To correct the spelling and grammar errors in your message, click Tools.

¤ Click Spelling and Grammar.

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

The Spelling and Grammar dialog box appears if Outlook finds an error in your message.

Recent Shipment - M...

12:00 PM

This area displays suggestions for correcting the error.

This area displays the first misspelled word or grammar error.

TEAM LinG

1

Exchange E-mail

USING OUTLOOK

Tip

Can Outlook automatically correct my spelling mistakes?

Tip

How can I quickly correct a misspelled word or grammar error in a message?

Yes. Outlook automatically corrects common spelling and capitalization errors as you type. Here are a few examples. adn alot comittee don;t nwe occurence recieve seperate teh friday DOg

and a lot committee don't new occurrence receive separate the Friday Dog

¤ Click the suggestion you want to use to correct the error.

Note: If you do not want to use any of the suggestions, click outside the menu to close the menu.

⁄ Right-click the misspelled word or grammar error. A menu appears with suggestions to correct the error.

courteous

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

‹ Click the suggestion you want to use to correct the error.

› Click Change to correct the error in your message.

Recent Shipment - M...

12:00 PM

To skip the error and continue checking your message, click Ignore Once.

Note: To skip the error and all other occurrences of the error in your message, click Ignore All or Ignore Rule. The name of the button depends on whether the error is a misspelled word or a grammar error.

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

ˇ Correct or ignore misspelled words and grammar errors until this dialog box appears, telling you the spelling and grammar check is complete.

Recent Shipment - M...

12:00 PM

Á Click OK to close the dialog box.

TEAM319 LinG

REPLY TO A MESSAGE

You can reply to a message to answer a question, express an opinion or supply additional information. INK

Message Have you received the latest sales report?

Christie

When you reply to a message, Outlook includes a copy of the original message to help the reader identify which message you are replying to. To save the reader time, you can delete all parts of the original message that do not directly relate to your reply. After you reply to a message, an arrow ( appears in the icon beside the message.

)

REPLY TO A MESSAGE

Mark Taylor <[email protected]>

Mark Taylor [[email protected]] Ann Lewis Carl Davis 10... Amy Martin...

Mark Taylor Wed... Sales Meeting Mark Taylor [mailto: [email protected]]

Helen Reed Overtime Hours Daniel Price Linda Harris

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

⁄ Click the message you want to reply to.

¤ Click the reply option you want to use.

12:00 PM

RE: Sales Meeting - M...

12:00 PM

Reply - Sends a reply to the author only.

Outlook fills in the e-mail address(es) for you.

‹ Click this area and then

Reply to All - Sends a reply to the author and everyone who received the original message.

Outlook also fills in the subject, starting the subject with RE:. To use a different subject, drag the mouse over the text to highlight the text and then type a new subject.

› Click Send to send the reply.

A window that allows you to compose your reply appears.

320

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

type your reply.

Outlook sends the reply and stores a copy in the Sent Items folder. To view the messages in the Sent TEAM LinG Items folder, see page 311.

1

FORWARD A MESSAGE

Exchange E-mail

USING OUTLOOK

After reading a message, you can add comments and then forward the message to a friend, colleague or family member.

Thhees wwill saalelessco i lb cn aat t4 beehheeld onfeferreenc 4PPM ldththis ncee M.. isFFrid ridaay y

Forward t BJobimWBehrirtyo:

Forwarding a message is useful when another person would be interested in the message. After you forward a message, an arrow ( appears in the icon beside the message.

BoJi b,m, WWououldld you be you ininteterre esstteedd inbegoing? in goi ng? T

✰ ✰ 3322

e

)

FORWARD A MESSAGE

[email protected]

Carl Davis [[email protected]] Ann Lewis Carl Davis 10... Change of Plans Amy Martin...

Mark Taylor Wed... Helen Reed... Overtime Hours

Carl Davis [mailto: [email protected]]

Daniel Price... Linda Harris

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

⁄ Click the message you want to forward to another person.

¤ Click Forward.

12:00 PM

A window that displays the contents of the message you are forwarding appears.

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

FW: Change of Plans ...

12:00 PM

‹ Type the e-mail address of the person you want to receive the message.

› Click this area and

Outlook fills in the subject for you, starting the subject with FW:. To use a different subject, drag the mouse over the text to highlight the text and then type a new subject.

ˇ Click Send to forward the message.

then type any comments about the message.

TEAM321 LinG

FLAG A MESSAGE

You can have Outlook display a flag beside a message to make the message stand out. Flagging a message can help remind you to follow up on the message at a later time.

29 USA

29 USA

USA

29

USA

29

USA

29

USA

29

29 USA

A 29 US

A 29

US

FLAG A MESSAGE

Sue Grant [[email protected]]

Sue Grant [[email protected]] Follow up Kevin Turner 2:1...

Kevin Turner 2:1...

Ann Lewis

Follow up Completed on Friday, July 11, 2003 12:00 PM Ann Lewis

Ryan Smith 10:37 AM

Ryan Smith 10:37 AM Paul Fraser 10:...

Ann,

Paul Fraser 10:...

Sue Grant Thu 2:30 First Quarter S..

Sue Grant Thu 2:30 First Quarter S..

Carl Davis Thu 1...

Carl Davis Thu 1...

Sue Amy Martin

Amy Martin

12:00 PM

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

⁄ Click

beside the message you want to flag ( changes to ).

322

Ann,

You can repeat step 1 for each message you want to flag.

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

MARK A FLAGGED MESSAGE AS COMPLETE

⁄ Click

beside the flagged message you want to mark as complete ( changes to ).

Sue

12:00 PM

Note: If you accidentally marked a flagged message as complete, you can click beside the message to once again flag the message ( changes to ).

TEAM LinG

1

Exchange E-mail

USING OUTLOOK

Tip

How do I change the color of a flag?

Tip

Changing the color of flags allows you to categorize your flagged messages. For example, you can use red flags to mark messages you need to deal with right away and yellow flags to mark messages you can deal with at a later time. To change the color of a flag, right-click the flag and then click the flag color you want to use from the menu that appears.

How do I remove a flag from a message?

If you accidentally flagged a message, you can remove the flag from the message. To remove a flag, right-click the flag and then select Clear Flag from the menu that appears ( changes to ).

29 USA

Right Away

Later

Sue Grant [[email protected]] Kevin Turner 2:1...

Paul Fraser [[email protected]]

Follow up Completed on Friday, July 11, 2003 12:00 PM

Follow up Kevin Turner

Ann Lewis

Ann Lewis Paul Fraser 10: ... Lunch Meeting

Ryan Smith 10:37 AM Paul Fraser 10:...

Ann,

Ann,

Kim Grey Thu 2:30 First Quarter S..

Sue Grant Thu 2:30 First Quarter S.. Carl Davis Thu 1... Amy Martin

Paul

Sue

12:00 PM

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

REVIEW FLAGGED MESSAGES

All the messages you have flagged appear in the For Follow Up folder, which is stored in the Search Folders folder.

⁄ To display all the mail folders, click beside Personal Folders

(

changes to

).

The mail folders appear.

¤ To display the folders within the Search Folders folder, click beside

For Follow Up - Micro...

‹ Click For Follow Up to view all the messages you have flagged. This area displays all the messages you have flagged.

12:00 PM

› To view the contents of a message, click the message. This area displays the contents of the message.

Search Folders

(

changes to

).

TEAM323 LinG

ARRANGE MESSAGES

You can change the way Outlook arranges your messages to help you more easily locate messages of interest.

ucuckkk Ch Ch Chuc

e

kkkk ee ee ee W st W ee st La W ststW La La La kkk ee ee WW st eeay st La rd ayay La stW tete La YYes rd terd rday Yes Yes esteterday Yes

kkk uc Ch uc Ch uc kkk s Meeting Ch uc Ch uc Ch uc k le g Ch uc : Sa Ch RE tin g tin ee sssM M ee le tingg Mee g Sa le eetin Sa le Sa Sales M uckk : Sales Meetin Ch : RE g Ch REuc tin ggg ee tin M ee tin s M ee le s tin g M Sa le ee s tin g Sa le s MMMee Sa lele ee ting Sa eetin Sa Sa lesss M Sale tingg eetin Mee Sa lessM Sale

W eekk st Wyee La stda LaTo

CON

SORT IT

EMS

S T ITEM

SOR

kkk uc Ch uc Ch uc kkk Ch uc Ch ucuc Ch k Ch Chuc gg tin tin ee sssM M ee le tingg Mee Sa le eetin Sa le Sa le Sa s M uckk Ch Chuc tingg ee tin gg ee tin ssM ee le tin M Sa le eeee MM Sa le tin sM Sa lesle tinggg Sa eetin Mee Sa Sa lesss M Sale

kkk uc Ch uc Ch uc kkk Ch uc Ch uc Ch uc kge ofg plans Ch uc Ch anee Ch tin g tin ee sssM le tingg M Sa lele eetin Mee Sa sM Sa Sale ting Ch uc lekks Mee Ch Sauc ggg tin ee tin M ee tin s ggg M ee le sssM tin Sa le ee tin M Sa le ee tin g Sa M le ee tin s M Sa ee Sa le Sa less M Sale

tingg eetin Mee Sa lessM Sale

tingg eetin Mee Sa lessM Sale

D

FLAGGE

T

SUBJEC

ION VERSAT

DATE

You can arrange messages in many ways, including by date, by conversation, by subject or by messages you have flagged ( ).

uc kk nity Leav Ch Ch ucker at Ch Muc

k ting uc Ch uc Ch uc lekks Mee Ch Sa

EMS

SORT IT

EMS

SORT IT

ARRANGE MESSAGES

Arranged By: Da

Jason Cook 2

Carl Davis [[email protected]]

Carl Davis [[email protected]]

forwarded this message on 7/10/2003 16 AM

You forwarded this message on 7/10/2003 11:16 AM

Ann Lewis

Carl Davis Thu 1... Change of Plans

Ann Lewis

Kevin Turner

Hi Ann,

Ann, Sue Grant 2:0

Sue Grant

2:05 PM

Ryan Smith 10

Sue Grant Thu 2:30...

Paul Fraser Jason Cook 2:53...

Sue Grant Thu

Ryan Smith 10:37...

arl

Carl

Carl Davis Th

12:00 PM

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

By default, Outlook arranges messages by date.

⁄ To change how Outlook arranges your messages, click the Arranged By column heading. A menu appears. 324

¤ Click the way you want to arrange the messages.

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

The messages are arranged in the way you specified. To hide the messages displayed in a group to make your screen less cluttered, click the minus sign ( ) beside the group heading ( changes to ).

12:00 PM

Note: To once again display the messages in a group, click the plus sign ( ) beside the group heading ( changes to ).

TEAM LinG

1

DELETE A MESSAGE

Exchange E-mail

USING OUTLOOK

You can delete a message you no longer need. Deleting messages prevents your mail folders from becoming cluttered with messages.

es g a s s Me

DELETE A MESSAGE

Daniel Price [[email protected]]

Linda Harris [[email protected]]

Ann Lewis

Ann Lewis Carl Davis 10:...

Carl Davis 10:...

Ann, Amy Martin

Amy Martin

Mark Taylor Wed...

Mark Taylor Wed...

Daniel Price We...

Daniel Price We... McKenzie Project

Linda Harris... Company Picnic

Daniel

Linda Harris

12:00 PM

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

⁄ Click the message

¤ Click

you want to delete.

message.

to delete the

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

The message disappears.

12:00 PM

Outlook places the message in the Deleted Items folder. To view the contents of the Deleted Items folder, see page 311.

TEAM325 LinG

WORK WITH JUNK MAIL

Outlook examines messages you receive to determine which messages are junk mail. Messages that Outlook considers to be junk mail are automatically placed in the Junk E-mail folder. To Subje : Linda H ct: arr

Wealt is h I b can s in jusecome a how how t fou millio to r day naire s. Bob

When Outlook receives a message that appears to be junk mail, a dialog box will appear, indicating that the message was automatically moved to the Junk E-mail folder.

arris inda H nch To: L bject: Lu Su

to u like lunch ld yo Wou o out for iday ? g is Fr th

Jay

You should check the Junk E-mail folder regularly to make sure the folder does not contain messages you wish to read.

WORK WITH JUNK MAIL

Tara Gibb [[email protected]]

Carl Davis [[email protected]]

Ann Lewis

Ann Lewis Emily Ross...

Jason Cook 9:08...

Hi Ann, Carl Davis

A Appliances C...

9:0...

Tara Gibb 9:44 Earn $1000 a week! Janet Young Fri 7... Kevin Turner Fri 7... Ryan Smith Fri 7/11

Carl Tara Gibb

Paul Fraser Fri... Sue Grant Thu 7/10

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

The mail folders appear.

VIEW JUNK MAIL

⁄ Click Mail. ¤ To display all the mail folders, click

beside

Personal Folders

(

changes to

326

12:00 PM

).

‹ Click Junk E-mail to view the junk e-mail messages you have received.

Note: The number in brackets beside the Junk E-mail folder indicates the number of messages in the folder.

Junk E-mail - Microsof...

This area displays the junk e-mail messages you have received. Unread junk e-mail messages display a closed envelope ( ) and appear in bold type.

12:00 PM

This area displays the contents of the message you selected.

› To view the contents of a message, click the message. TEAM LinG

1

Exchange E-mail

USING OUTLOOK

Tip

How do I mark a message I received as junk mail?

Tip

If Outlook did not correctly identify a message as junk mail, you can instruct Outlook to identify the message (and all future messages sent by the same person) as junk mail. Right-click the message you want to identify as junk mail. On the menu that appears, click Junk E-mail and then click Add Sender to Blocked Senders List. In the confirmation dialog box that appears, click OK.

How do I empty the Junk E-mail folder?

To empty the Junk E-mail folder, right-click the folder and then click Empty “Junk E-mail” Folder on the menu that appears. In the confirmation dialog box that appears, click Yes to permanently delete the messages in the folder.

Junk E-mail

A Appliances Customer Service [ Ann Lewis Emily Ross...

Dear Ms. Lewis, A Appliances C... Allan Appliances Tara Gibb

9:44

s,

Ron Allan

Ron Allan

Junk E-mail - Microsof...

MARK A MESSAGE AS NOT JUNK MAIL

If Outlook incorrectly identifies a message as junk mail, you can instruct Outlook not to identify the message as junk mail.

⁄ Click the message that Outlook incorrectly identified as junk mail.

12:00 PM

¤ Click Not Junk.

12:00 PM

Junk E-mail - Microsof...

The Mark as Not Junk dialog box appears.

‹ This option indicates that Outlook will no longer identify messages sent from the specified e-mail address as junk mail. You can click the option to turn the option on ( ) or off ( ).

› Click OK. Outlook moves the message to the Inbox folder.

TEAM327 LinG

USING THE CALENDAR

You can use the Calendar to keep track of your appointments, such as business meetings and lunch dates.

July 2003

4

Outlook uses the date and time set in your computer to determine today’s date. To change the date and time set in your computer, refer to your Windows manual.

COLOR VIEW

16 Vin0

mG

DISPLAY THE CALENDAR

July 10, 2003

July 15, 2003

Calendar

Calendar - Microsoft ...

⁄ Click Calendar to display the Calendar.

12:00 PM

This area displays the appointments for the current day.

Note: To add an appointment, see page 330.

328

Calendar - Microsoft ...

This area displays the days in the current month. Days with appointments are shown in bold.

12:00 PM

¤ To display the appointments for another day, click the day. The day you select is highlighted. The current day displays a red outline.

TEAM LinG

2

Manage Information

USING OUTLOOK

Tip

What ways can I view the Calendar?

You can change the view of the Calendar to display your appointments in one of the following views.

Day

Work Week

Week

Month

July 14 - July 20

July 15, 2003

Tuesday, July 15

Calendar - Microsoft ...

‹ To display the days in another month, click one of the following options.

12:00 PM

Calendar - Microsoft ...

CHANGE VIEW OF CALENDAR

⁄ Click the way you want to view the Calendar.

Display previous month

Day

Display next month

Work Week

12:00 PM

Note: If the button you want is not displayed, click on the toolbar to display the button.

Week Month

TEAM329 LinG

USING THE CALENDAR Thursday,

You can add an appointment to the Calendar to remind you of an activity, such as a seminar or doctor’s appointment.

8

am

9

00

10

00

11

00

12 1 2 3

July 10

pm

00

00

00

SCHEDULE AN APPOINTMENT

July 16, 2003

July 10, 2003

12:00 PM

Calendar - Microsoft ...

⁄ Click Calendar to display the Calendar.

¤ Click the day you want to add an appointment to.

330

To display the days in another month, click one of the following options. Display previous month

12:00 PM

Calendar - Microsoft ...

‹ Position the mouse over the starting time for the appointment.

› Drag the mouse

to select the amount of time you want to set aside for the appointment.

Display next month

TEAM LinG

2

Manage Information

USING OUTLOOK

Tip

Will Outlook remind me of an appointment I have scheduled?

Outlook will play a brief sound and display the Reminder dialog box 15 minutes before a scheduled appointment.

Staff Meeting

15 minutes

To close the Reminder dialog box, click one of the following options. Dismiss - Close the

reminder Snooze - Remind again

five minutes before the appointment

July 16, 2003

Calendar - Microsoft ...

ˇ Type a subject for the appointment and then press the Enter key.

12:00 PM

July 10, 2003

12:00 PM

Calendar - Microsoft ...

¤ Click

⁄ Position the mouse

to delete the appointment.

over the left edge of the appointment you want to delete ( changes to ). Then click the edge of the appointment.

Outlook places the appointment in the Deleted Items folder. To view the contents of the Deleted Items folder, see page 311.

DELETE AN APPOINTMENT

TEAM331 LinG

USING CONTACTS

Outlook allows you to keep detailed information about your colleagues, friends and family members.

Name

Name

Tabble, John President

Toland, Joe Doctor

Address n Avenue 897 Brow n Washingto , tle at Se 89 56 555 ) (206

Sue Thomas, Dentist

Address

reet 1523 Lake St ryland Baltimore, Ma 4 (410) 555-691

Street 578 Hill land re, Mary Baltimo 2 1 9 55-8 (410) 5

To create and keep track of business contacts, such as customers and suppliers, you may want to use Outlook with Business Contact Manager. For information on Outlook with Business Contact Manager see page 346. For information on creating business contacts with Business Contact Manager, see page 352.

CREATE A NEW CONTACT

Adams, Jack

12:00 PM

Contacts - Microsoft ...

Contacts - Microsoft ...

12:00 PM

Jason Cook - Contact

to display your contacts.

‹ Click New to create a

› Click an area and type

Á Click this area and

new contact.

¤ Click Contacts to

The Contact window appears, displaying areas where you can enter information about a contact.

the contact’s full name, job title and company name.

type the contact’s address.

ˇ Click an area and type

‡ Click this area and

the contact’s business, home, business fax and mobile phone numbers.

type the contact’s e-mail address.

⁄ Click

display your personal contacts.

332

Note: You do not need to enter information in every area.

TEAM LinG

2

Manage Information

USING OUTLOOK

Tip

Why did the Check Address dialog box appear after I entered an address?

If the address you entered is incomplete, Outlook displays the Check Address dialog box to help you complete the address.

¤ Click OK to confirm your changes.

⁄ To change part of the address, drag the mouse over the part you want to change and then type the correct information.

Note: To type new information in a blank area, click the area and type the information.

Jason Cook

Contacts - Microsoft ...

Jason Cook - Contact

12:00 PM

° Click an area and

‚ To display a picture

type the contact’s Web page and instant messaging addresses.

of the contact, click this area.

· Click this area and type any comments about the contact.

The Add Contact Picture dialog box appears.

Contacts - Microsoft ...

Jason Cook - Contact

12:00 PM

This area displays the location of the displayed pictures. You can click this area to change the location.

± Click OK to add the picture to the contact information.

— Click the picture you

information for the contact.

¡ When you finish entering information for the contact, click Save and Close to save the

want to add to the contact information.

TEAM333 LinG

USING CONTACTS

You can change the way contacts are displayed on your screen or browse through your contacts to find a contact you want to work with. When information about your contacts changes, you can easily update the information.

Name

Tabble, John President

Address enue 897 Brown Av Seattle, WA 89 (206) 555-56

ue Thomas, S Dentist

treet 578 Hill S , MD re o Baltim 5-8912 5 5 ) 0 1 (4

Name

Toland, Joe Doctor

Address

T

t U 1523 Lake Stree d vw an Baltimore, Maryl (410) 555-6914

Tu, Joe Writer

St. 989 Main CA n a rb Bu k, -2256 (818) 555

Outlook offers several different views you can use to display your contacts. For example, you can display additional details for each contact, organize your contacts into a phone list format or sort your contacts by company or by country.

WORK WITH CONTACTS

Contacts - Microsoft ...

CHANGE THE VIEW OF CONTACTS

⁄ To change the way your contacts are displayed on your screen, click an option in this area ( changes to ).

334

12:00 PM

Outlook displays your contacts in the view you selected. To return to the default view, repeat step 1, selecting Address Cards.

Contacts - Microsoft ...

BROWSE THROUGH CONTACTS

These tabs allow you to browse through your contacts alphabetically.

Note: These tabs are available only in the Address Cards view.

12:00 PM

⁄ Click the tab for the contacts you want to view. Contacts beginning with the letters you selected appear.

TEAM LinG

2

Manage Information

USING OUTLOOK

Tip

How do I delete a contact I no longer need?

Tip

How can I later remove or change a picture I added for a contact?

Click the contact you want to delete and then press the Delete key. Outlook places the contact in the Deleted Items folder. To view the contents of the Deleted Items folder, see page 311.

‹ To remove the picture, click Remove Picture and then perform step 3 below. To add a different picture, click Change Picture and then perform steps 11 to 13 on page 333.

Adams, Jack

⁄ Double-click the contact to display the information for the contact.

¤ Right-click the

jadam

picture for the contact. A menu appears.

Contacts - Microsoft ...

UPDATE CONTACT INFORMATION

⁄ To update the information for a contact, double-click the contact.

12:00 PM

The Contact window appears, displaying the information for the contact.

Contacts - Microsoft ...

¤ Drag the mouse

over the information you want to change and then type the new information.

Jack Adams - C

...

12:00 PM

‹ Click Save and Close to save your changes.

Note: To type new information for the contact in a blank area, click the area and type the information.

TEAM335 LinG

USING TASKS

You can create an electronic to-do list of personal and work-related tasks that you want to accomplish.

ASKS W ✓ORK T

✓

✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Outlook offers several views you can use to display your tasks. For example, you can choose to display only overdue tasks or only completed tasks in your task list.

USING TASKS

Make airline reservations for New Orleans trip

Tasks

12:00 PM

Tasks - Microsoft Offi...

This area displays a list of your tasks.

› Type a subject for the

your tasks.

‹ Click this area to

ˇ Click this area to

¤ Click Tasks.

create a new task.

enter a due date for the task. Then type the due date.

CREATE A TASK

⁄ Click

336

to display

12:00 PM

Tasks - Microsoft Offi...

task.

Á Press the

Enter key to finish creating the task.

The task appears in the list.

TEAM LinG

2

Manage Information

USING OUTLOOK

Tip

Is there a quick way to enter a due date for a task?

Tip

To select the task you want to delete, click beside the task. Then press the Delete key to delete the task. Outlook places the task in the Deleted Items folder. To view the contents of the Deleted Items folder, see page 311.

Yes. Instead of typing a date, you can type a brief description of the due date, such as “Friday,” “tomorrow,” “next Thursday,” “one month from now” or “New Year’s Day 2004.” Outlook will automatically change the text you enter to the corresponding date, such as Fri 7/11/2003.

Subject

How do I delete a task I no longer need?

Thu 7/10/2003

Due Date

Pay outstanding gas bill Complete craft project

Tasks - Microsoft Offi...

MARK A TASK AS COMPLETE

⁄ Click

beside the task you want to mark as complete ( changes to ).

Thu 7/10/2003 Thu 7/10/2003

Wed 7/9/2003

12:00 PM

A line appears through the task to indicate that the task is complete.

Note: To remove the line and once again display the task as incomplete, repeat step 1 ( changes to ).

Tasks - Microsoft Offi...

CHANGE THE VIEW OF TASKS

⁄ To change the way your tasks are displayed on your screen, click an option in this area ( changes to ).

12:00 PM

Outlook displays your tasks in the view you selected. To return to the default view, repeat step 1, selecting Simple List.

TEAM337 LinG

USING NOTES

You can create electronic notes that are similar to paper sticky notes.

Notes are useful for storing small pieces of information, such as reminders, questions, ideas and directions. USING NOTES

Notes

12:00

12:00 PM

Notes - Microsoft Offi...

CREATE A NOTE

¤ Click New to

⁄ Click

create a new note.

to display your notes.

338

Notes - Microsoft Offi...

A window where you can type the text for the note appears. The bottom of the window displays the current date and time.

Untitled - Note

12:00 PM

‹ Type the text for the note. › When you finish typing the text, click to close the note.

TEAM LinG

2

Manage Information

USING OUTLOOK

Tip

How do I change the size of a note?

Tip

Position the mouse over the bottom right corner of the note ( changes to ) and then drag the corner until the note displays the size you want. Changing the size of a note is useful when the note is too small to display all the text in the note.

How do I delete a note?

To delete a note, click the icon for the note you want to delete and then press the Delete key. Outlook places the note in the Deleted Items folder. To view the contents of the Deleted Items folder, see page 311.

before board meeting tonight. Review presentation Before board meeting meeting tonight.tonight.

8/10/2003 2:52 PM

Call Martine for information o...

Deadline for the McKen...

Pitch marketing id...

Practice speech to...

Phone Lindsay in New York...

Remember to take home...

click

8/10/2003 2:52 PM

DELETE

8/10/2003 2:52 PM

Notes

Notes - Microsoft Offi...

An icon for the note appears on your screen.

12:00 PM

Notes - Microsoft Offi...

OPEN A NOTE

⁄ Double-click the icon for the note you want to open.

12:00 PM

Call Sandy for inform...

A window appears, displaying the contents of the note.

¤ When you finish reviewing the note, click the note.

to close

TEAM339 LinG

USING NOTES McKenzie Project

Outlook can help you organize and keep track of your notes. For example, you can change the color of your notes or the way the notes are displayed on your screen.

Draw up McKenzie Proposal

Send McKenzie Proposal to Tim

Sales Meeting for McKenzie Proposal

Personal

Pick up Dry Cleaning

Doctor's Appointment 9:00 AM Tomorrow

Changing the color of your notes can help you keep your notes organized. For example, you may want to display all your notes for a particular project in yellow, while your personal notes are displayed in blue. USING NOTES (CONTINUED)

Phone Kim before 4:30 today.

Phone Kim before 4:30 today.

12:00 PM

Notes - Microsoft Offi...

CHANGE NOTE COLOR

⁄ Right-click the icon for a note you want to display in a different color. A menu appears.

340

¤ Click Color to display a list of color options.

Notes - Microsoft Offi...

12:00 PM

The note displays the color you selected.

‹ Click the color you want the note to display.

TEAM LinG

2

Manage Information

USING OUTLOOK

Tip

How can I arrange my notes on the screen?

Outlook offers several views you can use to arrange your notes on the screen.

Review Presentation

for entation Review pres ct proje McKenzie eggs, milk Pick up Yesterday d and brea

ek ek ek tttWe We ay We Las for ay Las terd Las ay terd Yes ayentation Yes pres terd Yes ew Yesterd

ek ek ek tttWe We ay We Las ay Las terd Las ay terd Yes Yes terday Yes Yesterd Finish Preparing

eggs, Pick up Bread milk and

Practicef

in Meeting A Boardroom

Phone Kim before 4:30

Doctors Appointment

Practicefor Speech

and Prepare s Mail Check for

ICONS

Revi project McKenzie aring files Finish prep tion. enta for pres om A in Boardro Meeting bread , milk and eggs Pick up before 4:30 Phone Kim enzie for McK ch spee Practice n tatio

ek ek ek tttWe We ay We Las ay Las terd Las ay terd Yes Yes terday Yes Yesterd

ek ek ek tttWe We ay We Las ay Las terd Las ay terd Yes Yes terdayw Yes Yesterd

BUSINESS

for speech Practice presentation e McKenzi

Yello

GIFTS

Order Lunch

SONAL

eggs, Pick up Bread milk and

PER

LAST 7

Doctorsent Appointm

GORY BY CATE

DAYS

in Meetingm A Boardroo

Phone Kim before 4:30

Green

LS

PHONE CAL

LIST NOTES

Finish preparing

Finish preparing

Pink

TIVES

JEC GOALS/OB

and Prepare Mail Checks for

R

BY COLO

Icons

Notes List

Last Seven Days

By Category

By Color

Displays each note as a large icon with the first few words of the note appearing below.

Arranges the notes by date. This view displays multiple lines of text for long notes.

Similar to the Notes List view, but this view displays only the notes you have created in the last seven days.

Arranges the notes by category. By default, notes are not assigned to a category.

Arranges the notes by color.

Notes Remember to take home project overview for review.

Notes - Microsoft Offi...

ORGANIZE YOUR NOTES

⁄ To change the way your notes are displayed on your screen, click an option in this area ( changes to ).

12:00 PM

Note: For information on the ways you can display notes on your screen, see the top of this page.

Notes - Microsoft Offi...

Outlook displays your notes in the view you selected.

Fri 7/11/2003 12:21 PM

12:00 PM

Note: To return to the default view, repeat step 1, selecting Icons.

TEAM341 LinG

USING THE JOURNAL

The Journal helps you keep track of all your activities in Office. Before using the Journal, you must choose which activities you want the Journal to record.

SELECT ACTIVITIES TO RECORD

[email protected]]

[[email protected]]

12:00 PM

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

⁄ Click Tools.

¤ Click Options. The Options dialog box appears.

342

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

‹ Click Journal Options.

12:00 PM

The Journal Options dialog box appears.

TEAM LinG

2

Manage Information

USING OUTLOOK

Tip

What activities can I have the Journal record?

Tip

You can have the Journal record your e-mail communications with people in your Contact list or files you save in programs such as Word, Excel and PowerPoint.

Why doesn’t the person I want to record activities for appear in the Journal Options dialog box?

Only people that appear in your Contact list are available in the Journal Options dialog box. For information on working with the Contact list, see pages 332 to 335.

The figur es year for XYZ are in, and 2002 has been Corporati a record Williams , credits his on! Company Presi dent, John dedicated year. "Eve staff ryone here worked really for the successful we have become an hard all industry Williams leader, "said year, and . an elated XYZ Corp 29 oration achie USA expandin ved their g their prod succe ss by uct line and providing excellent concentra customer ourselves service. "We ting on on custo mer servi pride go the extra mile to ensu ce," said Williams happy with . "We re all our customers the servi ce we prov staff party are very ide. "Th to ere will be Breton Banq celebrate the achi a evement uet Hall at the all staff mem on Feb. 12. Will bers and iams hope attend. "Th their fami s lies will is is our be able to way of than made this achievem king a staff ent possible, Williams that . " said aPR prou ODd UC TION Sales perso SALE n S (1st Gary Janu Quar ary Mary Febru ter 20 154 ary 03) Teri March 127 147 Sheri e Total 98 149 123 Barry 198 125 132 424 Larry 174 141 156 408 Moe 145 123 187 379 Tom 147 194 Richa 149 526 rd 132 164 167 446 Harry 187 137 154 506 Total 174 158 132 465 1536 112 182 401 1450 147 527 1529 433 4515

bc.com]

bc.com] E-mail Message

E-mail Message

Josh Nelson

Josh Nelson

Microsoft Word

Microsoft Word

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

12:00 PM

› Click each type of

ˇ Click each contact you

activity you want to record ( changes to ).

want to record activities for ( changes to ).

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

‡ Click OK to save your changes.

12:00 PM

° Click OK to close the Options dialog box.

Á Click each type of document you want to record activities for ( changes to ).

TEAM343 LinG

USING THE JOURNAL

You can use the Journal to view the activities you accomplished on any day.

Before you can view your activities in the Journal, you must specify the activities you want to record. To specify activities, see page 342. VIEW JOURNAL ACTIVITIES

Fri 11 Entry Type: E-mail Message

Journal - Microsoft Of...

12:00 PM

to view a list of your Outlook folders.

‹ Click Journal to display the journal entries.

¤ To display your personal folders, click beside Personal Folders ( changes to ).

This area displays your Journal entries on a timeline. The Journal records your activities based on when you performed each activity.

⁄ Click

344

Journal - Microsoft Of...

› The Journal organizes journal entries into groups. To display the entries in a group, click beside the group ( changes to ). The journal entries in the group appear.

12:00 PM

You can use the scroll bar to move through the timeline to display the journal entries for a different day.

ˇ To open a journal entry, double-click the entry. TEAM LinG

2

Manage Information

USING OUTLOOK

Tip

Can I change the amount of time the Journal displays on the timeline?

Tip

How do I remove a journal entry I no longer need?

To make the Journal less cluttered, you can delete a journal entry you no longer need. Click the journal entry you want to delete and then press the Delete key. Outlook places the journal entry in the Deleted Items folder. To view the contents of the Deleted Items folder, see page 311.

By default, Outlook displays the days of the week on the timeline. To change the amount of time shown on the timeline, click one of the following options.

Displays the hours in the day Displays the days of the week Displays the days of the month

Journal - Microsoft Of...

A window appears, displaying information about the journal entry. To open the document or item, double-click the picture that represents the document or item. You can then work with the document or item as usual.

Plans for Picnic (recei...

12:00 PM

Note: A warning dialog box may appear when you open a document or item. To continue opening the document or item, click Yes or Open.

Journal - Microsoft Of...

Á To close the journal entry, click .

12:00 PM

Plans for Picnic (recei...

‡ Click Yes to save your changes.

A dialog box may appear, asking if you want to save your changes.

TEAM345 LinG

OUTLOOK WITH BUSINESS CONTACT MANAGER

Business Contact Manager is an addon to Outlook that allows small business users and salespeople to more effectively keep track of their accounts, business contacts and sales opportunities.

CDRW

3000 COMPA CT

REWRIT ABLE

WRITIN

G

DISC

IN ERROR

OPEN CLOSE

Outlook with Business Contact Manager provides a way for you to organize information about your business relationships and sales opportunities, together with all related e-mail messages, appointments, business notes and other items.

TS OUN C C A

R

S TACT N O C ITIES TUN R O OPP

The information for an account, business contact or opportunity, along with all its related items, is referred to as a record.

Accounts

Business Contacts

Opportunities

An account is a company or organization that you do business with. An account may be one of your suppliers or customers. You can link an account to a business contact you have created.

A business contact is a person you do business with. You can link a business contact to an account you have created.

An opportunity is a sales lead or a potential purchaser of your products or services. You can link an opportunity to an account or business contact you have created.

Sales Lead D

RTM MOTORS ACCOUNT

346

E

F

G

OP H

I

PO

RT

UN

IT

Y

TEAM LinG

Outlook With Business Contact Manager

3

USING OUTLOOK

E-mail Messages

Appointments

You can link an e-mail message you have sent or received to an account, business contact or opportunity.

You can add an appointment to the Calendar to remind you of an activity or meeting related to a specific account, business contact or opportunity.

USA 29

E-mail

Feb 2003 1

2

9

16

23

Tasks

Creating a task allows you to keep track of a duty or errand related to an account, business contact or opportunity.

8

3

4

5

6

7

10

11

12

13

14

17

24

18

25

19

26

20

27

21

15

22

28

Tasks Tasks Tasks ✓ - Organize Files ✓ - Check Inventory ✓ - Finish Report

Business Notes

Phone Logs

You can create a business note to store a small piece of information, such as a reminder, question or idea, for a particular account, business contact or opportunity.

A phone log allows you to store information about telephone conversations related to a particular account, business contact or opportunity. Phone Log: RTM Motors August 8th 4 min 34 sec

RTM MOTORS ACCOUNT

August 9th 16 min 29 sec August 12th 56 min 22 sec August 15th 22 min 10 sec

TEAM347 LinG

USING ACCOUNTS

You can use Business Contact Manager to create an account for a company you do business with. Creating an account allows you to keep all the information for a company in one location.

Tur McKenzie Inc.

ABC Corp.

Business Contact

Manager

CREATE A NEW ACCOUNT

[email protected]

Accounts in Business Contact Man

12:00 PM

Accounts - Microsoft ...

⁄ Click

to display your accounts and contacts.

¤ Click Accounts in Business Contact Manager to display

your accounts.

348

Accounts - Microsoft ...

McKenzie Computer S...

12:00 PM

‹ Click New to create

› Click this area and type

Á Click an area and

a new account.

a name for the account.

The Account window appears, displaying areas where you can enter information about an account.

ˇ Click this area and type

type the account’s business phone and business fax numbers.

Note: You do not need to enter information in every area.

the account’s address.

Note: The Check Address dialog box appears if the address is incomplete. See the top of page 353 for more information.

‡ Click an area and type the account’s e-mail and Web page addresses.

TEAM LinG

3

Outlook With Business Contact Manager USING OUTLOOK

Tip

How can I enter a primary contact for the account?

After you create and save an account, you can specify a business contact that you most often work with for the account. You must first create the business contact as shown on page 352.

‹ Click the business contact you want to set as your primary contact for the account.

› Click Save and Close. Evans, Simon

⁄ Perform step 1 on page 351 to view the account you want to enter a primary contact for. ¤ Click

in this area.

McKenzie Computer Systems [email protected]

Anywhere St.

Good

Accounts - Microsoft ...

McKenzie Computer S...

12:00 PM

You can specify financial information for the account in these areas.

Business contacts and items you link to the account will appear in these areas.

° Click

· When you finish

in an area to display a list of options and then select the option you want to use for the account.

entering information for the account, click Save and Close to save the information for the account.

Accounts - Microsoft ...

The account appears in this area. You can now link business contacts and items to the account.

12:00 PM

Note: To delete an account you no longer need, click the account and then press the Delete key. The account is placed in the Deleted Items folder. To view the contents of the Deleted Items folder, see page 375.

TEAM349 LinG

USING ACCOUNTS

You can change the way accounts are displayed on your screen or browse through your accounts to find an account you want to work with. When information about an account changes, you can easily update the information.

WORK WITH ACCOUNTS

Wel - XYZ

Current XYZ Corpor... 445 El... (312) 555-4321

Accounts - Microsoft ...

CHANGE THE VIEW OF ACCOUNTS

⁄ To change the way accounts are displayed on your screen, click an option in this area ( changes to ).

350

12:00 PM

Accounts - Microsoft ...

Your accounts appear in the view you selected.

BROWSE THROUGH ACCOUNTS

To return to the default view, repeat step 1, selecting Address Cards.

These tabs allow you to browse through your accounts alphabetically.

Note: These tabs are available only in the Address Cards view.

12:00 PM

⁄ Click the tab for the accounts you want to view. Accounts beginning with the letters you selected appear.

TEAM LinG

3

Outlook With Business Contact Manager USING OUTLOOK

Tip

What views can I use to display my accounts?

There are several views you can use to display your accounts. Common views include the following:

ADDRESS CARDS

ACCOUNT LIST Current

ABC Corp.

Overdue GenX Inc. Current

Jasper & Co.

Overdue Keswick Corp. Current Current

Sundown Mirrors Walverton Corp.

(555) 555-1432 (555) 555-3296 (555) 555-6754

ABC Corp.

Jasper & Co.

89 Rampart Ave.

4560 Spring St.

Green Bay, WI

Columbus, OH

54303

43204

(555) 555-1234

(555) 555-9080

GenX Inc.

Keswick Corp.

895 Banion Dr.

4631 Whittle St.

Green Bay, WI

Hartford, CT

54308 (555) 555-6478

06101 (555) 555-1694

BY ACCOUNT STATUS Account Status GenX Inc. Keswick Corp.

(555) 555-5934 (555) 555-0453 (555) 555-5630

:Overdue

895 Banion Dr., Gree....... 4631 Whittle St., Hartf......

Account Status

:Current

ABC Corp. 89 Rampart Ave., Gree.... Jasper & Co. 4560 Spring St., Colum... Sundown Mirrors 24 Cortez Blvd., Hartfo...

RECENTLY MODIFIED

BY LOCATION ZIP/Postal Code: 06101

Date: Today

Ov... Keswick Corp. Cu... Sundown Mirrors

Ov... Keswick Corp. 4631 Whittle... (555) 555-5934

4631 Whittle St., Hartford,... 24 Cortez Blvd., Hartford,...

ZIP/Postal Code: 43204 Cu... Jasper&Co.

Ov... GenX Inc.

895 Banion... (555) 555-3296

Cur.. ABC Corp

89 Rampart... (555) 555-1432

4560 Spring St., Columbus...

ZIP/Postal Code: 54303 Cu... ABC Corp Ov... GenX Inc.

89 Rampart Ave., Green B... 895 Banion Dr., Green Bay...

Account List

Address Cards

By Account Status By Location

Recently Modified

Displays a list of all your accounts in alphabetical order.

Displays the mailing address, phone numbers and other information for each account.

Groups the accounts by financial status, such as current or overdue.

Displays a list of only the accounts that you have recently modified.

Groups the accounts by ZIP or postal code.

Boa - RTM [email protected]

Accounts - Microsoft ...

VIEW ACCOUNT INFORMATION

⁄ To view the information for an account, double-click the account.

Note: To display all your accounts, perform steps 1 and 2 on page 348.

12:00 PM

The Account window appears, displaying the information for the account.

Accounts - Microsoft ...

Boadman Insurance -...

To update information for the account, drag the mouse over the information you want to change and then type the new information.

12:00 PM

¤ Click Save and Close to save your changes.

Note: To type new information for the account in a blank area, click the area and type the information.

TEAM351 LinG

USING BUSINESS CONTACTS

You can use Business Contact Manager to maintain detailed information about your business contacts. A business contact is a person you do business with. When creating a business contact, you can link the business contact to an account you have previously created. To create an account, see page 348. USING BUSINESS CONTACTS

Purchaser

Business Contacts in Business Contact Manag

Business Contacts - ...

CREATE A NEW BUSINESS CONTACT

⁄ Click

to display your accounts and contacts.

¤ Click Business Contacts in Business Contact Manager.

352

12:00 PM

Business Contacts - ...

Diane Morris - ...

12:00 PM

‹ Click New to create

› Click an area and

Á Click Add Existing

a new business contact.

type the business contact’s full name and job title.

Account.

The Business Contact window appears, displaying areas where you can enter information about a business contact.

Note: You do not need to enter information in every area.

ˇ To link the business contact to an account you have created, click .

TEAM LinG

3

Outlook With Business Contact Manager USING OUTLOOK

Why did the Check Address dialog box appear after I entered an address?

Tip

If the address you entered is incomplete, the Check Address dialog box appears, helping you to complete the address.

⁄ Drag the mouse

over the part of the address you want to change and then type the correct information.

Note: To type new information in a blank area, click the area and type the information.

¤ Click OK.

Purchaser

Purchaser

McKenzie Computer Systems

Business Contacts - ...

The Accounts dialog box appears.

‡ Click the name of the account you want to link the business contact to.

Diane Morris - ...

12:00 PM

° Click OK to confirm your change.

Business Contacts - ...

12:00 PM

Diane Morris - ...

· Click this area and

— Click an area and type

type the business contact’s address.

the business contact’s e-mail and Web page addresses.

‚ Click an area and type the business contact’s business phone, fax and mobile phone numbers.

TEAM353 LinG

USING BUSINESS CONTACTS ACCOUNTS Full Name

After creating business contacts, you can change the way business contacts are displayed on your screen or browse through your business contacts to find the one you want to work with.

Busine...

Busine...

Account: Boadman Insurance Erin Baker Martin Boadman (714) 555-... Constance (714) 555-... Alan Carter Martin David (714) 555-... Jason Peterson Cook

(714) 555-... (714) 555-... (714) 555-...

Account: Martel Lighting Inc. Julie Brown Sarah Mantle

(212) 555-...

(212) 555-...

Account: McKenzie Computer Systems Jack Adams Chris Andrews (212) 555-... Kathleen (212) 555-... Matt ColeMatthews

(212) 555-... (212) 555-...

Account: RTM Motors Jennifer Lisa Bell Hamilton

(714) 555-...

(714) 555-...

PHONE LIST

There are several different views you can use to display your business contacts. For example, you can group your business contacts according to the accounts they are linked to, organize your contacts into a phone list format or display only the business contacts that you have recently modified.

RECENTLY MODIFIED

Full Name Busine... Busine... Mobile...

File As

Business Phone Modified

Jack Adams

(714) 555-...

(714) 555-...

(714) 555-...

Carter, Alan

(714) 555-1299

Erin Baker

(714) 555-...

(714) 555-...

(714) 555-...

Bell, Lisa

(714) 555-9263

Tue 8/5/20...

Lisa Bell

(714) 555-...

(714) 555-...

(714) 555-...

Cole, Matt

(714) 555-3470

Tue 8/5/20...

Julie Brown

(212) 555-...

(212) 555-...

(212) 555-...

Alan Carter

(212) 555-...

(212) 555-...

(212) 555-...

Matt Cole

(212) 555-...

(212) 555-...

(212) 555-...

Jason Cook

(714) 555-...

(714) 555-...

(714) 555-...

Tue 8/5/20...

USING BUSINESS CONTACTS (CONTINUED)

Cole, Matt Cole, Matt

Purchaser

Excellent

Business Contacts - ...

Matt Cole - ...

12:00 PM

You can specify financial information for the business contact in these areas.

Items you link to the business contact will appear in this area.

± Click

¡ When you finish

in an area to display a list of options and then select the option you want to use for the business contact.

354

12:00 PM

Business Contacts - ...

The business contact appears in this area.

You can now link items to the business contact.

entering information for the business contact, click Save and Close to save the information.

TEAM LinG

3

Outlook With Business Contact Manager USING OUTLOOK

Tip

How can I link items to a business contact?

Tip

How do I delete a business contact I no longer need?

Click the business contact you want to delete and then press the Delete key. The business contact is placed in the Deleted Items folder. To view the contents of the Deleted Items folder, see page 375.

After you create a business contact, you can link items, such as business notes, tasks and appointments to the business contact. This allows you to keep all the information related to a business contact together in one location. For information on creating and linking items to a business contact, see pages 356 to 373.

g

un t Yo er Jane patch Dis

ZippLinyes

ive ple Dr ryland 16 Ma ore, Ma Baltim1 2120 6634 55555) e (5 Phon

Van

S D ITEM E T E L DE

n Brow Julie

Office Manager

Purchaser

Purchaser

Office Manager Purchaser

Purchaser

Daniel Price

President

Pri...

(.. (.

12:00 PM

Business Contacts - ...

CHANGE THE VIEW OF BUSINESS CONTACTS

⁄ To change the way business contacts are displayed on your screen, click an option in this area ( changes to ).

Your business contacts appear in the view you selected. To return to the default view, repeat step 1, selecting Address Cards.

Business Contacts - ...

Jack Adams - Busin...

12:00 PM

VIEW BUSINESS CONTACT INFORMATION

Information for the business contact appears.

⁄ To view the information for a business contact, doubleclick the business contact.

¤ Click Save and Close to save your changes.

Note: To display all your business contacts, perform steps 1 and 2 on page 352.

TEAM355 LinG

USING OPPORTUNITIES

Sales Lead

You can create an opportunity to store information about a sales lead. An opportunity is a potential customer or client.

OP

PO

RT

UN

IT

Y

After you create an opportunity, you can link related items, such as business notes, tasks and appointments, to the opportunity. This allows you to keep all the information related to an opportunity together in one location.

CREATE A NEW OPPORTUNITY

12:00 PM

Opportunities - Micro...

Opportunities - Micro...

⁄ Click . ¤ Click Opportunities

‹ Click New to create a new opportunity.

› Click this area and type a title for the opportunity.

in Business Contact Manager to display

The Opportunity window appears, displaying areas where you can enter information about an opportunity.

ˇ To link the opportunity to an account or business contact you have created, click one of these options ( changes to ).

your opportunities.

356

Note: You do not need to enter information in every area.

12:00 PM

McKenzie Computer S...

Á To specify the record you want to link the opportunity to, click . ‡ Click Add Existing Account or Add Existing Contact.

TEAM LinG

3

Outlook With Business Contact Manager USING OUTLOOK

Tip

How can I create a new account or business contact when I create an opportunity?

‹ Skip to step 10 below to continue creating the opportunity. After you finish creating the opportunity, you can view and enter information for the new account (see page 351) or business contact (see page 355) you created.

⁄ Perform steps 1 to 7 below, except click Create New Account or Create New Contact in step 7. ¤ In the dialog box that appears, type a name for the account or business contact and then press the Enter key.

McKenzie Computer Systems

Opportunities - Micro...

A dialog box appears.

° Click the name of the account or business contact you want to link the opportunity to.

McKenzie Computer S...

12:00 PM

· Click OK to confirm your change.

Opportunities - Micro...

‚ These areas display the sales type and sales stage for the opportunity. You can click in an area to select a different option.

12:00 PM

McKenzie Computer S...

± Click an area and type the source of the referral and the names of any competitors.

— Click

in this area to specify the source of the lead.

TEAM357 LinG

USING OPPORTUNITIES

When creating an opportunity, you can specify a date when you expect to close a deal with the opportunity and a percentage to indicate the likelihood of closing the deal successfully.

Sales Lead

OP

PO

RT

CLOSE DATE

UN

YClosing

Success

C alendar

If the opportunity is interested in purchasing your products or services, you can include information about the products or services.

IT

100%

0%

CREATE A NEW OPPORTUNITY (CONTINUED)

Opportunities - Micro...

¡ This area displays the close date of the opportunity. Drag the mouse over the existing information and type the correct information. 358

McKenzie Computer S...

12:00 PM

™ Double-click the number in this area and type a percentage to indicate the likelihood of closing the deal successfully.

£ To specify a product that the opportunity is interested in purchasing, click Add.

Opportunities - Micro...

McKenzie Computer S...

12:00 PM

The Add/Edit Product Entry dialog box appears.

Note: To create a product list, see page 362.

¢ Click

To add a product that is not in your product list or if you have not previously created a product list, refer to the top of page 359. Then skip to step 21 on page 360.

to select a product from your product list.

TEAM LinG

3

Outlook With Business Contact Manager USING OUTLOOK

Tip

How can I add a product to my opportunity information if I have not created a product list?

⁄ Perform step 15 below to

‹ Double-click this area and type

display the Add/Edit Product Entry dialog box.

a quantity for the product.

› Click OK to add the product to your opportunity information.

¤ Click an area and type the name, description and unit price for the product you want to include.

Swivel Chair Built-in lumbar support and tilt ten $179.99

Opportunities - Micro...

The Edit Product Master List dialog box appears, displaying the contents of your product list.

McKenzie Computer S...

12:00 PM

∞ Click the product you want to link to the opportunity.

§ Click OK to continue.

Opportunities - Micro...

McKenzie Computer S...

The information for the product you selected appears in the Add/Edit Product Entry dialog box.

12:00 PM

• Click OK to continue.

¶ To add or change information for the product in this opportunity, click a blank area or drag the mouse over existing information and type the new information. TEAM359 LinG

USING OPPORTUNITIES Account Opportunity Title... Sales Stage Parent

After creating an opportunity, you can change the way your opportunities are displayed on the screen.

Expected Reve... Probability

Parent

Qualification

$4,799.88

60% Tue 7/29/2003 9:54 AM

: Martel Lighting Inc.

Martel Proposal Parent

Proposal/Price Quote

$902.93

70% Thu 7/17/2003 9:52 AM

: McKenzie Computer Systems

McKenzie Computer Syst... Proposal/Price Quote Parent

$2,699.85

75% Fri 7/25/2003 5:00 PM

$1,439.92

80% Tue 7/29/2003 9:28 AM

: XYZ Corporation

XYZ Sales Lead

Negotiation/Review

Expected Revenue

Sales Stage Opportunity... Sales Stage

Parent

XYZ Corporation

Negotiation/Review

$1,439.92

80% Tue 7/2

: Proposal/Price Quote

Martel Proposal

Martel Lighting Inc.

McKenzie Comp... McKenzie Computer Systems Sales Stage

Expected... Probab... Close

: Negotiation Review

XYZ Sales Lead Sales Stage

Sales Stage

Close date

: Boadman Insurance

Boadman Lead

Proposal/Price Quote

$902.93

70% Thu 7/1

Proposal/Price Quote

$2,699.85

75% Fri 7/5

Qualification

$4,799.88

60% Tue 7/2

Opportunity Title

Parent

Sales St... Expected Re... Probab... Close

Boadman Lead

Boadman Insurance

Qualification

XYZ Sales Lead

XYZ Corporation

$4,799.88

60% Tue 7/29

Negotiation

$1,439.92

80% Tue 7/29

McKenzie Computer Systems XYZ Corporation

Proposal/Pri...

$2,699.85

80% Tue 7/29

Martel Proposal

Proposal/Pri...

$902.93

80% Tue 7/29

Martel Lighting

: Qualification

Boadman Lead...

Boadman Insurance

There are several ways to display your opportunities. For example, you can group your opportunities according to the accounts or business contacts they are linked to. You can also organize your opportunities by sales stage or expected revenue.

CREATE A NEW OPPORTUNITY (CONTINUED)

Swivel Chair

Built-in lumbar support and tilt tension contr

Opportunities - Micro...

$179.99

$179.99

McKenzie Computer S...

20

$3,599.

12:00 PM

The product you selected appears in this area.

Items you link to the opportunity will appear in this area.

Note: Repeat steps 15 to 20 starting on page 358 for each product you want to add.

ª When you finish

360

Opportunities - Micro...

The opportunity appears in this area.

12:00 PM

You can now link items to the opportunity.

entering information for the opportunity, click Save and Close to save the information.

TEAM LinG

Outlook With Business Contact Manager

3

USING OUTLOOK

Tip

How do I view the information and linked items for an opportunity I created?

Tip

How do I delete an opportunity I no longer need?

Click the opportunity you want to delete and then press the Delete key. The opportunity is placed in the Deleted Items folder. To view the contents of the Deleted Items folder, see page 375. Sales Le ad

O

PP

O

RT

U

N

IT

Y

⁄ Double-click the opportunity. Note: To display all your opportunities, perform steps 1 and 2 on page 356. A window opens, displaying the information for the opportunity.

¤ To close the window, click Save and Close.

Boad... Boadman Insurance XYZ Sales... Negotiation... $4,919.76

Opportunities - Micro...

CHANGE THE VIEW OF OPPORTUNITIES

⁄ To change the way opportunities are displayed on your screen, click an option in this area ( changes to ).

Qualifi... S...

60% Tue 7/...

80% Tue 7/22/2...

12:00 PM

12:00 PM

Opportunities - Micro...

Your opportunities appear in the view you selected.

To return to the default view, repeat step 1, selecting By Parent.

TEAM361 LinG

USING OPPORTUNITIES

You can create a product list to store information about the products or services your company provides.

Unit Price

Product Name

Description

Filing Cabinet Pine Bookshelf Swivel Chair L-Shaped Desk Executive Chair Executive Desk

Steel with 2 drawers and rollers Solid Pine with 5 adjustable shelves Built-in lumbar support and tilt tension control 3 drawers and keyboard tray Genuine leather, extra lumbar support and arm rests U-shaped with 5 drawers and full hutch

$128.99 $149.99 $179.99 $299.99 $499.99 $599.99

When creating an opportunity to store information about a sales lead, you can use the product list to quickly add information about products the opportunity may be interested in purchasing. CREATE A PRODUCT LIST

Executive Chair

XYZ Sales... Negotiation... $4,919.76

12:00 PM

The Edit Product Master List dialog box appears.

12:00 PM

Opportunities - Micro...

‹ Click Add to add

› Click an area

product information to your product list.

and type the name, description and unit price for the product.

The Add/Edit Product Properties dialog box appears.

362

499.99

80% Tue 7/22/2...

Opportunities - Micro...

⁄ Click Business Tools. ¤ Click Product List.

Genuine leather, extra lumbar support and arm

TEAM LinG

3

Outlook With Business Contact Manager USING OUTLOOK

Tip

How can I edit information about the products in my product list?

To display the product list, perform steps 1 and 2 on page 362.

Filing Cabinet Steel with 2 drawers and rollers

$128.99

⁄ Click the product you want

‹ Click a blank area or drag the

to change.

mouse over the information you want to change and then type the new information.

¤ Click Edit to display the Add/Edit Product Properties dialog box.

› Click OK.

Swivel Chair Built-in lumbar support and tilt tensio$179.99 Executive Chair

Genuine leather, extra lumbar support and arm

499.99

Opportunities - Micro...

12:00 PM

ˇ Double-click this area

Á Click OK to add the product to your product list.

and type the number of products you usually sell in one order.

12:00 PM

Opportunities - Micro...

‡ Repeat steps 3 to 6 for each product you want to store in your product list. This area displays the products in your product list.

° Click OK to save your changes. You can now use the product list to quickly add product information to opportunities you create.

TEAM363 LinG

LINK AN E-MAIL MESSAGE

Ann Lewis Amy Martin

You can link an e-mail message you have sent or received to an account, business contact or opportunity.

Before you can link an e-mail message to a record, you need to create the account (see page 348), business contact (see page 352) or opportunity (see page 356) that relates to the e-mail message.

McKenzie ystems Computer S USA 29

LINK AN E-MAIL MESSAGE

Customize Outlook Today...

Price Quote

12:00 PM

Outlook Today - Micr...

⁄ Click Mail to be able to read and work with your e-mail messages. ¤ To display all the mail folders, click

beside

Personal Folders

(

changes to

364

).

The mail folders appear.

‹ Click the folder that

12:00 PM

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

This area displays the messages in the folder you selected.

› Double-click the message you want to link to a record.

contains the message you want to link to a record.

Note: For information on the mail folders, see the top of page 311.

TEAM LinG

3

Outlook With Business Contact Manager USING OUTLOOK

How can I view an e-mail message I linked to a record?

Tip

You can view an e-mail message with all the other information for the account, business contact or opportunity you linked the e-mail message to. The e-mail message you linked to the account, business contact or opportunity appears in this area. You can double-click the e-mail message to view its details.

⁄ Display the account (see page 351), business contact (see page 355) or opportunity (see page 361) information.

Select...

Select...

Opportunities

[amartin@

mckenzie.com]

McKenzie Computer Systems Sales Lea

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

A window appears, displaying the contents of the message.

ˇ To link the message to a business contact, account or opportunity, click in this area.

Price Quote - Messag...

12:00 PM

Á Click the type of record you want to link the message to.

Inbox - Microsoft Offi...

‡ To specify which business contact, account or opportunity you want to link the message to, click in this area. ° Click the record you want to link the message to.

Price Quote - Messag...

12:00 PM

· Click

to close the window displaying the message.

A dialog box appears, asking if you want to save your changes. Click Yes to save your changes.

TEAM365 LinG

SCHEDULE AN APPOINTMENT

You can schedule an appointment in the Calendar to remind you of an activity or meeting related to an account, business contact or opportunity.

July 2003

Before you can schedule an appointment, you need to create the account (see page 348), business contact (see page 352) or opportunity (see page 356) that relates to the appointment.

COLOR VIEW

14

SCHEDULE AN APPOINTMENT

July 16, 2003

12:00 PM

Calendar - Microsoft ...

⁄ Click

to display the Calendar. This area displays the appointments for the current day.

Calendar - Microsoft ...

Meeting with Daniel Pr...

12:00 PM

¤ Click New to

‹ Type a subject for the

ˇ These areas display when

schedule a new appointment.

appointment.

› Click this area and

The Appointment window appears.

type the location for the appointment.

the appointment will start and end. Drag the mouse over the information and type the correct information. To make the appointment an all day event, click this option ( changes to ).

366

TEAM LinG

3

Outlook With Business Contact Manager USING OUTLOOK

Tip

How can I view an appointment with the other information for the record I have linked the appointment to?

You can view an appointment with all the other information for the account, business contact or opportunity you linked the appointment to. The appointment you linked to the account, business contact or opportunity appears in this area. You can double-click the appointment to view its details.

⁄ Display the account (see page 351), business contact (see page 355), or opportunity (see page 361) information.

Select...

Select... Business Contacts

Daniel Price

Calendar - Microsoft ...

Meeting with Daniel Pr...

12:00 PM

Á Click this area and

° Click the type of

type any comments about the appointment.

record you want to link the appointment to.

‡ To link the appointment to a business contact, account or opportunity, click in this area.

Calendar - Microsoft ...

· To specify which business contact, account or opportunity you want to link the appointment to, click in this area. ‚ Click the record you want to link the appointment to.

Meeting with Daniel Pr...

12:00 PM

— When you finish entering information for the appointment, click Save and Close to save the appointment. You can now view the appointment in the Calendar. To work with the Calendar, see page 328 to 331.

TEAM367 LinG

CREATE A TASK

You can create a task to keep track of a duty or errand related to an account, business contact or opportunity.

L RTE INC. A M G TIN NT H LIG COU AC

Before you can create a task, you need to create the account (see page 348), business contact (see page 352) or opportunity (see page 356) that relates to the task.

CREATE A TASK

Due in 2 days.

12:00 PM

Tasks - Microsoft Offi...

Tasks - Microsoft Offi...

Draw up proposal for ...

your tasks.

This area displays a list of your tasks.

› Type a subject for the task. ˇ These areas display the

¤ Click Tasks.

‹ Click New to

due date and start date for the task. To change the information, drag the mouse over the existing information and type the dates.

⁄ Click

to display

create a new task. The Task window appears.

368

12:00 PM

Á These areas display the status, priority and completed percentage of the task. You can click an area to specify another status, priority or completed percentage.

TEAM LinG

3

Outlook With Business Contact Manager USING OUTLOOK

Tip

How can I view a task with the other information for the record I have linked the task to?

You can view a task with all the other information for the account, business contact or opportunity you linked the task to. The task you linked to the account, business contact or opportunity appears in this area. You can double-click the task to view its details.

⁄ Display the account (see page 351), business contact (see page 355) or opportunity (see page 361) information.

Select...

Select... Accounts Due in 2 days.

Tasks - Microsoft Offi...

Draw up proposal for ...

12:00 PM

‡ Click this area and

· Click the type of

type any comments about the task.

record you want to link the task to.

° To link the task to a business contact, account or opportunity, click in this area.

Martel Lighting Inc.

Tasks - Microsoft Offi...

‚ To specify which business contact, account or opportunity you want to link the task to, click in this area. — Click the record you want to link the task to.

12:00 PM

Draw up proposal for ...

± When you finish entering information for the task, click Save and Close to save the task. You can now view the task in Outlook’s task list. To work with all your tasks, see page 336.

TEAM369 LinG

CREATE A BUSINESS NOTE

You can create a business note to store a small piece of information, such as a reminder, question or idea for a particular account, business contact or opportunity. Business notes are similar to paper sticky notes. Before you can create a business note, you need to create the account (see page 348), business contact (see page 352) or opportunity (see page 356) that relates to the note. CREATE A BUSINESS NOTE

RTM

Boa - RTM

Accounts - Microsoft ...

⁄ Click in this area. ¤ Click Business Note to create a new

business note.

370

12:00 PM

Note: If Business Note does not appear on the menu, position the mouse over the bottom of the menu to display the menu option.

Accounts - Microsoft ...

The Business Note window appears.

‹ Click this area and

RTM Motor Sales Le...

12:00 PM

› Click this area and type the information for the business note.

type a subject for the business note.

TEAM LinG

3

Outlook With Business Contact Manager USING OUTLOOK

Tip

How can I view a business note I created?

The business note you linked to the account, business contact or opportunity appears in this area. Double-click the business note to view its details.

⁄ Display the account (see page 351), business contact (see page 355) or opportunity (see page 361) information.

RTM

RTM

Select...

Select... Business Contacts

Jack Adams Erin Baker Alan Carter Lisa Bell Matt Cole Sue Grant Diane Morris

Accounts - Microsoft ...

ˇ To link the business note to a business contact, account or opportunity, click in this area.

RTM Motor Sales Le...

12:00 PM

Accounts - Microsoft ...

12:00 PM

RTM Motor Sales Le...

Á Click the type of

‡ To specify which

· When you finish

record you want to link the business note to.

business contact, account or opportunity you want to link the business note to, click in this area.

entering information for the business note, click Save and Close to save the note.

° Click the record you want to link the business note to.

TEAM371 LinG

CREATE A PHONE LOG

You can create a phone log to record the amount of time you spend in telephone conversations related to a particular account, business contact or opportunity.

PHONE LOG: Hours

RTM MOTORS

Minutes

• discuss price quote • follow up

Before you can create a phone log, you need to create the account (see page 348), business contact (see page 352) or opportunity (see page 356) that relates to the phone log.

• order confirmation

CREATE A PHONE LOG

RTM

Boa - RTM

Select...

Opportunities

Accounts - Microsoft ...

⁄ Click in this area. ¤ Click Phone Log to create a new phone log.

372

12:00 PM

Accounts - Microsoft ...

Price Quote for McKe...

12:00 PM

Note: If Phone Log does not appear on the menu, position the mouse over the bottom of the menu to display the menu option.

These areas will display the start date and time and the duration of the phone conversation.

› To link the phone log to

The Business Phone Log window appears.

‹ Click an area and

you want to link the phone log to.

type a subject and comments for the phone log.

a business contact, account or opportunity, click in this area.

ˇ Click the type of record

TEAM LinG

3

Outlook With Business Contact Manager USING OUTLOOK

Tip

How do I use a phone log I created?

Each time you have a phone conversation, you use the timer in the phone log to record the length of the conversation. At the end of a conversation, you can pause the timer until your next conversation.

‹ To stop timing the phone conversation, click Pause Timer.

› To save your changes, click Save and Close.

⁄ Perform steps 1 and 2 on page 373 to display the phone log window.

¤ Click Start Timer to begin timing the phone conversation.

RTM

Select...

McKenzie Computer Systems Sales Lead

Accounts - Microsoft ...

Á To specify which business contact, account or opportunity you want to link the phone log to, click in this area. ‡ Click the record you want to link the phone log to.

Price Quote for McKe...

12:00 PM

Opportunities - Micro...

° When you finish

VIEW THE PHONE LOG

entering information for the phone log, click Save and Close to save the phone log.

⁄ Display the information

McKenzie Computer S...

for the account (see page 351), business contact (see page 355) or opportunity (see page 361) you linked the phone log to.

12:00 PM

The phone log you linked to the account, business contact or opportunity appears in this area.

¤ You can double-click the phone log to view its details. TEAM373 LinG

WORK WITH BUSINESS ITEMS

You can view all the business items you have created.

Business items include opportunities ( ), e-mail messages ( ), appointments ( ), tasks ( ), business notes ( ) and phone logs ( ) that you have linked to your accounts, business contacts and opportunities.

WORK WITH BUSINESS ITEMS

Business Contact Mana

Business History

11:23 AM 10:08 AM

12:00 PM

Microsoft Office Outl...

VIEW ALL YOUR BUSINESS ITEMS

⁄ Click

to display the folder list.

¤ Click

beside Business Contact Manager to display its

folder list (

changes to

).

‹ Click the Business History

Business History - Mic...

This area displays all the business items you have created, sorted by date.

12:00 PM

To view the contents of a business item in the list, double-click the item.

folder to display all the business items you have created.

374

TEAM LinG

3

Outlook With Business Contact Manager USING OUTLOOK

Tip

Can I use the Business Contact Manager folder list to quickly view my records?

Tip

How can I permanently delete business items I have created?

You can empty the Deleted Items folder at any time to permanently remove deleted business items from your computer.

Yes. After performing steps 1 and 2 on page 374 to display the Business Contact Manager folder list, you can click one of the following folders to quickly display the records of interest.

⁄ Right-click the

Accounts –– Displays your accounts

Deleted Items folder. A

Business Contacts –– Displays your

menu appears.

business contacts

¤ Click Empty “Deleted

Opportunities –– Displays your

Items” Folder.

Deleted Items

‹ A confirmation dialog

opportunities

box appears. Click Yes to permanently delete your business items.

(Filter Applied) EMILY\Emily

Price Quote for McKenzie Computer Systems McKenzie Computer Systems Sales Lead

Wed 7/16/2003 12:58 PM Wed 7/16/2003 11:23 AM

Wed 7/16/2003 10:08 AM

12:00 PM

Business History - Mic...

DELETE A BUSINESS ITEM

¤ Click

⁄ Click the business

the item.

item you want to delete.

The item is placed in the Deleted Items folder.

to delete

Deleted Items - Micro...

‹ To view the contents of the Deleted Items folder, click Deleted Items.

12:00 PM

All the business items you have deleted appear in this area.

TEAM375 LinG

at Quarterly Review - Microsoft Internet Explorer

C:\WINDOWS\TEMP\Word\QuarterlyReview.htm A B C I

ABC Incorporated

QUARTERLY REVIEW Sales have risen to $140,000 for the first time in company history! This is due to our new marketing plan and excellent customer relations. We look forward to continuing our productivity throughout the year. Revenue Chart $150,000.00 $100,000.00 NET

$50,000.00

REVENUE

$January

February

March

ABC Incorporated

A B C I

QUARTERLY REVIEW

AD3 PUSH

Sales have risen to $140,000 for ry! the first time in company histo This is due to our new marketing ons. plan and excellent customer relati We look forward to continuing our productivity throughout the year.

Revenue Chart $150,000.00 NET

$100,000.00

REVENUE

$50,000.00 $January

February

March

TEAM LinG CT COMPA COMPACT

Month

1

MICROSOFT OFFICE AND THE INTERNET

Office and the Internet

1

Office and the Internet Pages 378-383

TEAM LinG

CREATE A HYPERLINK

You can create a hyperlink to connect a word or phrase in your file to another file on your computer, network, corporate intranet or the Internet. Club Newsletter

An intranet is a small version of the Internet within a company or organization. You can use the method shown below to create hyperlinks in Word, Excel, PowerPoint and Publisher. CREATE A HYPERLINK

Facts About Athens

Athens, Greece

The Olympic Games - ...

⁄ Select the text you want to make a hyperlink.

¤ Click a hyperlink.

378

to create

12:00 PM

The Olympic Games - ...

12:00 PM

Note: If is not displayed, click on the Standard toolbar to display the button.

‹ Click Existing File or

› To link the text to a

Web Page to link the text to

The Insert Hyperlink dialog box appears.

This area shows the location of the displayed files. You can click this area to change the location.

file on your computer or network, click the name of the file you want to link the text to.

an existing file.

TEAM LinG

1

Office and the Internet

OFFICE AND THE INTERNET

Tip

Can an Office program automatically create a hyperlink for me?

Tip

When you type a Web page address in a Word document, Excel worksheet or PowerPoint presentation, the Office program will automatically change the address to a hyperlink for you.

Why does nothing happen when I click a hyperlink on a PowerPoint slide?

If you click a hyperlink while viewing your presentation in the Normal or Slide Sorter view, the file or Web page connected to the hyperlink will not appear. You must display your presentation in the Slide Show view to display the file or Web page connected to a hyperlink. For information on displaying a presentation in the Slide Show view, see page 175.

Great Web Sites rlinks

Using Hype

w Normal vie r view Slide Sorte ow view Slide Sh

www.sunkist.com www.abc.com www.xyz.com

Click

Facts About Athens

The Olympic Games - ...

To link the text to a page on the Web, click this area and then type the address of the Web page.

12:00 PM

ˇ Click OK to create the hyperlink. The Office program creates the hyperlink. Text hyperlinks appear underlined and in color.

The Olympic Games - ...

When you position the mouse pointer over a hyperlink, a yellow box appears, indicating where the hyperlink will take you. To display the file or Web page connected to the hyperlink, click the hyperlink.

12:00 PM

Note: In Word and Publisher, you must press and hold down the Ctrl key before clicking the hyperlink. A warning dialog box may appear. Click Yes to continue.

TEAM379 LinG

PREVIEW A FILE AS A WEB PAGE

Quarterly Review - Microsoft Internet Explorer

You can preview how an Office file will look as a Web page. This allows you to see how the file will appear on the Internet or your company’s intranet.

C:\WINDOWS\TEMP\Word\QuarterlyReview.htm ABC Incorporated

A B C I

QUARTERLY REVIEW

Sales have risen to $140,000 for the first time in company history! This is due to our new marketing plan and excellent customer relations. We look forward to continuing our productivity throughout the year. Revenue Chart $150,000.00 $100,000.00 NET

$50,000.00

REVENUE

$January

February

March

ABC Incorporated

A B C I

QUARTERLY REVIEW

AD3 PUSH

Sales have risen to $140,000 for the first time in company history! This is due to our new marketing plan and excellent customer relations. We look forward to continuing our productivity throughout the year.

Revenue Chart $150,000.00 NET

$100,000.00

REVENUE

$50,000.00 $January

February

March COMPACT COMPACT

Month

POWER

RESET

You can use the method shown below to preview a file you create in Word, Excel or PowerPoint as a Web page.

Web Page

AD3

An intranet is a small version of the Internet within a company or organization. PREVIEW A FILE AS A WEB PAGE

12:00 PM

Boston Cycling Club - ...

⁄ Display the file you

‹ Click Web Page

want to preview as a Web page.

Preview to preview your

¤ Click File.

Note: If Web Page Preview does not appear on the menu, position the mouse over the bottom of the menu to display the menu option.

380

file as a Web page.

Boston Cycling Club - ...

Your Web browser window opens, displaying the file as a Web page. To maximize the Web browser window to fill your screen, click .

Boston Cycling Club - ...

12:00 PM

› When you finish reviewing the file as a Web page, click to close the Web browser.

TEAM LinG

1

Office and the Internet

OFFICE AND THE INTERNET

PREVIEW A FILE AS A WEB PAGE (CONTINUED)

Preview a Word Document

When you preview a Word document as a Web page, the Web page displays any formatting or graphics you included in your document.

If your document contains multiple pages, all the pages in the document will be displayed on the same Web page. You can scroll through the Web page to see all the pages in the document.

Boston Cycling Club Newsletter-Feb 22 to 26

Dear Member: This year marks the Boston Cycling Club's first ever cycle-a-thon, which takes place April 10. The event is aimed at raising money for local charities while raising our organization's profile in the community. Participants are asked to solicit pledges from local businesses, and then everyone involved will enter a five mile bike ride. Prizes will be awarded to those who raise the most money.

Mark Williams President, Boston Cycling Club

Preview an Excel Workbook

When you preview an Excel workbook as a Web page, the gridlines that separate each cell do not appear.

If your workbook contains data in more than one worksheet, tabs appear for each worksheet. You can click a tab to display a different worksheet. Travel Budget for 1999

Food Hotel Taxis Other

Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday $40.00 $30.00 $40.00 $45.00 $85.00 $85.00 $85.00 $85.00 $15.00 $25.00 $20.00 $10.00 $40.00 $20.00 $15.00 $60.00

Friday

Total

$50.00 $205.00 $85.00 $425.00 $10.00 $80.00 $20.00 $155.00

Total Cost $865.00

Preview a PowerPoint Presentation

When you preview a PowerPoint presentation as a Web page, the Web page displays the title of each slide in your presentation and the current slide. You can click a slide title to display a different slide.

Some of the features available in PowerPoint will not work in a Web browser window. For example, most Web browsers do not support animation effects.

TEAM381 LinG

SAVE A FILE AS A WEB PAGE

A

You can save an Office file as a Web page. This allows you to place the file on the Internet or your company’s intranet.

B I C

r ! Q 0 fo ry ,00 isto ng ns. 40 h eti tio $1 pany ark rela m r n to com ew me ing e rise in r n usto tinu ut th u c n ve e ha tim to o nt co gho les t e lle to u Sa e firs is du exce ard thro th his nd forw vity T n a ok ucti pla e lo rod W rp ou ar. ye

LY ER RT UA

Save d Web as a Page

AB C

EW VI RE

In co rp ora ted

0 .0 00 0 ,0 50 0.0 $1 00

ue en ev R

0

rt ha C

ry ua an ary bru Fe

th on M

An intranet is a small version of the Internet within a company or organization.

UE T NE VEN RE

h arc M

AD3 PUSH

You can use the method shown below to save a file you created in Word, Excel or PowerPoint as a Web page.

COMPACT COMPACT

POWER

RESET

AD3

SAVE A FILE AS A WEB PAGE

12:00 PM

Beautiful Butterflies - ...

⁄ Display the file you want

‹ Click Save as Web

to save as a Web page.

Page.

¤ Click File.

Note: If Save as Web Page does not appear on the menu, position the mouse over the bottom of the menu to display the menu option.

382

Beautiful Butterflies - ...

The Save As dialog box appears.

› Type a file name for the Web page.

12:00 PM

This area shows the location where the Office program will store the Web page. You can click this area to change the location.

TEAM LinG

1

Office and the Internet

OFFICE AND THE INTERNET

What is the difference between the file name and the title of a Web page?

Tip

The file name is the name you use to store the Web page on your computer. The title is the text that will appear at the top of the Web browser window when a person views your Web page. ABC ABC Company Company Online Online - Microsoft Internet Explorer

C:\WINDOWS\TEMP\Word\QuarterlyReview.htm C:\WINDOWS\TEMP\Word\Quarter ABC Incorporated

QUARTERLY REVIEW

RES

Revenue Chart

ABC Incorp

$150,000.00

January

AD3 PUSH

February

March

orated

IEW RLY REV QUARTE

00 for risen to $140,0 Sales have in company history! the first time our new marketing to relations. This is due t customer plan and excellen to continuing We look forward throughout the tivity our produc

A B C I

QUAR TERL Y

Sales the firsthave risen to $14 time This in plan is due to company0,000 for and histo We look exce our new ry! llent mar our prod forward custome keting uctivity to cont r relat year. ions inui thro . ughout ng the

year.

Chart Revenue

me: File Na NET

$150,000.00

REVENUE

$100,000.00 $50,000.00 $-

January

ET

February

$150 ,000 .00 $100 ,000 .00 $50, 000. 00

March

Figu res Quarterly Month

Reven ue

REVIE W

ABC

Inco

rpor

ated

Linda Campbell Vice-president

NET

REVENUE

$-

Sincerely,

A B C I

$50,000.00

Please join us at 11:00 a.m.on April 15 for the retirement party of Robert Nelson, who has served as company president since 1979. Refreshments will be served.

$100,000.00

Dear Mr. Smith:

A B C I

Sales have risen to $140,000 for the first time in company history! This is due to our new marketing plan and excellent customer relations. We look forward to continuing our productivity throughout the year.

After you save a file as a Web page, you can transfer the page to a computer that stores Web pages, called a Web server. Once the Web page is stored on a Web server, the page will be available for other people to view. For information on transferring a Web page to a Web server, contact your network administrator, Internet service provider or Web R E V SER hosting service. WEB John Smith 11 South Street Los Angeles, CA 90013

Title: ABC Company Online

How do I make my Web page available for other people to view?

March 20, 1997

Tip

Chart

$Janu ary

e Web Pag

Febr uary Mon th

Marc h

NET REV ENU E

COMPACT COMPACT

POWER

RESET

AD3

Beautiful Butterflies - ...

ˇ Click Change Title to specify a title for the Web page. The Set Page Title dialog box appears.

12:00 PM

Á Type a title for the Web page. ‡ Click OK to confirm the title.

Beautiful Butterflies - ...

This area displays the title you specified for the Web page.

12:00 PM

° Click Save to save the file as a Web page.

Note: A default title may appear in the dialog box.

TEAM383 LinG

INDEX Numbers & Symbols ##### (error message), 133 #DIV/0! (error message), 133 #NAME? (error message), 133 #REF! (error message), 117, 133 #VALUE! (error message), 133 $ (dollar sign), in absolute references, 131 () (parentheses) in formulas, 121 in functions, 121, 127 , (comma), in functions, 121, 127 : (colon), in functions, 121, 127 = (equal sign) in formulas, 120 in functions, 121,127 3-D effects, add to objects, in Publisher, 305 A abbreviations in messages, in Outlook, 313 absolute references, in formulas, 131 accounts, in Business Contact Manager browse through, 350 create, 348-349 when creating opportunities, 357 delete, 349 display information for, 351 linked items, 349, 351 enter primary contact for, 349 link appointments, 366-367 business notes, 370-371 e-mail messages, 364-365 phone logs, 372-373 tasks, 368-369 overview, 346 views, 351 change, 350 active cell, in Excel change, 90 overview, 89 Address Book, in Outlook, select name from, 314-315 align data in cells, in Excel, 142 text in PowerPoint, 211 in Publisher, 265 in Word, 70 animate slides, in PowerPoint, 218-219 appointments, in Calendar in Business Contact Manager overview, 347 schedule, 366-367 view, 367

384

in Outlook delete, 331 schedule, 330-331 view, 328-329 arithmetic operators, in Excel, 120 arrange messages, in Outlook, 324 notes, in Outlook, 341 Auto Fill Options button, in Excel, 97, 131 AutoComplete feature, in Excel, 93 AutoContent Wizard, create presentation using, 166-169 AutoCorrect feature in Excel, 111 in Outlook, 319 in PowerPoint, 189 in Publisher, 249 in Word, stop or undo corrections, 19 AutoFit Options button, in PowerPoint, 183 autoflow, in Publisher, 253 AutoShapes. See also objects in PowerPoint add, 194-195 text to, 195 delete, 195 design, change, 195 rotate, 195 in Publisher add, 280-281 text to, 281 delete, 281 design, change, 281 average, common calculation, in Excel, 129 B background color, add to pages, in Publisher, 267 black and white, print a colored worksheet in, 152-153 blank presentations, create, 170 blind carbon copies, in Outlook, 315 bold data, in Excel, 144 text in PowerPoint, 210 in Publisher, 264 in Word, 66 breaks, in Word page, 78-79 section, 80-81 browse through. See also move, through; scroll accounts, in Business Contact Manager, 350 contacts, in Outlook, 334 presentations, 176-177 worksheet tabs, 98

TEAM LinG

bulleted lists, create in Publisher, 272 in Word, 68-69 Business Contact Manager. See also specific subject or feature overview, 3, 346-347 business contacts, in Business Contact Manager create, 352-354 when creating opportunity, 357 delete, 355 display information for, 355 linked items, 354, 355 link appointments, 366-367 business notes, 370-371 e-mail messages, 364-365 phone logs, 372-373 tasks, 368-369 overview, 346 views, change, 355 business items link to records, in Business Contact Manager appointments, 366-367 business notes, 370-371 e-mail messages, 364-365 phone logs, 372-373 tasks, 368-369 work with, 374-375 business notes, in Business Contact Manager create, 370-371 overview, 347 view, 371 buttons, toolbar display names of, 7 select commands using, 7 C calculations, in Excel common, perform, 128-129 order of, 121 Calendar, in Outlook appointments, schedule, 330-331 display, 328-329 overview, 309 views, change, 329 cancel changes in Excel, 118 in PowerPoint, 185 in Publisher, 246 in Word, 46 carbon copies (Cc), for e-mail messages in Outlook, 315 in PowerPoint, 179 in Publisher, 261 in Word, 41

CDs, package presentations onto, 232-233 cell references absolute, in formulas, 131 enter in formulas, quickly, 123 overview, 90, 121 relative, in formulas, 130 cells in Excel active, change, 90 color, change, 141 data replace all, 111 select, 95 formatting, copy, 145 overview, 89 select, 94-95 in Publisher, in tables, 294 in Word, in tables, 76 center data, in Excel, 142 across columns, 143 text in PowerPoint, 211 in Publisher, 265 in Word, 70 vertically, 82 changes, undo in Excel, 118 in PowerPoint, 185 in Publisher, 246 in Word, 46 characters count, in documents, 47 insert, in presentations, 182 chart sheets, 156 Chart Wizard, create charts in Excel using, 154-157 charts. See also objects in Excel create, 154-157 delete, 157 move, 158 items on, 159 preview when creating, 155 print, 161 resize, 158, 159 titles add, 155 change, 157 types, change, 160 in PowerPoint add, 202-203 delete, 203 circular reference (error message), 133 Click and Type feature, in Word, 19

TEAM385 LinG

INDEX clip art images. See also objects in PowerPoint add, 200-201 delete, 201 search for, 201 in Publisher add, 284-287 delete, 287 search for, 287 in Word, add, 58-61 delete, 61 resize, 61 search for, 61 Clip Organizer, in Word, 59 Clipboard task pane in Excel, move or copy data using, 113 overview, 9 in PowerPoint, move or copy text using, 187 in Word, move or copy text using, 45 close documents, 27 notes, in Outlook, 339 presentations, 173 Print Preview window in Excel, 147 in PowerPoint, 229 in Publisher, 257 in Word, 31 workbooks, 105 color in Excel cells, 141 data, 140 in Outlook flags, change, 323 notes, change, 340 in PowerPoint objects, 213 schemes, change, 216-217 text, 212 in Publisher background, add to pages, 267 of lines around objects, 301 of objects, change, 300 schemes, change, 277 text, change, 266 in Word, text, 64 columns in documents, in tables, 76 in publications, create, 274 in tables, 294 in worksheets center data across, 143 delete, 117 headings, print, 152-153

386

insert, 115 overview, 89 scroll through, 91 select, 95 width, change, 134 commands, select using menus, 6, 7 using toolbars, 7 compare side by side documents, 36 workbooks, 107 comparison operators, in Excel, 120 Connect Text Boxes Toolbar, in Publisher, 237 contacts in Business Contact Manager primary, enter when creating accounts, 349 in Outlook browse through, 334 create, 332-333 delete, 335 overview, 309 picture, remove or change, 335 update, 335 views, change, 334 copy data, in Excel, 112-113 formatting in Excel, 145 in Publisher, 273 in Word, 67 formulas, in Excel, 130-131 presentations, to CDs, 232-233 text in PowerPoint, 186-187 in Word, 44-45 count, common calculation, in Excel, 129 count words, in documents, 47 D data, in Excel. See also numbers alignment, change, 142 bold, 144 calculations, perform common, 128-129 using formulas, 122-123 using functions, 124-127 center across columns, 143 color, change, 140 copy, 112-113 delete, 110-111 edit, 110-111 enter, 92-93

TEAM LinG

fit in columns, 134 in rows, 135 font, change, 136 italicize, 144 move, 112-113 repeat in cells, 97 replace in cells, 111 select, 95 series, complete, 96-97 size, change, 137 underline, 144 in workbooks, compare side by side, 107 datasheets, in PowerPoint, use, 202-203 delete. See also remove in Business Contact Manager accounts, 349 business contacts, 355 business items, 375 opportunities, 361 in Excel charts, 157 columns, 117 data, 110-111 rows, 116, 117 worksheets, 101 in Outlook appointments, 331 contacts, 335 messages, 325 notes, 339 tasks, 337 in PowerPoint AutoShapes, 195 charts, 203 clip art, 201 diagrams, 205 pictures, 199 slides, 221 text, 184 WordArt, 197 in Publisher AutoShapes, 281 clip art, 287 design gallery objects, 297 pages, 245 pictures, 283 tables, 295 text boxes, 291 WordArt, 289 in Word characters, 43 clip art images, 61 tables, 77 text, 43

Deleted Items folder in Business Contact Manager, empty, 375 in Outlook overview, 311 view, 311 design of AutoShapes, change in PowerPoint, 195 in Publisher, 281 problems, in publications, check for, 279 of publications, change, 275 template, in PowerPoint, change, 214-215 design gallery objects, in Publisher add, 296-297 appearance, change, 297 delete, 297 Desktop folder, 27 diagrams, in PowerPoint, add, 204-205 dialog boxes, get help in, 13 dismiss, appointment reminders, in Calendar, 331 display in Business Contact Manager account information, 351 appointments, 367 business contact information, 355 business items, 374 business notes, 371 e-mail messages, 365 linked items for accounts, 349, 351 for business contacts, 354, 355 for opportunities, 361 opportunities information, 361 phone logs, 373 tasks, 369 in Outlook, activities, in Journal, 344-345 in PowerPoint, slide shows, 224-225 task panes, 8 different, 9 toolbars, 10 in Word, previous or next page, 22 documents. See also presentations; publications; text; Word; workbooks; worksheets automatic corrections, stop or undo, 19 clip art images, add, 58-61 close, 27 compare side by side, 36 count words in, 47 create, new, 34 edit in Print Preview window, 31 e-mail, 40-41 find text in, 48-49 grammar, check, 50-51 hyperlinks, create, 378-379 import text from, in Publisher, 252-253

TEAM387 LinG

INDEX margins, change, 83 move through, 22-23 open, 28-29 page breaks delete, 79 insert, 78, 79 page numbers add, 84-85 remove, 85 preview, 30-31 as Web pages, 380-381 print, 32-33 read on screen, 38-39 replace text in, 48-49 save, 26-27 as Web pages, 382-383 scroll through, 23, 36 section breaks delete, 81 insert, 80 select text in, 20-21 shrink text to fit on printed pages, 31 spelling, check, 50-51 switch between, 35 text. See text thesaurus, use, 52-53 views, 17, 25 change, 24 zoom in or out, 37 draft quality, print worksheets in, 152-153 Drafts folder, in Outlook, 311 Drawing toolbar, in PowerPoint, 165 drop caps, in Publisher create, 268-269 remove, 269 duplicate objects on page, in Publisher, 243 E edit in Business Contact Manager product list, 363 in Excel data, 110-111 formulas, 123 in PowerPoint chart data, 203 WordArt, 197 in Publisher, WordArt, 289 in Word, documents, in Print Preview window, 31 effects, 3-D, add to objects, in Publisher, 305 electronic mail. See e-mail

388

e-mail documents, 40-41 messages. See Business Contact Manager; messages; Outlook presentations, 178-179 publications, 260-261 workbooks, 109 worksheets, 108-109 empty Deleted Items folder, in Business Contact Manager, 375 Junk E-mail folder, in Outlook, 327 enter in Excel cell references, 123 data, 92-93 formulas, 122-123 functions, 124-127 in Word, text, 18-19 in tables, 77 using Find and Replace feature, 49 errors in formulas check, 132 common, 133 printing options, change, 152-153 spelling and grammar, check, in Word, 50-51 Excel. See also specific subject or feature overview, 2, 88 window, parts of, 89 exit programs, 5. See also close expanded menus, 6 F File menu, quickly open documents, 29 presentations, 173 publications, 259 workbooks, 105 file names of Web pages, 383 files attach to messages, in Outlook, 316-317 attached to messages, in Outlook, open, 317 Excel. See workbooks; worksheets PowerPoint. See presentations Publisher. See publications as Web pages preview, 380-381 save, 382-383 Word. See documents find text. See also search in Publisher, 250-251 in Word, 48-49 flagged messages mark as complete, 322 review, 323

TEAM LinG

flags

I

add to messages, 322 color, change, 323 remove from messages, 323 folder list, in Outlook, 309 folders, in Outlook, 311 fonts data, change, in Excel, 136 schemes, change, in Publisher, 276 text, change in PowerPoint, 208 in Publisher, 262 in Word, 62 format numbers, in Excel, 138-139 formatting in Excel, copy, 145 in Publisher, copy, 273 in Word, copy, 67 Formatting toolbar, 17, 89, 165, 237 formula bar, in Excel, 89 formulas. See also functions absolute references in, 131 copy, 130-131 edit, 123 enter, 122, 123 errors check, 132 common, 133 overview, 120-121 relative references in, 130 forward messages, in Outlook, 321 functions. See also formulas enter, 124-127 overview, 121

icons, beside help topics, 13 images, clip art. See also pictures in PowerPoint add, 200-201 delete, 201 search for, 201 in Publisher add, 284-287 delete, 287 search for, 287 in Word add, 58-61 delete, 61 resize, 61 search for, 61 import, text from documents, in Publisher, 252-253 Inbox folder, in Outlook, 311 indent paragraphs, in Word, 72-73 insertion point, in Word move, 22 overview, 17 Internet. See Web pages intranet, overview, 378, 380, 382 introductions, include in e-mail messages in Excel, 109 in Word, 41 italicize data, in Excel, 144 text in PowerPoint, 210 in Publisher, 264 in Word, 66

G

J

Getting Started task pane, 9 open documents using, 29 grammar, check in Outlook, 318-319 in Word, 50-51 gridlines, in worksheets, print, 152-153

Journal, use, in Outlook, 342-345 junk e-mail, in Outlook folder, 311 work with, 326-327 justify text in Publisher, 265 in Word, 70

H handouts, print, in PowerPoint, 230-231 height of rows, change, in worksheets, 135 help information, get, 12-13 Help task pane, 9 hide task panes, 8 toolbars, 10 highlight text, in Word, 65 hyperlinks, create, 378-379

K keyboards, use to change active cell, 90 to move through documents, in Word, 23 slide shows, in PowerPoint, 225 numeric keypad to enter numbers, in Excel, 93

TEAM389 LinG

INDEX

L layout of publications, change, 278 of slides, change, 192-193 left align data, in Excel, 142 text in PowerPoint, 211 in Publisher, 265 in Word, 70 lines in Publisher on objects, change color, 301 style, 302 spacing, change, 270-271 between paragraphs, 271 in Word count, 47 spacing, change, 71 link, to records, in Business Contact Manager appointments, 366-367 business notes, 370-371 e-mail messages, 364-365 phone logs, 372-373 tasks, 368-369 linked items, view for accounts, 349, 351 for business contacts, 354, 355 for opportunities, 361 links. See hyperlinks lists, bulleted or numbered, create in Publisher, 272 in Word, 68-69 M magnify pages, in Print Preview window in Excel, 147 in PowerPoint, 229 in Publisher, 256-257 in Word, 31 mail, in Outlook folders, display, 311 junk, work with, 326-327 overview, 309 margins, change in Excel, 151 in Word, 83 max, common calculation, in Excel, 129 menu bar, 17, 89, 165, 237, 305 menus expand, 6

390

select commands using, 6, 7 shortcut, using, 7 messages, e-mail. See also e-mail in Business Contact Manager link to records, 347, 364 in Outlook abbreviations, 313 arrange, 324 attach files, 316-317 delete, 325 flag, 322-323 forward, 321 junk, work with, 326-327 read, 310-311 reply to, 320 send, 312-313 spelling and grammar, check, 318-319 in Word, send document as attachment, 40-41 Microsoft Office. See specific program or feature min, common calculation, in Excel, 129 mouse, wheeled, 177 move between text boxes, in Publisher, 293 charts, in worksheets, 158 items on, 159 data, in worksheets, 112-113 insertion point, in documents, 22 objects in presentations, 206, 207 in publications, 298 pages, in Publisher, 244 tabs, in documents, 75 text in documents, 44-45 in presentations, 186-187 in publications, between text boxes, 293 through. See also browse through; scroll documents, 22-23 pages, in Publisher, 241 toolbars, 11 My Collections folder, in Microsoft Clip Organizer, 59, 285 My Computer folder, 27 My Documents folder, 27 My Network Places folder, 27 My Recent Documents folder, 27 N names select from Address Book, 314-315 of worksheets, change, 99 Navigation Pane, in Outlook, 309 Normal view in Word, 24, 25 in PowerPoint, 174, 175 create notes in, 226

TEAM LinG

notes in Outlook color, change, 340 create, 338-339 delete, 339 open, 339 overview, 309 size, change, 339 views, change, 341 in PowerPoint browse through, 177 create, 226-227 pages print, 227, 230-231 view, 226 pane, 165 numbered lists, create in Publisher, 272 in Word, 68-69 numbering of pages, in Word add, 84-85 remove, 85 numbers, in Excel add, 129 enter, using numerical keypad, 93 format, change, 138-139 series, complete, 96, 97 O object position, in Publisher, 237 objects. See also specific object in PowerPoint color, change, 213 move, 206, 207 resize, 207 in Publisher 3-D effects, add to, 305 color, change, 300 duplicate on new pages, 243 line color, change, 301 style, change, 302 move or resize, 298-299 rotate, 299 shadow, add to, 304 text wrap, change, 303 Objects toolbar, in Publisher, 237 Office editions, 2 programs, 2-3 commands, select, 6-7 exit, 5 get help in, 12-13 start, 4 task panes, use, 8-9 toolbars, work with, 10-11

Office Collections folder, in Microsoft Clip Organizer, 59, 285 open in Excel, workbooks, 104-105 in Outlook attached files, 317 notes, 339 in PowerPoint, presentations, 172-173 in Publisher, publications, 258-259 in Word, documents, 28-29 operators, in Excel, 120 opportunities, in Business Contact Manager add product information to, 358-359 create, 356-360 delete, 361 display information for, 361 linked items, 361 link appointments, 366-367 business notes, 370-371 e-mail messages, 364-365 phone logs, 372-373 tasks, 368-369 overview, 346 product list, create, 362-363 views, change, 361 organization charts, add to slides, in PowerPoint, 204-205 orientation of pages, in Excel, change, 150 Outbox folder, in Outlook, 311 Outline tab, in PowerPoint, 165, 174 select text using, 181 view in PowerPoint, print, 230-231 in Word, 24, 25 Outlook. See also specific subject or feature overview, 3, 308 window, parts of, 309 Outlook with Business Contact Manager. See Business Contact Manager Overtype feature, in Word, 43 P page breaks, in Word delete, 79 insert, 78, 79 icons, in Publisher, 237 pages. See also documents; presentations; publications; worksheets in Excel magnify, in Print Preview window, 147 margins, change, 151 orientation, change, 150 print, 148-149

TEAM391 LinG

INDEX in Publisher color, add to background, 267 delete, 245 move, 244 through, 241 new create text box on, 243 duplicate objects on, 243 insert, 242-243 pattern, add to background, 267 Web. See Web pages in Word breaks, insert, 78, 79 count, 47 magnify in Print Preview window, 31 margins, change, 83 move through, 22-23 numbering add, 84-85 remove, 85 preview, 30-31 print, 32-33 sections, create, 80 text, center vertically on, 82 paragraphs, in Word. See also text, in Word count, 47 indent, 72-73 line spacing, change in Publisher, 271 in Word, 71 select, 21 tab setting, change, 74-75 pattern, add to page background, in Publisher, 267 Paste Options button, 45, 113, 187 phone logs, in Business Contact Manager create, 372-373 overview, 347 use, 373 view, 373 Picture toolbar, in PowerPoint, 199 pictures. See also clip art; objects in Outlook, for contacts add, 332-333 remove, 335 in PowerPoint add, 198-199 delete, 199 in Publisher add, 282-283 delete, 283 placeholders, on slides, in PowerPoint, 191, 193 point size of text, 209 PowerPoint. See also specific subject or feature overview, 3, 164 window, parts of, 165

392

presentations. See also PowerPoint; slides; text browse through, 176-177 close, 173 color schemes, change, 216-217 create blank, 170 using AutoContent Wizard, 166-169 design template, change, 214-215 e-mail, 178-179 notes, create, 226-227 open, 172-173 overview, 164 package onto CDs, 232-233 preview before printing, 228-229 as Web pages, 380-381 print, 229, 230-231 save, 171 as Web pages, 382-383 select all text in, 181 slides, add, 190-191 delete, 221 spelling, check, 188-189 undo changes, 185 view as slide show, 224-225 views, change, 174-175 preview animations, in PowerPoint, 219 charts, when creating in Excel, 155 documents as Web pages, 380-381 in Word, 30-31 presentations, in PowerPoint, 228-229 publications, 256-257 worksheets, in Excel, 146-147 primary contact, enter for accounts, in Business Contact Manager, 349 print charts, in Excel, 161 documents, in Word, 32-33 notes pages, in PowerPoint, 227 presentations, in PowerPoint, 229, 230-231 publications, in Publisher 255, 257 worksheets, in Excel, 148-149 options, change, 152-153 Print Layout view, in Word, 24, 25 Print Preview feature in Excel, 146-147 in PowerPoint, 228-229 in Publisher, 256-257 in Word, 30-31 product list for opportunities create, 362-363 edit, 363

TEAM LinG

programs, Office commands, select, 6-7 exit, 5 get help in, 12-13 start, 4 task panes, use, 8-9 toolbars, work with, 10-11 publications AutoShapes. See also objects add, 280-281 text to, 281 delete, 281 design, change, 281 clip art. See also objects add, 284-287 delete, 287 search for, 287 color schemes, change, 277 columns, create, 274 create, 238-239 design change, 275 problems, check for, 279 design gallery objects. See also objects add, 296-297 appearance, change, 297 delete, 297 e-mail, 260-261 find and replace text in, 250-251 font schemes, change, 276 hyperlinks, create, 378-379 import text from other document, 252-253 layout, change, 278 line spacing, change, 270-271 between paragraphs, 271 lists, bulleted or numbered, create, 272 objects 3-D effects, add to, 305 color, change, 300 duplicate on new pages, 243 line color, change, 301 style, change, 302 move or resize, 298-299 rotate, 299 shadow, add to, 304 text wrap, change, 303 open, 258-259 options, change, 278 overview, 236 pages add, 242-243 background color, add to, 267 delete, 245 move, 244 through, 241

pictures. See also objects add, 282-283 delete, 283 preview, 256-257 print, 255 save, 254 spelling, check, 248-249 tables. See also objects add, 294 rows to, 295 delete, 295 text. See text, in Publisher text boxes. See also objects add, 290-291 connect, 292-293 connection, break, 293 delete, 291 fit text in, 291 move between connected, 293 text between, 293 undo changes in, 246 WordArt. See also objects add, 288-289 delete, 289 edit, 289 shape, change, 289 zoom in or out, 240 Publisher. See also specific subject or feature overview, 3, 236 parts of window, 237 R read messages, in Outlook, 310-311 Reading Layout view, in Word, 24, 25 use, 38-39 Reading Pane, in Outlook, 309 references, in Excel cell, 90, 121 in formulas absolute, 131 circular, 133 enter, quickly, 123 relative, 130 relative references, in formulas, 130 remove. See also delete in Outlook flags, from messages, 323 journal entries, 345 pictures, for contacts, 335 in PowerPoint animations, 219 slide transitions, 223

TEAM393 LinG

INDEX in Publisher bullets or numbers, from lists, 272 columns, 274 drop caps, from text, 269 in Word page breaks, 79 numbers, 85 section breaks, 81 smart tags, 57 tabs, 75 rename worksheets, in Excel, 99 reorder slides, PowerPoint, 220 replace data in Excel, 111 text in Publisher, 250-251 using thesaurus, 52-53 in Word, 48-49 reply to messages, in Outlook, 320 Research task pane, use, in Word, 54-55 resize. See size right align data, in Excel, 142 text in PowerPoint, 211 in Publisher, 265 in Word, 70 rotate AutoShapes, in PowerPoint, 195 objects, in Publisher, 299 rows in Excel delete, 116, 117 headings, print, 152-153 height, change, 135 insert, 114, 115 overview, 89 scroll through, 91 select, 95 in Publisher, in tables, 294 in Word, in tables, 76 rulers in Publisher, 237 in Word, 17 S save documents, 26-27 files as Web pages, 382-383 presentations, 171 publications, 254 workbooks, 102

394

schedule appointments in Calendar in Business Contact Manager, 366-367 in Outlook, 330-331 scroll. See also browse through; move, through bars in Excel, 89 in Publisher, 237 in Word, overview, 17 through documents, in Word, 23, 36 presentations, 176-177 worksheets, in Excel, 91 search. See also find for clip art images in PowerPoint, 201 in Word, 61 Search Folders, in Outlook, 311 section breaks, in Word delete, 81 insert, 80 select cells, in Excel, 94-95 commands using menus, 6, 7 using toolbars, 7 data, in Excel, 95 text in documents, 20-21 in presentations, 180-181 in publications, 247 send messages, in Outlook, 312-313 Sent Items folder, in Outlook, 311 series, complete, in Excel, 96-97 shadow, add to objects, in Publisher, 304 text, in PowerPoint, 210 shapes, add to diagrams, in PowerPoint, 205 shortcut menus, use, 7 size, change of charts, in Excel, 158, 159 of clip art images, in Word, 61 of data, in Excel, 137 of notes, in Outlook, 339 of notes area, in PowerPoint, 227 of objects in PowerPoint, 207 in Publisher, 298 of text, change in PowerPoint, 209 in Publisher, 263 in Word, 63 of toolbars, 11 Slide pane, in PowerPoint, 165 Slide Show view, 175

TEAM LinG

Slide Sorter view, 175 slides, in PowerPoint. See also PowerPoint; presentations add, 190-191 animate, 218-219 AutoShapes add, 194-195 text to, 195 delete, 195 design, change, 195 rotate, 195 browse through, 176-177 charts add, 202-203 delete, 203 clip art add, 200-201 delete, 201 search for, 201 color schemes, change, 216-217 delete, 221 design template, change, 214-215 diagrams add, 204-205 shapes to, 205 text to, 205 delete, 205 layout, change, 192-193 notes, add to, 226-227 objects, move or resize, 206-207 overview, 164 pictures add, 198-199 delete, 199 preview animations, in slide show, 219 as Web pages, 380-381 print, 230-231 reorder, 220 select all text on, 181 transitions add, 222-223 remove, 223 view as slide show, 224-225 views, change, 174-175 WordArt add, 196-197 delete, 197 edit, 197 Slides tab, in PowerPoint, 165, 174 smart tags, use, in Word, 56-57 snooze, in Calendar, in Outlook, 331 spacing of lines, in Word, change, 71 spelling, check in Outlook, 318-319 in PowerPoint, 188-189 in Publisher, 248-249 in Word, 50-51

spreadsheets. See worksheets Standard toolbar, 17, 89, 165, 237 start Office programs, 4. See also open status bar, in Word, 17 story, in Publisher, 292 sum, common calculation, in Excel, 129 switch between documents, 35 workbooks, 106 worksheets, 98 symbols, insert, in Word, 43 T tab settings, change, in Word, 74-75 tables in Publisher add, 294-295 delete, 295 rows, add to, 295 in Word create, 76 delete, 77 text, 77 enter text, 77 task panes Clipboard in Excel, move or copy data using, 113 overview, 9 in PowerPoint, move or copy text using, 187 in Word, move or copy text using, 45 Getting Started, 9 open documents using, 29 open presentations using, 173 open workbooks using, 105 Help, 9 New Publication, open publications using, 259 overview, 17, 89, 165, 237 Research, use, in Word, 54-55 use, 8-9 tasks in Business Contact Manager create, 368-369 overview, 347 view, 369 in Outlook create, 336-337 delete, 337 mark as complete, 337 overview, 309 views, change, 337 text. See also data; documents; pages; paragraphs in Excel. See also data series, complete, 96, 97 in PowerPoint add to AutoShapes, 195

TEAM395 LinG

INDEX add to diagrams, 205 alignment, change, 211 bold, 210 color, change, 212 copy, 186-187 delete, 184 font, change, 208 insert, 182-183 italicize, 210 move, 186-187 replace on slides, 169 select, 180-181 shadow, add, 210 size, change, 209 spelling, check, 188-189 style, change, 210 underline, 210 in Publisher add to AutoShapes, 281 alignment, change, 265 bold, 264 bulleted lists, create, 272 color, change, 266 columns, create, 274 deselect, 247 drop caps create, 268-269 remove, 269 find and replace, 250-251 fonts, change, 262 formatting, copy, 273 import from other document, 252-253 italicize, 264 line spacing, change, 270-271 move between text boxes, 293 numbered lists, create, 272 select, 247 size, change, 263 style, change, 264 underline, 264 wrap around objects, change, 303 in Word. See also documents; paragraphs alignment, change, 70 automatic corrections, undo, 19 bold, 66 bulleted lists, create, 68-69 center, 70 vertically, 82 color, change, 64 copy, 44-45 delete, 43 from tables, 77 enter, 18-19 in tables, 77 using Find and Replace feature, 49 find, 48-49

396

font, change, 62 formatting, copy, 67 grammar, check, 50-51 highlight, 65 indent, 72-73 insert, 42 italicize, 66 line spacing, change, 71 move, 44-45 numbered list, create, 68-69 replace, 48-49 using thesaurus, 52-53 select, 20-21 shrink to fit on printed pages, 31 size, change, 63 spelling, check, 50-51 tab settings, change, 74-75 underline, 66 text boxes, in Publisher add, 290-291 connect, 292-293 connection, break, 293 create on new page, 243 delete, 291 determine connection, 293 fit text in, 291 move between connected, 293 text between, 293 select text in, 247 thesaurus, use, in Word, 52-53 title bar in Excel, 89 in Outlook, 309 in PowerPoint, 165 in Publisher, 237 in Word, 17 titles of Web pages, 383 toolbars buttons, display names, 7 commands, select using, 7 display or hide, 10 move, 11 size, change, 11 transitions, in PowerPoint add, 222-223 remove, 223 U underline data, in Excel, 144 text in PowerPoint, 210 in Publisher, 264 in Word, 66

TEAM LinG

undo changes in Excel, 118 in PowerPoint, 185 in Publisher, 246 in Word, 46 automatic corrections, 19 V view. See display view buttons, in PowerPoint, 165 views, change for accounts, in Business Contact Manager, 350 for business contacts, in Business Contact Manager, 355 for Calendar, in Outlook, 329 for documents, 24-25 for notes, in Outlook, 341 for opportunities, in Business Contact Manager, 361 for presentations, 174-175 for tasks, in Outlook, 337 W Web Collections folder, in Microsoft Clip Organizer, 59, 285 Web Layout view, in Word, 24, 25 Web pages hyperlinks, create, 378-379 preview, 380-381 save files as, 382-383 width of columns, change, in worksheets, 134 Word. See also specific subject or feature overview, 2, 16 window, parts of, 17 WordArt. See also objects in PowerPoint add, 196-197 delete, 197 edit, 197 in Publisher add, 288-289 delete, 289 edit, 289 shape, change, 289 WordArt toolbar, in PowerPoint, 197 words add to Word’s dictionary, 51 count, in documents, 47 replace, in documents, using thesaurus, 52-53 select in documents, 20-21 in presentations, 180 in publications, 247 workbooks. See also Excel; worksheets close, 105 compare side by side, 107 create, 103

delete worksheets from, 101 e-mail, 109 insert new worksheets, 100 open, 104-105 preview as Web pages, 380-381 print entire, 148-149 save, 102 as Web pages, 382-383 switch between, 106 worksheet tabs browse through, 98 overview, 89 worksheets. See also cells; columns; data; Excel; pages; rows; workbooks columns delete, 117 headings, print, 152-153 insert, 115 width, change, 134 data enter, 92-93 select, 95 delete, 101 e-mail, 108-109 formulas edit, 123 enter, 122 functions, enter, 124-127 gridlines, print, 152-153 insert, 100 margins, change, 151 orientation, change, 150 preview, 146-147 as Web pages, 380-381 print, 148-149 options, change, 152-153 rename, 99 rows delete, 116, 117 headings, print, 152-153 height, change, 135 insert, 114, 115 scroll through, 91 select all cells in, 95 switch between, 98 undo changes, 118 zoom in or out, 119 workspace, in Publisher, 237 wrap, of text around objects, change, in Publisher, 303 Z zoom, in or out in Excel, 119 in Publisher, 240 in Word, 37

TEAM397 LinG

PIANO MARAN ILLUSTRATED™ Piano is an information-packed resource for people who want to learn to play the piano, as well as current musicians looking to hone their skills. Combining full-color photographs and easy-to-follow instructions, this guide covers everything from the basics of piano playing to more advanced techniques. Not only does MARAN ILLUSTRATED™ Piano show you how to read music, play scales and chords and improvise while playing with other musicians, it also provides you with helpful information for purchasing and caring for your piano.

ISBN: 1-59200-864-X Price: $24.99 US; $34.95 CDN Page count: 304

DOG TRAINING MARAN ILLUSTRATED™ Dog Training is an excellent guide for both current dog owners and people considering making a dog part of their family. Using clear, step-by-step instructions accompanied by over 400 full-color photographs, MARAN ILLUSTRATED™ Dog Training is perfect for any visual learner who prefers seeing what to do rather than reading lengthy explanations. Beginning with insights into popular dog breeds and puppy development, this book emphasizes positive training methods to guide you through socializing, housetraining and teaching your dog many commands. You will also learn how to work with problem behaviors, such as destructive chewing.

ISBN: 1-59200-858-5 Price: $19.99 US; $26.95 CDN Page count: 256

TEAM LinG

KNITTING & CROCHETING MARAN ILLUSTRATED™ Knitting & Crocheting contains a wealth of information about these two increasingly popular crafts. Whether you are just starting out or you are an experienced knitter or crocheter interested in picking up new tips and techniques, this information-packed resource will take you from the basics, such as how to hold the knitting needles or crochet hook, to more advanced skills, such as how to add decorative touches to your projects. The easy-to-follow information is communicated through clear, step-bystep instructions and accompanied by over 600 full-color photographs—perfect for any visual learner.

n mara

Knitting & Crocheting

ISBN: 1-59200-862-3 Price: $24.99 US; $33.95 CDN Page count: 304

YOGA MARAN ILLUSTRATED™ Yoga provides a wealth of simplified, easy-to-follow information about the increasingly popular practice of Yoga. This easy-to-use guide is a must for visual learners who prefer to see and do without having to read lengthy explanations. Using clear, step-by-step instructions accompanied by over 500 full-color photographs, this book includes all the information you need to get started with yoga or to enhance your technique if you have already made yoga a part of your life. MARAN ILLUSTRATED™ Yoga shows you how to safely and effectively perform a variety of yoga poses at various skill levels, how to breathe more efficiently and much more.

ISBN: 1-59200-868-2 Price: $24.99 US; $33.95 CDN Page count: 320

TEAM LinG

WEIGHT TRAINING MARAN ILLUSTRATED™ Weight Training is an information-packed guide that covers all the basics of weight training, as well as more advanced techniques and exercises. MARAN ILLUSTRATED™ Weight Training contains more than 500 full-color photographs of exercises for every major muscle group, along with clear, step-by-step instructions for performing the exercises. Useful tips provide additional information and advice to help enhance your weight training experience. MARAN ILLUSTRATED™ Weight Training provides all the information you need to start weight training or to refresh your technique if you have been weight training for some time.

ISBN: 1-59200-866-6 Price: $24.99 US; $33.95 CDN Page count: 320

TEAM LinG

GUITAR MARAN ILLUSTRATED™ Guitar is an excellent resource for people who want to learn to play the guitar, as well as for current musicians who want to fine tune their technique. This full-color guide includes over 500 photographs, accompanied by step-by-step instructions that teach you the basics of playing the guitar and reading music, as well as advanced guitar techniques. You will also learn what to look for when purchasing a guitar or accessories, how to maintain and repair your guitar, and much more. Whether you want to learn to strum your favorite tunes or play professionally, MARAN ILLUSTRATED™ Guitar provides all the information you need to become a proficient guitarist.

Visit www.maran.com/guitar to download MP3 files you can listen to and play along with for all the chords, scales, exercises and practice pieces in the book.

ISBN: 1-59200-860-7 Price: $24.99 US; $33.95 CDN Page count: 320

TEAM LinG

Did you like this book? MARAN ILLUSTRATED™ offers books on the most popular computer topics, using the same easy-to-use format of this book. We always say that if you like one of our books, you’ll love the rest of our books too! Here’s a list of some of our best-selling computer titles: Guided Tour Series - 240 pages, Full Color MARAN ILLUSTRATED’s Guided Tour series features a friendly disk character that walks you through each task step by step. The full-color screen shots are larger than in any of our other series and are accompanied by clear, concise instructions.

MARAN ILLUSTRATED™ Computers Guided Tour MARAN ILLUSTRATED™ Windows XP Guided Tour

mG

ISBN

Price

1-59200-880-1 1-59200-886-0

$24.99 US/$33.95 CDN $24.99 US/$33.95 CDN

MARAN ILLUSTRATED™ Series - 320 pages, Full Color This series covers 30% more content than our Guided Tour series. Learn new software fast using our step-by-step approach and easy-to-understand text. Learning programs has never been this easy!

ILLUSTRATED™ ILLUSTRATED™ ILLUSTRATED™ ILLUSTRATED™

Windows XP Office 2003 Excel 2003 Access 2003

Service

Pack Two

On Off Volume

ffO emuloV

Microsoft

R

Win dow XP Home Editio s n

WindowsXP

MARAN MARAN MARAN MARAN

Microsoft POWER

nO

TM

R

start

t Microsof

start

ISBN

Price

1-59200-870-4 1-59200-890-9 1-59200-876-3 1-59200-872-0

$24.99 US/$33.95 CDN $29.99 US/$40.95 CDN $24.99 US/$33.95 CDN $24.99 US/$33.95 CDN

101 Hot Tips Series - 240 pages, Full Color Progress beyond the basics with MARAN ILLUSTRATED’s 101 Hot Tips series. This series features 101 of the coolest shortcuts, tricks and tips that will help you work faster and easier.

MARAN ILLUSTRATED™ Windows XP 101 Hot Tips

ISBN

Price

1-59200-882-8

$19.99 US/$26.95 CDN TEAM LinG